JP2020168557A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can enlarge each character (performance mode).SOLUTION: For a part of character in a first performance mode formed by a first variable unit group (a slide unit 400, a projection unit 700, and a lifting unit 800) and a part of character in a second performance mode formed by a second variable unit group (the slide unit 400, an upper assembly unit 500, and a lower assembly unit 600), a rotary member 435 of the slide unit 400 is used. Thus, while the rotary member 435 is used for the first performance mode and the second performance mode, a total number of displacement members needed for forming the first performance mode and the second performance mode can be reduced, and each variable unit can be upsized.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is formed displaceably between a first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between a retracted position and an overhanging position, and a retractable position and an overhanging position. A gaming machine including a second group including a plurality of displacement means is known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-176578

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the size of each displacement means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the retracted position and the overhanging position. A second group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between them is provided, and when each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhang position, each of the displacement means of the first group is provided. The first effect mode is formed by the above method, and when each of the displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhanging position, the second effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the second group. The present invention includes a means for both displacement means of one of the first group and one of the displacement means of the second group.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the combined means forms an overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and the second effect mode. The overhanging position is different from the overhanging position.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the combined means is used to form a posture when forming the first effect mode and a second effect mode. The posture is different from that of.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, each displacement means can be increased in size.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the slide unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member. It is a front view of the slide unit. It is a front view of the slide unit. (A) is a front view of the upper united unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit. It is a front view of the upper united unit. It is a rear view of the upper united unit. It is a front view of the lower united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit. It is a front view of the lower united unit. It is a front schematic diagram of the drive arm in the retract rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position and the extension rotation position. It is a partially enlarged front schematic view of the drive arm when it is rotated from a retract rotation position to an extension rotation position. It is a front view of the upper united unit and the lower united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a protruding unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the protrusion unit. It is a front view of a base member and an elevating base. It is an exploded front perspective view of an elevating base and a rotating member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an elevating base and a rotating member. It is a front view of the elevating base and the rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating member. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the drive body arranged in the first rotation position, and (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state of being arranged in the second rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the elevating unit, (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit, and (c) is a side view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 1st state. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 2nd state. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 3rd state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the first state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the second state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the third state. (A) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the second state, (c). ) Is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the third state. It is a front view of the operation unit in the united state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 53. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIa of FIG. 65 (a), and (b) is the slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 65 (b). , The upper united unit and the lower united unit are schematic views. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa of FIG. 66 (a), and (b) is the slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 66 (b). , The upper united unit and the lower united unit are schematic views. It is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear, and (b) is a side view of the transmission gear. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state where the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are meshed with each other, and (b) is a state in which the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are disengaged. It is a schematic view of the slide unit viewed from the front. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa of FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 72 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 72 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the front view of the slide unit in a state where the counterclockwise transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the main body base member are meshed with each other, and (b) is a schematic view in which the accommodating member is displaced and under the main body base member. It is a schematic view which looked at the front view of the slide unit in the state which the meshing of the side 1st rack gear and a transmission gear was released. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa of FIG. 75 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 75 (b). It is a front view of the base member in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic view of the front view of the slide unit in the state where the left rotation transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the base member are meshed with each other, and (b) is the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the base member is released. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the front view of the slide unit in the state. It is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the left slide member in a state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a front view of the left slide member in the state after the switching plate is operated. It is a schematic diagram. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in the state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a schematic view of the slide unit in the state after the switching plate is operated in the front view. is there. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa of FIG. 84 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 84 (a). FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a front view of the slide unit in 8th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVa-XCIVa line of FIG. 93 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 93 (b). (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 93 (c). FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit according to the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member. It is a front view of the slide unit. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa of FIG. 97 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 97 (b). (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of FIG. 97 (c). (A) is a front view of the elevating unit according to the tenth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit, and (c) is a side view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit. It is an operating unit in the combined state. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit on the line CIIa-CIIa of FIG. 101, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit on the line CIIb-CIIb of FIG. 101. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state where the drive body is arranged in the first rotation position in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a state in which the drive body is arranged in the second rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. The lower plate unit 15 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the second winning opening 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is reached as compared with the case where the first electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened is increased from the normal time. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened at the time when it is opened and the first electric accessory 140a is hit once. At least one of the number of times the 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal one, without the number of times of doing.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of the above is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol string is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol string, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening may be made during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to win the 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. The open state (enlarged state) is set, and the ball can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol “” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the first through gate 66. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441,475,476.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 98. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. 7 to 9 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member 730, and the elevating member 820 are moved to the retracted positions, respectively. In the displaced state, from the state shown in FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced toward the right slide member 450, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to the overhanging positions. In FIG. 9, the state in which the rotating member 730 and the elevating member 820 are displaced to the overhanging positions from the state shown in FIG. 7 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, a slide unit 400, an upper uniting unit 500, a lower uniting unit 600, The projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are rotatably housed.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The slide unit 400 is arranged with a horizontally long base member 410 having a rectangular shape in the front view, which is arranged in the upper portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and the upper end portion of the base member 410 is slidably displaceable. The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are provided, and each slide member 430 is independently placed in the left-right direction (base member) on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300. It is formed so that the effect of sliding displacement in the longitudinal direction of 410) can be executed.

In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be in contact with each other. However, in the present embodiment, when the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are in contact with each other, they are damaged. A restraining structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

A rectangular horizontally long guide member 419 in front view is arranged in a posture parallel to the base member 410 in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are arranged. When is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 are guided by sliding between the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower end sides of the slide members 430 and 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The upper uniting unit 500 includes a rectangular horizontally long base member 510 in front view arranged in front of the base member 410 in the slide unit 400, and an upper displacement member 530 displaceably arranged in the base member 510. On the other hand, the lower uniting unit 600 includes a front view substantially L-shaped base member 610 and a lower base member 610 arranged on the left side portion and the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. The lower displacement member 640 is provided so as to be displaceable.

The upper displacement member 530 is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back surface side of the base member 510 and an overhanging position projecting to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the lower displacement member 640. Is displaceably formed between the retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and the overhanging position protruding toward the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are formed. When overhanging to the overhanging position, the side surfaces (upper contact portion 533 and lower contact portion 643) of both displacement members 530 and 640 are brought into contact with each other (combined).

In this case, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 displaced in the directions close to each other come into contact with each other, an impact may be generated and the posture may become unstable such as being bounced off each other. In the present embodiment, a structure that suppresses the impact at the time of such contact is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projecting unit 700 has a horizontally long rectangular base member 710 in front view arranged in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and an evacuation unit 700 arranged so as to be able to move up and down in the base member 710. A base 720 and a rotating member 730 rotatably arranged on the elevating base 720 are provided, and the elevating base 720, together with the rotating member 730, has a retracted position and a rear case 300 retracted to the front side of the base member 710. It is formed so that it can be displaced (elevated) from the overhanging position overhanging the opening 301a toward the front side.

Further, the projecting unit 700 includes a projecting member 735 that is displaced (slide displacement) in the rotating member 730, a swinging member 732 that is swingably arranged in the rotating member 730, and the projecting member 735. It includes a drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) that drives the swing member 732.

The protrusion unit 700 drives the protrusion member 735 and the swing member 732 by the drive motor 763 of 1. Therefore, the driving force required to drive the projecting member 735 and the driving force required to drive the swing member 732 overlap, which may increase the load and reduce the durability of the drive motor 763. In the embodiment, a structure that suppresses the load of the drive motor 763 is adopted. Such a structure will be described later.

The elevating unit 800 includes a rectangular horizontally long base member 810 in front view arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper united unit 500, and an elevating member 820 arranged so as to be able to elevate on the base member 810. The elevating member 820 is formed so as to be displaceable (elevated) between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an overhanging position projecting to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, a structure in which the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12.

FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. It should be noted that FIGS. 10 to 12 show a state in which the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (the position farthest from the right slide member 450).

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 410. The member 420, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420. It is mainly provided with a drive mechanism for making the vehicle run.

The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, in the base member 410, a plate-shaped projecting plate portion 411 is horizontally projected from the lower portion of the sliding rod member 420 toward the front side, and the upper surface of the projecting plate portion 411 (facing the sliding rod member 420). The base side rack gear 412 is engraved on the side), and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the protruding plate portion 411.

The sliding rod member 420 is a metal rod-shaped body having a circular cross section for guiding the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted into the sliding holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. By doing so, both slide members 430 and 450 are held slidably. Both ends of the sliding rod member 420 are fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

The base side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. The transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 430 is a second member in which a first member 431 having a rectangular shape in a front view, a first side pinion gear 432 rotatably arranged on the first member 431, and the first side pinion gear 432 are meshed with each other. A front-view rectangular horizontally long second member 433 having a side rack gear 433a, a front-view rectangular vertically long base member 434 hanging downward from the tip side of the second member 433, and a rotatable base member 434 on the front side of the base member 434. 435, a displacement member 436 that is possibly arranged on the back side of the rotating member 435, and a transmission that transmits the motion (slide displacement) of the base member 434 to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435. The gears 437a to 437f are mainly provided.

The first member 431 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. , Sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 431 is slidably displaced on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A first side rack gear 431a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear to which the left drive gear 471 described later is meshed with, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as will be described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420. To.

As described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably arranged (shafted) on the first member 431, and the arranged portion of the first side pinion gear 432 (front side of the first member 431). A front-view rectangular plate-shaped cover 431b is disposed of the vehicle. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is arranged in a state of being covered on the back side of the cover 431b.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420, that is, is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, the first member 431 is acted on by the base side rack gear 412 along with the slide displacement. Then, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

The second member 433 is displaceably arranged (connected) to the first member 431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the tip side, so that the second member 433 is relative to the first member 431. It is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the sliding rod member 420 while being displaced. The sliding hole has an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

In this case, the second member 433 is engraved with the second side rack gear 433a on the lower surface thereof, and the second side rack gear 433a is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated with the slide displacement of the first member 431, it is affected by the first side pinion gear 432 (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is affected. The second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 by being converted into a linear motion by the second rack gear 433a and then transmitted to the second member 433).

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the second member 433 is referred to. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state of being faster than the first member 431. Can be done.

The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably arranged on the sliding rod member 420, and the movable ranges of both slide members 430 and 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can come into contact with each other. In this case, in the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. To.

The right slide member 450 is rotatable toward the front side of the front view rectangular horizontally long rack member 451 and the front view rectangular vertically long base member 454 hanging downward from the base end side of the rack member 451 and the base member 454. To transmit the motion (slide displacement) of the rotating member 455 to the rotating member 455, the displacement member 456 displaced on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and the base member 410 of the base member 454 to the rotating member 455. The transmission gears 457a to 457f of the above are mainly provided.

The rack member 451 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section on the proximal end side, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. As a result, it is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably displaced on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A rack gear 451a is engraved on the upper surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472, which will be described later, is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420.

The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410, and a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 meshed with the drive gears 471 and 472, respectively. A left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 to which a drive shaft is connected to each of the pinion gears 473 and 474 are mainly provided.

The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), respectively. Therefore, the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476 rotationally drive the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474, thereby passing through the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a. Therefore, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be slid and displaced independently of each other.

A cover member 416 is arranged on the front surface of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471 and 472 and the pinion gears 473 and 474 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. .. Further, the drive motors 475 and 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, the cover member 416 is provided with an insertion hole, and the drive shafts of the drive motors 475 and 476 are connected to the pinion gears 473 and 474 through the insertion hole.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, a structure for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 will be described.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the base member 434 is a back side base member 434a connected to the second member 433 and a front side arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 434a. A base member 434b is provided, and transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (shaft support) between facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side base member 434a and the front side base member 434b. A shaft support hole 434b1 having a circular front view is bored in the front side base member 434b.

As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, and by connecting (toothing) each other in series. , 1 gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 437a at the head and the transmission gear 437f at the tail.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotary shaft 435a of the rotary member 435 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 437f.

Therefore, by sliding-displace the left slide member 430 (base member 434) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is rotated. It is transmitted to the tail transmission gear 437f via the transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotation of the tail transmission gear 437f can rotate the rotating member 435.

The rotating member 435 includes a rotating shaft 435a and a supporting shaft 435b that project coaxially from the back surface. The rotation shaft 435a is a portion that serves as a rotation axis when the rotation member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, the transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to each other. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 437f, the rotating member 435 is rotated with respect to the base member 434.

The support shaft 435b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. By fitting the E-ring into the fitting groove recessed in the tip of the support shaft 435b, the displacement member 436 from the support shaft 435b is prevented from coming off.

The displacement member 436 is a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, an escape hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotating member 435 is inserted into the shaft support hole 436a, whereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 435.

The escape hole 436b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing the annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width is formed by the rotating member 435. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 436a) with respect to the rotating member 435, the rotating shaft 435a can be displaced along the relief hole 436b and is displaced from the rotating member 435. Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is arranged on the back surface of the rotating member 435, and a pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is meshed with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 435 with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center. Can be made to.

In this case, the rotating member 435 is formed in a substantially elongated shape in which the front view shape has a larger dimension in the length direction than the dimension in the width direction, and is a position that is substantially the center in the length direction and the width direction. The rotation shaft 435a is arranged on the. The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed by dividing the rotating member 435 into substantially two at the center in the length direction. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation, the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435, making it difficult for the player to see. Can be done.

Further, since the drive motor 441 is arranged on the rotating member 435 on the side opposite to the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are arranged on the rotating member 435. The position of the center of gravity can be brought close to the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation (the state where the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435), the rotating member The position of the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are arranged on the 435 is substantially aligned with the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in a state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation (a state in which the displacement member 436 is visibly overhanging to the side of the rotating member 435). The position of the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure can be separated from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 by the amount of the overhang of the displacement member 436. As a result, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotating member 435, and the initial operation can be smoothly performed.

That is, when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is started from the stopped state, the driving force becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in a state where the displacement member 436 projects laterally to the rotating member 435 moves downward in the direction of gravity at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435). When it is located on the side to be displaced, the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 (rotated in one direction), so that the above-mentioned rotating action due to the weight of the structure causes the displacement member 436. It can assist the rotation. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in the state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435). When the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435 (rotated in the other direction), the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is brought close to (matches) with the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) from increasing. As a result, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in a state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435) is stopped. When it is located on the side of the structure, the rotation of the structure can be easily stopped by the weight of the structure described above. As a result, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped quickly.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a back side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451 and a front side base member 454b arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 454a. The transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (shafted) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the member 454a and the front side base member 454b. A shaft support hole 454b1 having a circular front view is bored in the front side base member 454b.

As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and by connecting (toothing) each other in series. , 1 gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 457a at the head and the transmission gear 457f at the tail.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotary shaft 455a of the rotary member 455 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 457f.

Therefore, by sliding-displace the right slide member 450 (base member 454) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action of the base member 410 from the right rotation transmission rack gear 414, and the rotation is rotated. It is transmitted to the tail transmission gear 457f via the transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotation of the tail transmission gear 457f can rotate the rotating member 455.

The rotating member 455 includes a rotating shaft 455a and a supporting shaft 455b that project coaxially from the back surface. The rotation shaft 455a is a portion that serves as a rotation axis when the rotation member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to each other. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 457f, the rotating member 455 is rotated with respect to the base member 454.

The support shaft 455b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. By fitting the E-ring into the fitting groove recessed in the tip of the support shaft 455b, the displacement member 456 from the support shaft 455b is prevented from coming off.

The displacement member 456 is a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, an escape hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotating member 455 is inserted into the shaft support hole 456a, whereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 455.

The escape hole 456b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing the annular shape centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width is formed by the rotating member 455. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 456a) with respect to the rotating member 455, the rotating shaft 455a can be displaced along the relief hole 456b and is displaced from the rotating member 455. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is arranged on the back surface of the rotating member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 is meshed with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 is rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 455 with the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b) as the rotation center. Can be made to.

In this case, the rotating member 455 is formed in a substantially elongated shape whose front view shape is larger in the length direction than the width direction, and the rotation shaft 455a is provided on one end side in the length direction. The drive motor 461 is arranged on the other end side as well as being arranged. Further, since the displacement member 456 is arranged on the rotating member 455 on the side opposite to the drive motor 461 with the support shaft 455b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are arranged on the rotating member 455 The position of the center of gravity can be arranged at a position eccentric to one end side of the rotating member 455 (a position separated from the rotating shaft 455a).

Therefore, at the start of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455), the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are arranged on the rotating member 455 is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. By locating it on the side, the weight of the structure can be caused to act in the direction of rotating the structure itself. As a result, the load on the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is positioned on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, so that the weight of the structure is used as resistance. It can be made to act to make it easier to stop the rotation of the structural value. As a result, when the drive of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped quickly.

Further, as will be described later, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), the right slide member 450 is retracted (right side in FIG. 10). By locating the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the weight of the structure acts as a resistance and exerts a buffering action due to the rotation of the structure value. Can be made to.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, showing a transition state when the left slide member 430 is slid displacement. Note that FIGS. 17 and 18 show a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the left slide member 430 is arranged in the retracted position, the second member 433 is displaced to the maximum relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is movable. It is arranged at the left end of the range (the left side of FIG. 17A, the position farthest from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the first member 431 moves to the right with respect to the base member 410 due to the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a (FIG. 11). 17 (a) Slide displacement toward the right side, in the direction closer to the right slide member 450).

In this case, as described above, the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second rack gear 433a and the base side thereof. Since the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431 is interposed in the state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, By the action of the base side rack gear 412, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while being slidably displaced together with the first member 431, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is acted on the second side rack gear 433a, so that the second member 433 Is slid and displaced in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433, whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431, catches up with the first member 431 and is second with respect to the first member 431. The members 433 are partially overlapped (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is shortened).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the positive direction, and the first member 431 is further to the right with respect to the base member 410 (the right side in FIG. 17A, the direction closer to the right slide member 450). ), As shown in FIG. 18A, the second member 433 is displaced to the maximum relative to the first member 431 in the shortening direction, and the base member 434 is at the right end of the movable range (FIG. 18). (A) The right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the overhanging position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the opposite direction to the above case from the state where the left slide member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. Due to the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first rack gear 431a, the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in the left direction (left side in FIG. 18A, in the direction away from the right slide member 450). ..

Also in this case, the action of the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431, as in the case described above. As a result, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433, whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431, precedes the first member 431 with respect to the first member 431. The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extension direction (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is extended more than the total length at the overhang position).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the opposite direction, and the first member 431 is further leftward with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 17B, the direction away from the right slide member 450). ), As shown in FIG. 17A, the second member 433 is maximally displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is at the left end of the movable range (FIG. 17). (A) The position farthest from the left and right slide members 450), that is, the overhanging position.

In the present embodiment, a detected portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is arranged on the base member 410 (neither is shown). In this case, the detection sensor is arranged at a position where the detected portion of the second member 431 can be detected when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is arranged at the retracted position, and the detected portion is detected by the detection sensor. When is detected, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped, assuming that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position.

On the other hand, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped at the overhang position, the number of drive steps of the left drive motor 475 after the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position to the overhang position is cumulatively added. It is done by doing. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches a predetermined value, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped, assuming that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position.

Here, in this embodiment, the movable range of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (the range from the retracted position to the overhanging position) has a portion overlapping with the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Therefore, the movable range of both can be increased to enhance the effect of the effect.

However, if the movable ranges are overlapped in this way, it is caused by variations in component dimensions / assembly, variations in the amount of displacement due to rattling (gap) based on tolerances, or poor control (for example, poor control). Due to the occurrence of the error of cumulative addition of the number of drive steps), the left slide member 430 slide-displaced to the overhanging position may come into contact with the right slide member 450, resulting in damage. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the effect of the slide displacement is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be able to suppress damage while ensuring the effect of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

That is, as described above, the second member is formed by the action of the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431. The 433 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431, and the base member 434 (rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435) which is visible to the player on the second member 433. Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the slide displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the effect of the slide displacement can be ensured.

On the other hand, as described above, the left slide member 430 brings the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). , The impact at the time of contact can be weakened, and damage to both can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the right slide member 450 is made to stand by (stop) closer to the retracted position than the overhanging position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced toward the overhanging position. At the time of making the left slide member 430 come into contact with the right slide member 450, the left slide member 430 pushes the right slide member 450 in the direction of slide displacement to produce an effect of sliding displacement of both in an integrated state. be able to. In this case as well, the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, can be brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). It is possible to weaken the impact of and suppress damage to both.

The right slide member 450 is arranged on the base member 410 so as to be slidable, and the direction of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. That is, when the right slide member 450 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the left slide member 430 arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is separated from the left slide member 430 (see FIG. 18A). FIG. 18A has a movable range for sliding displacement to the right side), and the direction in which the right slide member 450 can be slidably displaced is the left slide member 430 when the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the left slide member 430. It is considered to be the direction that allows the slide displacement of.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (relieved backward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Therefore, a buffering action can be exerted (see FIG. 18B). As a result, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the directions of slide displacement between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are parallel, so that when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450 The escape operation can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exert a buffering action and easily suppress damage to both.

Further, in this case, by sharing the sliding rod member 420 between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, the directions of slide displacement of both members are parallel to each other, so that the overall size can be reduced. .. That is, when the sliding rod member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the sliding rod member for guiding the right slide member 450 are arranged side by side in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement. The space is increased by that amount, which leads to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the sliding rod member 420 of 1 in both the sliding rod members 430 and 450, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in a direction away from the left slide member 430 arranged at the overhanging position (on the right side in FIG. 18A), and is not different from the left slide member 430. It can be placed at the position of contact. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the left slide member 430 is not brought into contact with the right slide member 450.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the left slide member 430 extends beyond the target position due to the above-mentioned variation and poor control. When the right slide member 450 is positively brought into contact with the slide member 430 (functions as a stopper), while the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively low speed, it is easy to match the stop position with the target position. Therefore, by arranging the right slide member 450 at a position where it is not in contact with the left slide member 430, the number of contacts can be reduced and the fatigue associated with the contact can be reduced. As a result, the life of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

Here, the left slide member 430 is provided with both members 431 and 433 separately in order to accelerate the speed of the second member 433 with respect to the first member 431, and the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear. It is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between the 433a, and the number of parts and the sliding portion are increased, so that the weight and the driving resistance are increased. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 is relatively large.

In particular, during the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when starting the slide displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the initial velocity when the slide displacement is started from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the slide displacement may be hindered.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed so as to be in contact with the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position from the contacted state (FIG. 18 (a). ) It is formed so that it can be slidably displaced to the left). Therefore, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. As a result, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slid and displaced from the stopped state. As a result, the initial operation (initial speed) can be increased to improve the effect of the slide displacement.

Further, when the right slide member 450 is slid and displaced in the direction of pushing the left slide member 430 back to the retracted position (the left direction in FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431 of the left slide member 430. (The first member 431 is pushed back), so that the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

That is, the right slide member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431, which has a slower slide displacement speed than the second member 433 of the left slide members 430, and pushes back the first member 431. Therefore, the right slide member 450 The speed of the left slide member 430 exceeds the speed of the right slide member 450 after the time when the auxiliary force is acting on the left slide member 430 (first member 431) (that is, after the left slide member 430 in the stopped state starts to be pushed back). Therefore, the time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450) can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be improved.

Here, a mechanism (left pinion gear 473, left drive gear 471, and first side rack gear 431a) that converts the rotational driving force of the left drive motor 475 into linear motion to slide-displace the left slide member 430 (first member 431). Gear ratio and the rotational driving force of the right drive motor 476 are converted into linear motion to slide and displace the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472 and rack gear 451a). The ratio is set to a different gear ratio, and in the present embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

In the present embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 is formed in the same shape as the right pinion gear 474 and the first side rack gear 431a is formed in the same shape as the rack gear 451a. Therefore, the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is the number of teeth of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set to be larger than the number. That is, a large gear ratio means that the rack gear (first side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) is displaced in the direction of slide displacement when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. It means that the amount is large.

As a result, the left slide member 430 can be easily slid and displaced quickly from the stopped state, and after the start of the slide displacement, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the slide displacement.

That is, by setting the gear ratio of the right slide member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. Therefore, the force of the right slide member 450 to push back the left slide member 430 is increased. The initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state.

On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is set to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) can be increased by that amount. The speed of slide displacement of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect due to the slide displacement.

If the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state), the initial operation becomes smooth, but the initial operation ends. In the later steady state, the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) becomes low. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased in order to increase the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. , The initial operation (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) is hindered (delayed). That is, both the smooth initial operation of the left slide member 430 and the increase in the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation are compatible. However, by adopting a structure in which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430, which was not possible in the past, such compatibility has become possible for the first time.

Next, the detailed configuration of the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. First, the upper united unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23.

FIG. 19A is a front view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 19B is a rear view of the upper united unit 500. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit 500. Note that FIG. 19 shows a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper uniting unit 500 is connected to the base member 510, the rack member 520 displaceable in the internal space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. It includes an upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for sliding displacement of the rack member 520.

The base member 510 includes a front-view rectangular horizontally long back base 511 and a front-view rectangular horizontally long front base 512 arranged (covered) on the front side of the back-view base 511, and the back-view base 511 and the front base. The rack member 520 is slidably accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of 512.

The back base 511 has a connecting hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member projecting to the front side. A support shaft 511c inserted into the guide groove 522 of the 520 is provided.

The connecting hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the back surface base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted, and when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced due to the slide displacement of the rack member 520, the upper displacement member 530 The posture (direction) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed by sliding the guide pin 532 along the guide hole 511b.

The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft support hole 521, which is a front view circular hole for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening extending linearly. It includes a guide groove 522 and a rack gear 523 carved along a direction parallel to the extending direction of the guide groove 522, and is formed as a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body.

The support shaft 511c of the back surface base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 521, the extension direction of the guide groove 522 is the extension direction of the back base 511. It is parallel to the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a. Therefore, the direction of slide displacement of the rack member 520 is defined as the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a of the back base 511.

The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 projecting from the front side. The connecting shaft 531 is a columnar body having a circular cross section rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 521 of the rack member 520 via the connecting hole 511a of the back base 511, and the guide pin 532 is the back base 511. It is a columnar body having a circular cross section that slides along the guide hole 511b.

A collar C1 having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the tips of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 to prevent them from coming off. .. Further, the upper displacement member 530 is formed with an upper contact portion 533 on its side surface. The upper contact portion 533 is a portion that comes into contact with the lower contact portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and is on the side surface opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 (tip side). It is formed.

The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front surface of the rear base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, and a drive motor 543 to which the drive shaft is connected to the pinion gear 542. Be prepared. The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotationally driving the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slidably displaced along the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a via the rack gear 523.

Next, the operation of the upper uniting unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. 22 and 23 are front views and rear views of the upper uniting unit 500, and shows a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 23 (a), when the upper displacement member 530 is arranged in the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are on one end side of the connecting hole 511a and the guide hole 511b. It is located on the right side of FIG. 23), and the upper displacement member 530 forms a horizontal posture and is arranged in a state of being hidden behind the base member 510.

When the drive motor 543 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the connecting shaft 531 is horizontally displaced along the connecting hole 511a and the guide pin 532 is displaced in the guide hole 511b as the rack member 520 slides. As shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 23 (b), the upper displacement member 530 is tilted diagonally (rotated about the connecting shaft 531) in the horizontal direction by being guided along the above. Displaced to. That is, the tip side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the positive direction, the upper displacement member 530 is further obliquely tilted (rotated around the connecting shaft 531) and displaced in the horizontal direction, and is displaced in the horizontal direction in FIGS. 22 (c) and FIG. As shown in 23 (c), a vertical posture is formed in which the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward. That is, it is arranged at the overhanging position (first position).

Next, the lower coalescing unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower united unit 600. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit 600. Note that FIG. 23 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the lower uniting unit 600 has a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, and a base end of the drive arm holding member 620. A drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, a lower displacement member 640 to which the tip end side of the drive arm 630 is connected, a connecting arm 650 to connect the lower displacement member 640 to a base member 610, and a drive arm 630. It includes an urging spring 660 for applying a force and a drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the drive arm 630.

The base member 610 is formed as a plate-like body having a substantially L-shape in front view, and has a projecting base portion 611 projecting from the front at the lower end of the substantially L-shape and projecting from the front at the upper end portion of the substantially L-shape. It is provided with a connecting shaft 612 to be formed. The projecting base 611 is a portion for arranging the drive arm holding member 620 at a position protruding from the front of the base member 610 (raised toward the front side), and is along the edge portion at the lower end of the base member 610. Be thrust.

The drive arm holding member 620 includes a back side holding member 621 arranged on the projecting base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side holding member 621. The drive arm 630 and the transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

Since the back side of the back side holding member 621 of the drive arm holding member 620 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding base portion 611 of the base member 610, the height of the protruding base portion 611 is increased. A predetermined space can be formed between the back surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (back surface side holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In the present embodiment, since the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the retracted position is formed so as to be able to be accommodated in such a space, the outer shape of the lower uniting unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

In the drive arm 630, a plurality of teeth are engraved along an axial support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and an outer peripheral surface of a columnar portion concentric with the axial support hole 631. As a long member having a gear portion 632 and a connecting hole 633 formed at an end opposite to the gear portion 632, the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 are separated by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

The lower displacement member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 projecting from the front side. The drive arm connecting shaft 641 is a columnar body having a circular cross section rotatably connected to the connecting hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 651 of the connecting arm 650. It is a columnar body with a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connecting arm 650, and is displaced with respect to the base member 610 by rotating the drive arm 630.

The lower displacement member 640 is formed with a lower contact portion 643 on its side surface. The lower contact portion 643 is a portion that is brought into contact with the upper contact portion 533 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and is formed from a virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface on the side separated from the overhanging direction side (right side in FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface oriented substantially orthogonal to the virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

The connecting arm 650 includes connecting holes 651 and 652 formed on one end side and the other end side, and the connecting holes 651 and 652 are provided with the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. Are rotatably connected to each other. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced with respect to the base member 610, the displacement locus of the lower displacement member 640 at the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 portion is changed to the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined as an arc shape at the center.

The urging spring 660 is a metal torsional spring, and one leg extending from the winding portion is engaged with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg is engaged with the drive arm 630 to engage the drive arm 630. Is urged in the direction of rotation from the retracted position to the overhanging position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 27A), the elastic deformation (torsional deformation) of the urging spring 660 is maximized, and the elastic recovery force causes the displacement member 630 to be displaced. The 640 is urged in the rotation direction (clockwise rotation in FIG. 27A) to displace the 640 from the retracted position to the overhanging position. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial operation of the lower displacement member 640 in the overhanging direction can be smoothly performed.

The drive mechanism is arranged in front of the transmission gears 671a to 671c arranged inside the drive arm holding member 620, the drive shaft is connected to the transmission gear 671a, and the drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622). It is provided with a drive motor 672 to be installed. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gear 671a is at the head and the transmission gear 671c is at the tail. The gear train (gear train) of 1 is formed.

The rear transmission gear 671c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c acts on the gear portion 632, so that the drive arm 630 is rotated.

Next, the operation of the lower uniting unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower uniting unit 600, showing a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), in the state where the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 27 (a) counterclockwise rotation direction). It is located at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as "retract rotation position"), and is in a tilted posture in which the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631) is tilted downward toward the tip side (connecting hole 633). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a vertical posture in which the directions connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 are substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at a position where the horizontal position is on the leftmost side (the position farthest from the overhanging position in the horizontal direction, the left side in FIG. 27 (a)), and the vertical position is the lowest. It is arranged at a position (the position farthest from the overhanging position in the vertical direction, the lower side in FIG. 27 (a)).

When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in the front view, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640. Is displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 27 (b)), and the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the right (right side in FIG. 27 (a)).

When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the positive direction from the state shown in FIG. 27 (b), the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 is further driven as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in the front view. Along with being displaced upward, the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced to the right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position.

In the overhanging position, the drive arm 630 is located at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as "overhanging rotation position") that is maximally rotated clockwise in the front view (FIG. 27 (c) rightward rotation direction). In the rotation position, the drive arm 630 is arranged at a position where its tip side (connecting hole 633) crosses the vertical line passing through the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted most upward. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at a position where the horizontal position is the rightmost position (the position farthest from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, the right side in FIG. 27 (c)), and the vertical position is the uppermost position ( It is arranged at a position farthest from the retracted position in the vertical direction, slightly downward from the upper side of FIG. 27 (a).

Here, the displacement speed of the lower uniting unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a front schematic view of the drive arm 630 at the retracted rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the extension rotation position. Further, FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (d) are partially enlarged front schematic views of the drive arm 630 when it is rotated from the retracted rotation position to the overhanging rotation position.

Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotation position and the overhang rotation position. In the following, the drive arm 630 is rotated by an angle θ1 from the retracted rotation position, and the drive arm 630 is in a horizontal posture. The rotation position (the imaginary line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction) is called the "horizontal rotation position", and is rotated by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotation position. The rotation position in which the drive arm 630 is in an upright posture (a posture in which the virtual line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as a "vertical rotation position". The overhang rotation position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotation position.

In this case, FIG. 29 (a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29 (b) shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. 29 (c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29 (d) shows the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. Corresponding to 630, FIG. 29 (e) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position.

The drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 672 is kept constant, and therefore the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 is kept constant. In this case, it can be assumed that the transient period from the stopped state until the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotational speed through rotation is sufficiently small and there is no transient response.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (a) and 29 (b), in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The tilted posture is positioned below the hole 631, and the connecting hole 633 is displaced upward as it is rotated from the retracted position to the horizontal rotation position. Therefore, the speed V of the connecting hole 633 (the arc shape of the connecting hole 633) The tangential speed in the displacement locus) is maximized at the horizontal rotation position, with the upward speed component (speed Vv) gradually increasing. That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the speed upward thereof is gradually increased.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (b) to 29 (d), in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The speed V of the connecting hole 633 is directed upward because the connecting hole 633 is further displaced upward as it is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position in an inclined posture that is positioned above the hole 631. The velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually reduced to 0 at the vertical rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the speed of the downward displacement member 640 is gradually reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (d) and 29 (e), in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of angle θ3), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The speed V of the connecting hole 633 is increased because the connecting hole 633 is displaced downward as the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position in an inclined posture so as to be positioned above the hole 631. It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in such a section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

In this way, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. As will be described later, the lower displacement member 640 abuts (merges) with the upper displacement member 530 at the retracted position. When it is done, the occurrence of the impact can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from being repelled by the upper displacement member 530, and to stabilize the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (a) to 29 (d), in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is set. While the velocity component Vh toward the left is gradually increased, the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is the velocity component Vh toward the right in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). Gradually increased.

As a result, in the lower displacement member 640, the vicinity of the connecting hole 633 is displaced to the left in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1), while the displacement direction is horizontal. It is inverted at the rotation position, and in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), it is displaced toward the right (direction toward the retracted position).

That is, after the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced toward the left and stopped at one end on the leftmost side (after the horizontal velocity component Vh is set to 0), the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed to the right. It can be gradually displaced horizontally in an accelerated state toward the direction. As a result, it is possible to bring out the action of bending and stretching the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction, and to give a dynamic feeling to the action of the lower displacement member 640.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the section where the horizontal velocity component Vh is decreased (range of angle θ1), the vertical velocity component Vv is increased while the horizontal velocity component Vh is increased (angle). In the range of θ2), since the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, the above-mentioned operation of bending and stretching in the horizontal direction can be emphasized, and as a result, the dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 is made stronger for the player. You can impress.

On the other hand, as described above, in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with (combines) the upper displacement member 530, the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). ), In the configuration in which the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0, the effect of the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be hindered. On the other hand, in such a section (range of angle θ2), the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction can be increased. Therefore, instead of the displacement in the upward direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) causes the downward displacement member. The effect of 640 can be performed, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be ensured.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 640, the connecting arm 650 is attached to a portion (connecting arm connecting shaft 642) separated upward from the connected portion (driving arm connecting shaft 641) of the drive arm 630. Since they are connected, the upper portion of the lower displacement member 640 (near the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced to the right as it rotates around the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. .. Therefore, as described above, when the motion of bending and stretching the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction is exhibited, the motion of bending and stretching is increased by the amount of the horizontal displacement to the right accompanying the rotation of the connecting arm 650. The dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Further, when the lower displacement member 640 is produced by the displacement in the horizontal direction (right side) instead of the displacement in the upward direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction (right side) is increased to produce the effect. Can be easily secured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the contact (coalescence) operation at the overhanging position of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600 will be described.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, and shows a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position. ..

As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (c), the upper displacement member 530 is moved from the retracted position hidden behind the base member 510 to the tip side as the drive motor 543 is driven. The (upper contact portion 533) is lowered while drawing a curved locus, and is arranged at the overhanging position in a state in which the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward in a vertical posture. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 with the drive of the drive motor 672 from the retracted position where the horizontal position is the leftmost position and the vertical position is the lowermost position, and is stretched. Placed in the out position.

As a result, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the overhanging position are united in a state where the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643 are in contact with each other. As a result, both can be integrated to form a predetermined character. In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of the horse head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of the horse body, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of the horse leg. As a result, a jumping horse character is formed at the evacuation position.

Here, when the descending upper displacement member 530 and the ascending lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position, they are repelled in a direction in which they are separated from each other by the impact generated at the time of the contact. The posture (that is, the shape of the character) becomes unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speeds of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 are slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, it takes time for both displacement members 530 and 640 to be integrated to form one character. Is bulky and stretches, which hinders the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, the velocity toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640. Since the component Vv is reduced when approaching the overhanging position, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 from being repelled in the direction of being separated from each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640.

Further, since the downward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually reduced in the section (range of the angle θ2) from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, the lower displacement member 640 as a whole is reduced. It is possible to secure the velocity component Vv that goes upward. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required to integrate the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 to form one character, and to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the tip (connecting hole 633) of the drive arm 630 is connected to the lower displacement member 640 and the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connecting portion (connecting hole 633) is used. ) Is drawn to draw an arc-shaped locus to gradually reduce the upward speed component Vv. Therefore, the downward speed component Vv of the downward displacement member 640 is reduced to keep the drive state of the drive motor 672 constant. Can be done as. That is, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the overhang rotation position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the overhang position where the lower displacement member 640 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, among the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640, the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) can be set to a negative value at the overhanging position. That is, in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhanging rotation position (range of the angle θ3), the vertical velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is in the downward direction (direction away from the upper displacement member 530). It can be an ingredient.

As a result, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can be released (retracted) downward from the upper displacement member 530, so that an impact is generated. Can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent both displacement members 530 and 640 from being repelled in the direction of being separated from each other, and it is possible to stabilize their postures.

Further, in this way, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position in a state where the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 is a negative value. With the configuration, even if the position of contact (coalescence) is displaced due to dimensional tolerance / assembly tolerance or control variation in the drive mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the lower part is displaced. Since the range in which the upward velocity component Vv of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, it is possible to easily bring the displacement member 640 into contact with the upper displacement member 530 within a range in which the impact can be suppressed.

Next, the projecting unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projecting unit 700. Further, FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the elevating base 720, and shows a transition state when the elevating base 720 is moved up and down with respect to the base member 710.

The projecting unit 700 refers to the base member 710, the elevating base 720 rotatably arranged on the base member 710, the rotating member 730 rotatably arranged on the elevating base 720, and the base member 710. It mainly includes a drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720.

First, a structure for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the base member 710 has an insertion hole 711 opened as a circular hole in the front view at substantially the center in the lateral width direction, a support shaft 712 projecting from the front, and projecting from the back surface. It is provided with two support shafts 713 and 714. The rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted into the insertion hole 711. Further, a shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719 is rotatably supported on the front support shaft 712, and transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported on the back support shafts 713 and 714, respectively. ..

The elevating base 720 includes a back base 721, a front base 722 located in front of the back base 721, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end side of the back base 721 and the front base (FIGS. 34 and FIG. See 35). The rear base 721 and the front base 722 are opposed to the elevating base 720 at a predetermined interval by the thickness of the intermediate base 723, and the rotating member 730 is located between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722. Is rotatably housed (arranged).

One side of the back base 721 in the width direction is connected to the base member 710 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is interposed between the base end rails arranged on the front surface of the base member 710, the tip rails arranged on the back surface of the elevating base 720 (rear base 721), and the base end rails and the tip rails. It is provided with an intermediate rail that allows the base end rail and the tip rail to be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, by expanding and contracting the slide rail SL, the elevating base 720 can be moved up and down with respect to the base member 710 along the vertical direction.

The back base 721 of the elevating base 720 has a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction and a shaft support hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 731a of the rotating member 730. An opening is formed. The sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a via the collar C. As will be described later, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771, and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slid along the sliding groove 721a to raise and lower the elevating base 720 (rear base 721). To.

The connecting arm 719 has a shaft support hole 719a rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, and an elevating base 720 (rear base 721) projecting from the front at an end opposite to the shaft support hole 719a. ) Is provided with a sliding pin 719b slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a and a driven groove 719c extending linearly along the direction connecting the shaft support holes 719a and the sliding pin 719b. .. The drive pin 771b of the drive arm 771 is slidably inserted into the driven groove 719c via the collar C. As will be described later, the drive arm 771 is rotationally driven so that the connecting arm 719 is rotated around the shaft support hole 719a.

The drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 is a drive arm 771 in which the rotation shaft 771a is rotatably supported in the insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and the rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. The drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 772a to 772d to which the tail transmission gear 772d is connected, and the transmission gear 772a at the head of the transmission gears 772a to 772d, and the drive is arranged in front of the base member 710. It is provided with a motor 773.

The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gears 772d are headed by the transmission gear 772d. A gear train (gear train) having 1 as a tail is formed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is arranged at the lowermost position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21 (a)), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the head. It is transmitted from the gear 772a to the tail transmission gear 772d, and the tail transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the transmission gear 772d at the tail is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33A) with the rotation shaft 771a as the center of rotation. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the upright direction (clockwise in FIG. 33 (a)) with the shaft support hole 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is raised to the uppermost position (overhang position) (FIG. 21 (c)). )reference).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is arranged at the uppermost position (extending position) (see FIG. 21 (c)), the rotational driving force is the leading transmission gear. It is transmitted from 772a to the tail transmission gear 772d, and the tail transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the transmission gear 772d at the tail is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33C) with the rotation shaft 771a as the center of rotation. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (c)) with the shaft support hole 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowermost position (retracted position) (FIG. 21 (a)). )reference).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 will be described.

FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 36 is a front view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevating base 720.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721 and a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end side of the rear base 721 and the front base 722, as described above. In addition, the rotating shaft 731a is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 721b of the back base 721, so that the rotating member 730 is rotatably accommodated (arranged) between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722.

The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b arranged on the back surface thereof. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees centered on the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the curved rack gear 731b. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation of the transmission gear 781a causes the rotating member 730 to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720.

The drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 is the transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the rear base 721 and the intermediate base 723 of the elevating base 720 and the transmission gear 781b. A drive motor 782 is provided in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected.

Here, in a state where the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the center of the curved rack gear 731b in the circumferential direction, the rotating member 730 sets the direction of slide displacement of the projecting member 735 (the direction of projecting or immersing when appearing and descending) as the vertical direction. It is arranged at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as "center rotation position") (see FIG. 36 (b)).

Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the central rotation position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 uses the rotating shaft 731a as the rotation center. It is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 36B). As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (right side in FIG. 36 (c)) (see FIG. 36 (c)).

From this state (see FIG. 36C), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 is rotated on the rotating shaft. It is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36C) with 731a as the center of rotation. As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of the slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other side (left side in FIG. 36 (a)) after passing through the central rotation position (see FIG. 36 (a)). ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42, a structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 39 is a front view of the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the protruding member 735 appears and disappears from the rotating member 730 and the swinging member 732 is swung.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a rear base 731, a swing member 732 that is swingably arranged in front of the back base 731, and the swing members 732 and the back base 731. An intervening member 733 interposed between the two, a front base 734 disposed in front of the back base 731, a projecting member 735 disposed slidably on the back of the front base 734, and a front base. A drive mechanism for displacement (slide displacement and swing) of the projecting member 735 and the swing member 732 with respect to the 734 and the back base 731 is provided.

The back base 731 is formed in the shape of a container having a substantially circular front view with the front open, and a part of the outer peripheral wall (the outer peripheral wall located above) is missing, and the bottom is formed from the part where the outer peripheral wall is missing. A part of the wall protrudes upward. On the back surface of the rear base 731, as described above, the rotating shaft 731a pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720 and the curvature meshed with the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35) are curved. A rack gear 731b is arranged.

Further, a pair of shaft support holes 731c that rotatably support the rotation shaft 732a of the swing member 732 and the tip of the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732 are slidably inserted into the back base 731. A pair of guide holes 731d and a slide hole 731e through which the slide pin 733b of the intermediate member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape about the axis of the shaft support hole 731c, and has one end side and the other end side. The vertical position is set to a different position. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the actuated shaft 732d of the swing member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the swing member 732 can be swung (rotated) so that the tip side thereof moves up and down.

The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly, and the axis of the rotation shaft 731a is positioned on an extension line in the extension direction, and the slide hole 731e and the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 described later Formed in parallel. A pair of shaft support holes 731c and guide holes 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to a virtual line along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e.

The rocking member 732 includes a rotating shaft 732a and an acted shaft 732b formed as a columnar shaft body, and the base end sides on which the rotating shaft 732a and the acted shaft 732b are arranged face each other. A pair is arranged. The rotating shaft 732a is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 731c of the back base 731, and the actuated shaft 732b is slidably inserted into the working hole 733a of the intermediate member 733 and the guide hole 731d of the back base 731. Will be done.

The collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 732a, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the rotating shaft 732a from coming off, and the body portion of the collar C is formed by the rotating shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. It is slidably interposed between them. Similarly, the collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the actuated shaft 732d, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the actuated shaft 732d from coming off, and the body portion of the collar C is the acted shaft 732d and the guide hole. It is slidably interposed between the 731d and the action hole 733a.

The interposition member 733 is a plate-shaped portion interposed between the back surface base 731 and the swing member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action hole 733a is a hole for transmitting the elevating and lowering (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the interposition member 733 to the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732, and the pair is oriented in a front view C shape. It is arranged line-symmetrically.

As will be described later, when the interposition member 733 is raised (sliding displacement upward), the inner peripheral surface of the working hole 733a pushes up the actuated shaft 732b upward, and the swinging member 732 lifts the tip end side thereof. When the interposition member 733 is lowered (sliding displacement downward) while being swung (rotated) to, the inner peripheral surface of the working hole 733a pushes down the actuated shaft 732b, and the swinging member 732 is moved downward. It swings (rotates) in the direction of swinging down the tip side.

The slide pin 733b is a columnar portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) are projected from the back surface of the interposition member 733. At the same time, they are arranged on the line of symmetry of the pair of action holes 733a described above with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the intermediate member 733 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e of the back base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

The sliding wall 733c is formed as a plate-like portion having a bottom surface extending along a horizontal direction (a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the intermediate member 733) so as to project from the front surface of the intermediate member 733. The cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b is slid on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c). The intermediate member 733 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) according to the change (increase / decrease) of. That is, when the cam diameter is increased with the rotation of the drive body 761, the interposition member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, while when the cam diameter is decreased, the interposition member is pushed up. The 733 is lowered by its own weight.

An urging spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed between the back base 731 and the interposing member 733 in a state of being elastically extended, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 791 is , It acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the intermediate member 733. That is, the lowering of the interposing member 733 (sliding displacement downward) is assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (the own weight of the interposing member 733). As a result, as will be described later, the swing member 732 can be swung (rotated) quickly in the tilting direction (direction in which the tip is lowered).

The front base 734 is a plate-like body having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front surface (end surface of the outer peripheral wall) of the back base 731. A slide hole 734a through which the slide pin 735a of the projecting member 735 is slidably inserted is formed in the front base 734. The slide hole 734a is formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, and is formed parallel to the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731.

The projecting member 735 is a long plate-like body that is slidably displaced on the back surface side of the front base 734, and includes a slide pin 735a and a sliding hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a columnar portion that is slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) are projected from the front of the projecting member 735. , Are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735 with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the projecting member 735 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

The sliding hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one end side (base end side) in the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735, and the sliding pin 761c of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is slidably inserted. To. Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated and the sliding pin 761c is slid along the sliding hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b is pushed upward or downward by the sliding pin 761c. As a result, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

An urging spring 792 made of a metal torsion spring is interposed between the front base 734 and the projecting member 735 in a state of being elastically twisted and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 is , It acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735.

The drive mechanism for displacement (slide displacement and swing) of the projecting member 735 and the swing member 732 is a drive body 761 rotatably arranged in front of the rear base 731 and a driven gear of the drive body 761. The drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 762a to 762e to which the tail transmission gear 762d is connected to the 761a, and the transmission gear 762a at the head of the transmission gears 762a to 762e, and is arranged on the back surface of the rear base 731. It is provided with a drive motor 763.

The cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is a portion formed as a disk cam in which a curved surface corresponding to the rotation position of the drive body 761 is formed on the outer peripheral surface, and as described above, the outer peripheral surface (cam surface) is formed. By sliding the intermediate member 733 on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the intermediate member 733 is driven (sliding and displaced). Further, the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the driving body 761 and acts on the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 as described above to project. Drive the member 735 (slide displacement).

The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the drive body 761. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gear 762a is the head of the transmission gear 762e. A gear train (gear train) having 1 as a tail is formed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 39A, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e, and the rotational driving force is transmitted to the trailing transmission gear 762e. The drive body 761 in which the driven gear 761a is meshed with the transmission gear 762e is rotated in one direction.

When the drive body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced, and the intermediate member 733 is lowered by its own weight. Along with this, the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732 supported by the action hole 733a of the intermediate member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swing member 732 moves downward on its tip side due to its own weight. It is oscillated (rotated) in the direction of displacement to (see FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c)).

Further, when the above-mentioned drive body 761 is rotated in one direction, the position of the sliding pin 761c in the vertical direction is raised. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed up by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is raised (sliding displacement upward) (see FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c)).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 39 (c), the drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the interposing member 733 is raised, so that the acting shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the working hole 733a of the interposing member 733 and shakes. The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in a direction that displaces its tip side upward.

Further, when the above-mentioned drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (sliding displacement downward).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42, details of the structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

40 (a) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged in the first rotation position, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged in the second rotation position. is there. In addition, in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the sliding wall 733c and the protruding member 735 of the intermediate member 733 are slid in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position or the second rotation position. Hole 735b is schematically illustrated by an alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 has a cam surface that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam surface (position P2) is in contact with the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously decrease from the position P1 to the position P2.

As described above, the sliding wall 733c has its bottom surface (the lower surfaces of FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)) in the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the interposition member 733, FIG. 40). It is formed in a straight line along (a) and 40 (b) in the left-right direction). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intermediate member 733) is moved from the top to the maximum when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. It is continuously lowered to the lower side, and when the drive body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously raised from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

The sliding hole 735b includes a curved portion 735b1 extending from one end side of the sliding hole 735b (right side in FIG. 40 (a)) to a predetermined range, and the other end of the sliding hole 735b from the end of the curved portion 735b1. It is formed from a straight portion 735b2 extending in a range up to the side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)).

The curved portion 735b1 is formed by being curved in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the drive body 761 in a state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. Further, in the first rotation position, the sliding pin 761c is located on one end side of the sliding hole 735b. Therefore, while the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (that is, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1), the drive body 761 slides from the drive body 761. The driving force is not transmitted to the moving hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735). That is, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b is not changed, so that the protruding member 735 is maintained in the state of being stopped at the lowermost position.

The rotation position where the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position (that is, the rotation position where the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the straight portion 735b2) is set to the "predetermined rotation position". ".

The straight portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735, the left-right direction in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735) is such that the driving body 761 is in the second rotation position due to the action of the sliding pin 761c while the sliding pin 761c passes through the straight portion 735b2. When it is rotated toward, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top, and when the drive body 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the top to the bottom.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position (see FIG. 40B), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 and is predetermined on the straight portion 735b2. It is located at the position (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1).

That is, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and then enters the straight portion 735b2, and the end (sliding) of the straight portion 735b2. After sliding toward the other end side of the moving hole 735b (left side in FIG. 40 (a)), the direction is changed at the end, and the straight portion 735b2 is slid toward the curved portion 735b1, but the curved portion 735b1. It is stopped immediately before entering (that is, on the straight portion 735b2). As a result, as will be described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

41 and 42 are schematic front views of the rotating member 730, showing a transition state when the protruding member 735 is slidably displaced and the rocking member 732 is swung. Note that in FIGS. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is schematically shown. Further, in FIG. 41 (a), the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position, and in FIG. 41 (b), the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged in the predetermined rotation position is shown in FIG. 42 (a). 42 (b) shows a state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at a rotation position between a predetermined rotation position and a second rotation position, and FIG. 42B shows a state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position. Will be done.

In the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) (that is, the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position), the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position and the projecting member 735 is located at the lowermost position. Will be done. When the drive body 761 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position from this state, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually reduced from the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter, as shown in FIG. 41 (b) (FIG. 40). (See (a)), the intermediate member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swing member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the stopped state is maintained at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as in FIG. 41A).

When the drive body 761 that has reached the predetermined rotation position (see FIG. 41 (b)) is further rotated toward the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is further increased as shown in FIG. 42 (a). By being reduced (see FIG. 40A), the interposition member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swing member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slid upward by pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 with the rotation of the drive body 761. To.

When the drive body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b is reduced to the radius R2, which is the minimum diameter, as shown in FIG. 42 (b). As a result (see FIG. 40B), the interposition member 733 is lowered to the lowermost position by its own weight, and the swing member 732 is further rotated by its own weight, and its tip is positioned at the lowermost position. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the uppermost position when the straight portion 735b2 is pushed up to the uppermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

Contrary to the case described above, when the drive body 761 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) (that is, the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position), FIG. 42 (a) ), The cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the radius R2 which is the minimum diameter (see FIG. 40B), so that the interposition member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. Along with this, the swing member 732 is rotated in the direction of raising its tip. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slid downward by pushing down the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. To.

When the drive body 761 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1 as shown in FIG. 41 (b). The upward lifting operation of the installation member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and along with this, the operation of rotating the swing member 732 in the direction of raising its tip is also continued. On the other hand, the projecting member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position when the straight line portion 735b2 is pushed down to the lowermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

When the drive body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the first rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b is increased to the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter as shown in FIG. 41 (a). As a result (see FIG. 40A), the interposition member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position accordingly. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the position is at the lowermost position (that is, FIG. 41 (b). ) Is maintained in the stopped state.

As described above, according to the rotating member 730, the member 2 (the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735) can be displaced by the drive motor 763 of 1.

Here, in the conventional product, when the two members are displaced by the one drive motor, the driving forces for driving the two members are overlapped, so that the load on the drive motor becomes large and the durability thereof decreases. There was a problem of inviting. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are displaced alternately (one by one), the load of the drive motor can be reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed, and the effect of the displacement is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the rotating member 730, the first transmission means (cam portion 761b and the intermediate member 733) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swing member 732 lowers the tip of the swing member 732. The load of the drive motor 763 in the section (the section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position) is increased by raising the tip of the swing member 732 (the drive body 761 is first rotated from the second rotation position). It can be made smaller than the load of the drive motor 763 in the section to be rotated to the rotation position).

On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the projecting member 735 is a section in which the projecting member 735 is slid and displaced downward (the drive body 761 is secondly rotated). The load of the drive motor 763 in the section where the drive motor 763 is rotated from the position to the first rotation position) is driven in the section where the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced upward (the section where the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). It can be smaller than the load of the motor 763.

That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means has a relatively high load, the second transmission means has a relatively low load, and the first transmission means has a relatively high load. Can make the second transmission means a relatively low load. Therefore, since the load of the drive motor 763 can be distributed, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and its durability can be improved.

Further, it is not necessary to displace the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 alternately (one by one), and a state in which the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 are both displaced can be formed, so that the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced. While trying to improve the effect, the effect of displacement of both members 732 and 735 can be improved.

Further, the first transmission means displaces the swing member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmission means displaces the protruding member 735 by interlocking the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. It is displaced, and swings per unit displacement of the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c (that is, per unit rotation of the drive body 761) according to the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b. The amount of displacement of the member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 763 is kept constant, the displacement speeds of the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be changed. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced while suppressing the load of the drive motor 763.

Further, it is a section for reducing the load of the drive motor 763 (in the first transmission means, a section for lowering the tip of the swing member 732 (a section for rotating the drive body 761 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). In the second transmission means, the section in which the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced downward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position) is gravitationally driven by the displacement of the swing member 732 or the protruding member 735. It is formed by having a displacement component downward in the direction, that is, by utilizing the displacement of the swing member 732 or the projecting member 735 due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b from becoming complicated. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced. Further, by suppressing the complication of the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b, the displacement speed of the swing member 732 or the protruding member 735 can be easily kept constant, and the drive motor 763 can be increased accordingly. The burden can be suppressed.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the cam portion 761b in the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c in the second transmission means are integrally formed, so that the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are arranged separately. Space for this can be eliminated, and the size of the rotating member 730 can be reduced accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are formed separately, the displacement deviation of the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both members 732 and 735 is improved. Can be enhanced.

Here, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position, that is, when the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state is started, the drive motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Since the load on the motor is increased, the initial speed may be slowed down and the effect of the effect may be hindered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the protruding member 735 (sliding hole 735b) is formed from the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c). ) Can be non-transmitted. Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the rotation of the drive body 761 can be increased by that amount, so that the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be used. The upward slide displacement can be started smoothly.

On the other hand, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 (that is, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position), the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state. However, the swing member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the tip is lowered downward (see FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b)). Therefore, when the swing member 732 is swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 required for the swing can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the momentum to the rotation of the drive body 761, so that the upward slide displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, in this way, the swinging member 732 can be swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, so that both the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 are stopped. This can be avoided and the effect of displacement can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b and the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the curved portion 735b1 is used to rotate the drive body 761. By giving momentum to the member, the protruding member 735 is smoothly displaced from the stopped state.

In this case, in the present embodiment, after the slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the rotational drive of the drive body 761 is stopped before the sliding pin 761c enters the curved portion 735b1. That is, in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 but at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2 (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1). Positioned (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 42 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), but the pin of the crank member. In the structure in which the portion reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the center of rotation of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after changing the direction passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the amount of upward slide displacement of the protruding member 735 per unit rotation of the drive body 761 suddenly increases. The load on the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the drive body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the curved portion 735b1, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

Next, the elevating unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. 43 (a) is a front view of the elevating unit 800, FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 43 (c) is a side view of the elevating unit 800. FIG. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the elevating unit 800 is arranged on the horizontally long rectangular base member 810 in front view arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper united unit 500 and on the base member 810 so as to be able to elevate. The elevating member 820, the drive motor 891 that applies a driving force to the elevating member 820, the transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force for the rotation of the drive motor 891, and one end of the base member 810 are pivotally supported. A link member 850 that is rotatably arranged around a shaft support by the rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 that is connected to the link member 850 and is displaceable by the displacement of the link member 850, and a slide member 860 thereof. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 870 that transmits the slide displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevating member 820.

The base member 810 has sliding holes 811, 812, 813 formed through the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43B) in the front-rear direction, and shaft support pins 814 to 817 protruding in a columnar shape on the back surface side. It is formed mainly with and.

Each of the sliding holes 811, 812, 813 is a hole through which each of the sliding pins 861, 862, 863 of the slide member 860, which will be described later, is inserted to regulate the slide direction of the slide member 860, and is the direction of gravity (FIG. It is formed in the shape of an elongated hole that opens long in the 43 (b) vertical direction). Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably arranged along the longitudinal direction of each of the sliding holes 811, 812, 813.

The sliding holes 811 and 812, 813 are formed side by side, and a sliding hole 811 is formed in the central portion, and a sliding hole 812 and a sliding hole 813 are formed on both sides of the sliding hole 811. .. In other words, a sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

The shaft support pins 814 to 816 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 to be described later and rotatably support the gears 842 to 844, and are formed on the shafts of the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole to be formed through.

The shaft support pin 817 is a protrusion that is inserted through a through hole 851 formed through one end of the link member 850, which will be described later, to rotatably support the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. It is formed in a columnar shape.

As described above, the drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a driving force to the elevating member 820. The drive motor 891 is arranged on the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed of a plate-like body on the back side of the base member 810. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892a formed through the back cover 892, and is internally fitted into the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 via the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

The transmission gear 840 is a gear train formed by connecting gears 844 to 844, and as described above, the gears 842 to 844 can rotate to shaft support pins 814 to 816 protruding toward the back surface of the base member 810. It is supported by. Therefore, when the gear 841 is rotated, the driving force thereof is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Therefore, the terminal gear 844 can be rotated by driving the drive motor 891.

The gear 844 is formed with a protrusion 844a projecting in a cylindrical shape on the back surface side. The protrusion 844a is a protrusion for transmitting the driving force to the link member 850, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude at a distance where the tip thereof overlaps the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43).

The link member 850 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body. The link member 850 has a through hole 851 that penetrates circularly at one end, a transmission side sliding groove 854 that penetrates in a long hole shape substantially in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850 at the other end, and the through hole 851 and transmission. It is mainly provided with a connecting side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854.

As described above, the through hole 851 is a through hole for rotatably supporting the link member 850 with respect to the base member 810 by inserting the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 inside. It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pin 817. Therefore, the link member 850 is connected to the base member 810 without falling off by inserting the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 into the through hole 851 and inserting the collar C3 from the back surface side and fastening the link member 850 with a screw or the like. Will be done.

At the edge of the through hole 851 of the link member 850, an annular portion 852 projecting in an annular shape is formed on the front side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 43B). The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member for forming a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850 and rotatably accommodating the transmission gear 840 in the gap, and each of the transmission gears 840 The protrusion dimension is set to be larger than the thickness width of the gears 843 to 844.

Further, a torsion spring SP1 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP1 is formed by laminating a wire made of a metal material on a columnar spiral, and can apply an urging force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge portion wound over the spiral of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the state of being wound around the spiral of the torsion spring SP1 is broken, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is applied to the axial direction of the spiral portion of the torsion spring SP1 (the axial direction of the annular portion 852). ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the torsion spring SP1 has a relatively large cylindrical spiral portion, the annular portion 852 can suppress the spiral state from collapsing and stabilize the urging direction.

That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for arranging the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the urging direction of the torsion spring SP1. Can be done.

One end of the torsion spring SP1 is engaged with a locking portion 855 protruding from the front side of the link member 850 in a hook shape, and the other end is engaged with a locking portion 818 protruding from the back side of the base member 810 in a hook shape. Engage. Therefore, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape due to the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and apply an urging force to the link member 850 in the direction around the axis of the rotation axis.

The connecting side sliding groove 853 is an elongated hole through which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface in the lateral direction is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the protrusion 844a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, the protrusion 844a can be displaced by sliding inside the connecting side sliding groove 853. As a result, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 as the protrusion 844a is displaced. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

The transmission side sliding groove 854 is a hole through which the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 is inserted to displace the slide member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and the width dimension in the lateral direction thereof. Is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding pin 861. Therefore, the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 through which the sliding hole 811 of the base member 810 is inserted can be inserted into the inside of the transmission side sliding groove 854.

Further, by fastening the collar C3 to the tip of the shaft support pin 816 from the back side of the link member 850 with a screw or the like, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be connected to each other via the base member 810. Therefore, the slide member 860 arranged on the front side of the base member 810 can be slid and displaced by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 arranged on the back side of the base member 810.

The slide member 860 is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and the length dimension in the gravity direction is set to be smaller than the length dimension in the gravity direction of the base member 810. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the slide member 860 from protruding outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810. As a result, the overall outer shape of the elevating unit 800 in front view can be reduced.

The slide member 860 has a plurality of sliding pins 861 to 863 formed to protrude from the back surface side in a columnar shape, a plurality of slide side sliding holes 864 to 866 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a circle protruding to the front side. It is mainly provided with two columnar protrusions 867.

As described above, the sliding pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850, and can be displaced with the displacement of the transmission side sliding groove 854. The sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are protrusions that regulate the displacement direction of the slide member 860, and are inserted into the sliding holes 812 and 813 of the base member 810, and the sliding pins 862 and the sliding pins 862 The collar C3 is fastened to the tip of the moving pin 863 from the back surface side of the base member 810 with screws or the like.

Therefore, the sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the sliding holes 812 and the sliding holes 813 formed through the base member 810 in a straight elongated hole shape, so that the slide member 860 is inserted. It is made non-rotatable with respect to the base member 810 and is slidably connected to the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 in the elongated hole direction. As a result, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851, so that the slide member 860 can be displaced in the direction of gravity (the long hole direction of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813).

The plurality of slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 are holes into which the protrusions 871a to 871c of the second slide member 871 described later are inserted, and are formed in a long hole shape long in the gravity direction and have a width dimension in the lateral direction. It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusions 871a to 871c.

The transmission member 870 is a member arranged on the front side of the slide member 860, and meshes with racks 872 extending in the direction of gravity and arranged in pairs on the target and rack gears on the racks 872. Each pinion gear 873 is mainly provided with a second slide member 871 arranged between the pinion gears 873.

The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. Further, the rack 872 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the central portion of the base member 810. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the opposite side surface of each rack 872, and is meshed with a pinion gear 873 described later.

The pinion gear 873 is rotatably pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 and is meshed with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid and displaced in the direction of gravity, the pinion gear 873 is also displaced in the direction of gravity. At this time, the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a, so that the pinion gear 873 is rotated along with the displacement of the slide member 860.

The second slide member 871 includes an upright portion 871e formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view and bent toward the front side at a lower end portion, and rack gears 871d engraved on both side surfaces in the left-right direction. It is mainly provided with a plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c that project in a columnar shape on the back surface side.

The erecting portion 871e is a wall portion to which the elevating member 820 described later is fastened to the elevating tip surface thereof, and a connecting hole 871e1 for inserting a screw inside the elevating member 820 and fastening the elevating member 820 to the tip portion thereof penetrates. It is formed. Therefore, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened.

Further, the upright portion 871e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810 and arranging the decorative member 830 described later in the gap, and is a gap forming portion in the front-rear direction of the decorative member 830. The vertical dimension is set to be larger than the thickness of. As a result, the decorative member 830 can be arranged between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810.

The rack gear 871d is a tooth contact surface that meshes with the pinion gear 873 described above, and is engraved on both the left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length dimension of the second slide member 871 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

As described above, the plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c are inserted into the slide side sliding holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and each slide from the back side of the slide member 860 to the tip end side of the protrusions 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side sliding holes 864 to 866 and fastened with screws or the like. As a result, the second slide member 871 is rotatable with respect to the slide member 860 and is held slidably along the longitudinal direction of each of the slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866.

Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, the pinion gear 873 is rotated as described above, and the second slide member 871 that meshes with the pinion gear 873 can be slid-displaced along with the rotation. Therefore, since the second slide member 871 slides and displaces with respect to the slide member 860 in the direction of gravity, the second slide member 871 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 at a displacement speed faster than the displacement speed of the slide member 860 and slides. The displacement distance can be made larger than that of the member 860. Therefore, the size of the elevating unit 800 as a unit can be reduced, and the displacement speed and the displacement distance of the elevating member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 can be suppressed from becoming small.

As described above, the elevating member 820 is a member that is displaced up and down with the displacement of the second slide member 871, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view. The elevating member 820 includes a protrusion 821 that projects toward the back surface side.

The protrusion 821 is a protrusion connected to the upright portion 871e of the second slide member 871, and is formed at a position facing the connecting hole 871e1 of the upright portion. Further, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed on the protruding tip surface, and a screw inserted into the connecting hole 871e1 can be fastened through the fastening hole 821a. As a result, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are arranged on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that regulates the displacement of the transmission member 870 to the front side, whereby the transmission member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side and colliding with the decorative member 830.

The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape imitating the title or logo of the game machine, and an LED that emits light is arranged on the back side. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of interest by emitting light from the title, logo, or the like on the player side.

Next, the movable mode of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52.

FIG. 46 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the third state. .. 49 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the third state. .. FIG. 52 (a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52 (b) shows the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member in the second state. FIG. 52 (c) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

The first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position and is arranged on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position. It is a state in which it is located at the lowermost position and is arranged below the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the second state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state. is there.

Further, in FIG. 51, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 that can be placed at the end farthest from the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and a reference numeral of the virtual line KS3 is given. ..

As shown in FIGS. 46, 49 and 52 (a), when the elevating unit 800 is located in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side where the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed). Is located above the one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed) in the direction of gravity. In this case, in the transmission member 870, the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the upper end of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the lower end of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is in a state of being positioned upward. Therefore, the elevating member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also in a state of being positioned upward.

Further, in the first state, the virtual line KS1 connecting the shaft of the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 and the protrusion 844a for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850 and the shaft of the through hole 851 of the link member 850. The position is orthogonal to the virtual line KS2 connecting the intermediate position of the connecting side sliding groove 853 in the lateral direction (see FIG. 49).

That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be held by the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the link member 850 from being displaced by the load of the elevating member 820. As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying electric power to the elevating unit 800 in the first state, so that energy consumption can be reduced.

When electric power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the state shown in FIGS. 46, 49 and 52 (a) and the driving force for rotation acts on the drive motor 891, as described above, the gears 843 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotate. The driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the terminal gear 844 is displaced as the rotation is driven. The protrusion 844a is inserted and connected to the inside of the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 with the displacement of the protrusion 844a.

When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860, which is connected by inserting the sliding pin 861 into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850, is slidably displaced. As a result, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Therefore, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872a formed on the rack 872 according to its displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 disposed between the two pinion gears 873 can be slidably displaced. As a result, the elevating member 820 can be displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 47, 50 and 52 (b), in the elevating unit 800 in the second state, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 by rotating the drive motor 891. It is said that it is in a state of being. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be displaced downward from the first state with respect to the base member 810.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52 (c). The elevating unit 800 in the third state is in a state in which the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the elevating member 820 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 below the second state.

In this case, the elevating member 820 is arranged at a position adjacent to the lower side of the decorative member 830. Therefore, the title and logo of the game machine formed on the decorative member 830 can be visually recognized by the player. Further, since the elevating member 820 is adjacent below the decorative member 830, the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, by displacing the elevating unit 800 from the first state to the third state of the initial position, it is possible to display a pattern (character) in which the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 of the elevating unit 800 are combined in front of the game area. it can.

Further, in the third state, the sliding pins 861 to 863 of the slide member 860 are located at the descending ends of the sliding holes 81 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, since the load of the elevating member 820 can be held by each of the three sliding pins 861 to 863, it is possible to suppress the load of the elevating member 820 from acting on the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 of the transmission gear 840. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gear 844 from being damaged.

Next, the united state of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61.

First, a state in which each movable unit is displaced and each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operating unit 200 in the combined state. FIG. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 200 on the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 53.

In the combined state shown in FIG. 53, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion, and the elevating member of the elevating unit 800. The 820 is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the base member 810. In this way, by bringing each member (elevation base 720, rotating member 435, 455, and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (protruding unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) close to each other, one pattern (elevation unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) is formed. It can be visually recognized by the player as the title, logo, character, etc. of the game machine 10.

In addition, each movable unit is formed in a shape in which each member imitates a pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape imitating the wings of an animal, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are formed in a bow shape, and the elevating unit 800. The elevating member 820 is formed in a shape imitating the title of the game machine.

Further, as described above, since the elevating unit 800 can form one pattern (character) by combining the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 435 in the combined state (overhanging state). The pattern (character) of 1 can be formed by combining 455, the elevating member 820, and the decorative member 830.

That is, the elevating unit 800 not only forms one display surface by combining the elevating base 820 and the decorative member 830, but also other movable units (protruding unit 700 and slide unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200. Can be combined with and used as one display surface. As a result, a plurality of display forms can be formed by making the displacement states of the movable units (elevating unit 800, projecting unit 700, and slide unit 400) arranged in the operating unit 200 different, which is interesting to the player. Can be given.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the operating unit 200 in the combined state, a part of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is attached to the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 54). It is placed in an overlapping position. That is, the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. The elevating member 820 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 54) of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 (see FIG. 54).

In other words, the operation unit 200 is formed to include a protrusion unit 700, a slide unit 400, and an elevating unit 800 that are displaceably formed at the retracted position and the united (extended) position, and the elevating member 820 is formed. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the protruding unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800 of the three movable units can be displaced to form one pattern, a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly. it can.

In this case, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the projecting position. It does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. That is, when the members are in contact with each other at the overhanging position, or when there is a possibility of contact with each other, it is necessary to set the elevating member 820 in consideration of damage due to the impact at the time of contact. And since it is not in contact with the rotating members 435 and 455, its displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later elevating member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the starting rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the overhanging position, and an effect is produced when forming a pattern (character). Can be enhanced.

Further, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, when the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced, if the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or malfunction, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 is attached to the protruding member 735. It is possible to suppress contact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Here, when a plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are movable and united in the space at the center of the game machine (in front of the third symbol display device 81), the side surfaces thereof. There are game machines that collide with each other and coalesce. However, when the side surfaces collide and coalesce, the collision tends to form scratches on the collision surface. Therefore, there is a problem that the design of the movable unit is easily impaired.

Further, in order to suppress the formation of scratches on the collision surface, it is conceivable to slow down the speed of the collision, but since it is necessary to reduce the displacement speed of the movable unit, the speed of the uniting operation of the accessory is increased. It has gone down. There is a problem that the interest of the player is impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the movable unit is provided. The sides do not collide with each other when they are displaced and combined in the central space of the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of scratches on the movable unit and prevent the design of the movable unit from being impaired.

Further, when the movable units are displaced to the central space of the game machine and combined, the side surfaces do not collide with each other, so that the speed of displacement can be made constant at the time of the displacement of the united. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the speed of the uniting operation of the characters, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the elevating unit 800 and the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 are two-stage racks (the elevating unit 800 is a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871. The slide unit 400 is configured via a first side pinion gear 432 between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13), and thus the conventional one-stage. The speed of displacement operation can be improved compared to the rack of the type (a form consisting of only a rack and a pinion). Therefore, by increasing the displacement speed, each operation unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) can be improved. As a result, the time during which the player can visually recognize the union operation can be shortened, so that the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Here, if each movable unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, the dimensions in the front-rear direction increase and the size increases. If the front-rear direction dimensions of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are made smaller (thinner) in order to suppress the front-rear direction dimension, it becomes difficult to secure the configuration.

On the other hand, since the elevating member 820 includes a second slide member 871 formed so as to project to the same side as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 in the front-rear direction, the whole (elevating member 820, rotation). The front-rear direction dimension of the member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455) is suppressed to reduce the size of the game machine 10 in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear direction dimension of the elevating member 820 is increased to increase its rigidity. Can be secured.

Further, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a position protruding toward the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged in the front-rear direction. It is arranged at an overlapping position. As a result, the space on the back surface side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 can be increased, and the width of the elevating unit 800 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, by arranging the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same positions in the front-rear direction as the second slide member 871 having a small width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 53 left-right direction), the elevating unit 800 and the slide unit 400 It is possible to reduce the width of the bulge in the front-rear direction while suppressing the interference with and (see FIG. 54). Since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be prevented from intersecting with the displacement locus, so that the second slide member 871 and the rotating member 871 can be separated from each other. Collision can be suppressed during displacement (see virtual line KS3 in FIG. 51).

Next, the displacement mode when each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. 55 to 58 are front views of the operating unit 200. In addition, in FIGS. 55 to 58, the displacement mode when each movable unit is displaced to the united state with FIG. 55 as the initial position is shown in order.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the present embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG. 55.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is slidably displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projecting unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slidably displaced toward the central portion of the game machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. Rotationally displaced, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidably displaced downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid upward and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

First, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the first operation is performed by the projecting unit 700 sliding displacement of the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced upward. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is as described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to be the same.

The second operation is performed in the middle of displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 can be made substantially the same as the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating member 720.

As described above, in the slide members 430 and 450, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced as they are slid and displaced. Therefore, the rotation angles of the rotating members 435 and 455 are set to the center position of the game board 13. (FIG. 57, center position in the left-right direction) is rotationally displaced at a symmetrical angle.

Here, the first member and the second member, which are formed so as to be linearly displaceable between the retracted position and the united (overhanging) position, are provided, and the first member and the second member are displaced to the united position, respectively. There is a gaming machine that makes the player visually recognize as one character by associating (integrating) the first member and the second member with each other or bringing them into contact with each other.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, if the structure is such that the first member and the second member are displaced to the united (overhanging) position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, they are displaced to the united position while being displaced from each other. May interfere. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the displacements of the respective members. Therefore, it takes a long time to form the character, and the displacement is extended. , The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 in a linear displacement, so that the elevating base 720 is arranged at the united position and the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400. Since the 455 is arranged at the united position by being rotationally displaced from the retracted position, the rotating members 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged on the elevating base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the united position. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the character is formed is shortened and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to.

Further, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus that does not intersect with the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 that is linearly displaced, and the end position of the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is the displacement of the elevating base 720. It is set at a position adjacent to the end position of the locus. That is, with respect to the displacement locus on the straight line of the elevating base 720, the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus having at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720, and the rotation locus is united (overhanging). ) The displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 is set to decrease as it is displaced to the position.

As a result, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be made into a displacement locus that wraps around from the outside with respect to the displacement locus of the elevating base 720. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set as a displacement locus that avoids the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 that linearly displaces the elevating unit 700. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating base 720 deviate from each other, the trajectories of the rotating members 435 and 455 do not intersect each other, so that the members can be prevented from interfering with each other. As a result, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the pattern (character) is formed can be shortened. The production effect can be enhanced.

Further, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 becomes a displacement locus that wraps around the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 from the outside, so that the outer shape in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 of the slide unit 700 that is linearly displaced. Is increased, it is possible to easily suppress interference with the rotating members 435 and 455. Therefore, the elevating base 720 can be increased in size.

As described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged on the base members 434 and 454 that can be slidably displaced. That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, and are displaced to the coalescing (overhanging) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a curved locus on the rotating members 435 and 455. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the rotating member 730 during the displacement to the united position.

That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 can rotate in relation to the projecting unit 700 while moving to the united (overhanging) position due to the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the rotation is moved to the united position. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with the projecting unit 700 instead of moving, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

Here, when only the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced, the position of the rotating shaft is fixed. Therefore, when the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set at the end of the rotating members 435 and 455. In addition, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated, the end portion on the opposite side of the rotating shaft is only rotationally displaced, so that it is difficult to set a large displacement distance of the elevating base 720. Further, when the rotation axis of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set at the center of the rotating members 435 and 455, the tip of the rotating member collides with the rear case 300 when the rotating member is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position. , It is difficult to dispose the rotating member in the retracted position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating shafts of the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed at the center positions of the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating shafts are formed on the base members 434 and 454 that can be slidably displaced. Since they are connected, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be operated by combining linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, by applying a linear displacement when rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, it is possible to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged at the retracted position from colliding with the rear case 300 when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced. The displacement distance can be set large.

Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the retracted position is referred to as the posture in the combined position. Can be specified independently. That is, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are only rotated and displaced between the retracted position and the united position, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is defined by the rotation angle from the overhanging position. Since the rotating members 435 and 455 are combined with the rotational displacement and the linear displacement, the posture at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the combined position by the amount of the linear displacement. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position can be increased.

In other words, the longitudinal direction of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position (position where the base members 434 and 454 are arranged outside) is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retracted space at the retracted position. On the other hand, at the united position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), by rotating, the direction is substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the retracted position can be increased, and in the combined position, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be projected from the central portion of the game board 13.

Further, here, since the third symbol display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape is arranged in the central portion of the game machine 10 (operation unit 200), as the size of the third symbol display device 81 increases. , The space on both the left and right sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in a configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (overhanging) position to form a character together with the protruding unit 700, a large character cannot be formed. The production effect cannot be fully exhibited. That is, the game area is formed vertically, while the third symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally, so that one side and the other side of the third symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed. , It is difficult to secure the arrangement space for the members. Therefore, in order for the rotating members 435 and 455 to not protrude into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (overhanging) position, while they are arranged in a vertically long posture at the retracted position. By effectively utilizing the arrangement space of the members on one side or the other side of the third symbol display device 81, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be enlarged by that amount, and as a result, they are formed together with the projecting unit 700 at the united position. The pattern (character) can be made larger.

That is, the evacuation space for the rotating members 435 and 455 to retract is reduced to secure the space for the central portion (third symbol display device 81) of the game machine 10, and at the combined position, the evacuation space is moved to the central portion of the game machine 10. The amount of overhang can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting unit 700 can be enlarged.

Further, as described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably connected to the base members 434 and 454 so that the rotational displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454 are synchronized. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotating member with respect to the protruding unit 700 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the projecting unit 700 during the displacement to the overhanging position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size together with the projecting unit 700 at the united (overhanging) position. The character to be formed can be made larger. For example, even in a relatively narrow area where it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member 435 is in such an area. The rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size while setting the retracted positions of, 455.

Further, the projecting unit 700 includes a swing member 732 on the rotating member 730. In the second operation, the swing member 732 is in a state of being displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, so that the swing member 732 can be brought into close contact with the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by abutting on the swinging member 732. In this case, since the tip of the swing member 732 is displaced upward, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the swing member 732. A detailed description of the contact of the swing member 732 with the rotating members 435 and 455 will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and elevating unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 can displace the swinging member 732 according to its displacement.

Therefore, by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the tip of the projecting member 735 is displaced to the back surface side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are connected to each other, the player can visually recognize the state in which each movable unit is integrated (combined state), and can give a hobby by the displacement of the accessory.

Further, since the swing member 732 can be displaced downward with the displacement of the projecting member 735, between the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400 and the swing member 732. The gap (space) can be made larger than that in the second operation.

As a result, it is possible to secure a displaceable space when the rotating members 435 and 455 (sliding members 430 and 450) are in the combined state. As a result, in the operating unit 200 in the combined state, the rotating members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450) can be further rotated, and the variation of the displacement mode in the combined state of the operating unit 200 can be increased. ..

That is, when the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced to the overhanging position, the swing member 732 is kept away from the rotating member 730 to exert a role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455, and then. Displaces the swing member 732 in a direction close to the rotating member 730, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space of the rotating members 435 and 455. The displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 produces an effect. Can be enhanced.

Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combining each operation unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is shown. For example, when each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of each operation unit is combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, by forming the rotating members 435 and 455 into a shape imitating a bow, the rotating members 435 and 455 are operated by utilizing the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 described above, and the bow is formed. It is possible to form a state in which the bow is pulled by an arrow or a state in which the arrow is released from the bow and the bending is released. The rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both ends of the bow portion, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is a part of the rear end side (opposite side of the arrowhead) of the arrow, and the elevating member 820. Is the central portion of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is a part of the tip side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is displaced in the excess direction will be described. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. Note that FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) show transition states when the stop position of the left slide member 430 shifts in the excess direction and the left rotation member 435 and the swing member 732 collide with each other.

Further, in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), only the case where the left rotating member 435 collides with the swing member 732 will be described, and when the right rotating member 455 collides with the swing member 732, the left rotating member The 435 is considered to be the same as the case where the operating unit 200 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center position in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 6), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state are originally due to poor control, rattling of each member, or an error in the mounting position of the sensor, as shown in FIG. 59 (a). It was not stopped at the stopped position in the combined state, and there was a possibility that the side surfaces of the rotating members 435 and 455 collided with the swinging member 732 of the protruding unit 700. Therefore, there is a risk that the swing member 732 and each of the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with each other and the parts are damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotating member 730 on which the swinging member 732 is arranged is rotatably arranged with respect to the elevating base 720, and is therefore shown in FIG. 59 (b). As described above, by rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720, the impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

That is, by rotating the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 with respect to the elevating base 720, not only the variation of the displacement mode of the projecting unit 700 can be increased, but also the left rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide with each other. It can be suppressed from being damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the side surface of the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the elevating base 720, The rocking member 732 arranged in pairs with the rocking member 732 that collides with the rotating member 435 rotates and comes into contact with the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450.

Therefore, after rotating the rotating member 730 to alleviate the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, a driving force for the rotating member 435 to further rotate is applied to the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to regulate that the rotating member 730 is further rotated.

That is, two sets of the swing member 732 and the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) are formed on the left and right, and when the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swing member 732 in one set, the corresponding With the contact, the swing member 732 is formed so as to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. Therefore, for example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is formed. When the swing member 732 is displaced beyond the reference position and abuts on the swing member 732, the swing member 732 is directed toward the rotary member 455 (rotary member 435) in the other set in accordance with the contact. It can be displaced. Therefore, in the other set, the swinging member 732 is brought into contact with the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), so that the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 in the other set. The impact can be received not only by the rocking member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. As a result, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

Further, in this case, the rocking member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 07 (b)) than the rotation axis, so that the rotating member 455 (rotation) When abutting on the member 435), a driving force can be applied in a direction opposite to the rotational moment acting on the axis of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), so that the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) can be applied. ) Can be used to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730. Therefore, it is not necessary to supply electric power to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730, so that the driving energy can be suppressed.

Next, a case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in the excess direction will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. Note that FIGS. 60A and 60B show transition states when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced and the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

Here, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 deviate in the excess direction, the swing member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with each other, and the swing member 732 or the rotating members 435 and 455. Was in danger of being damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swing member 732 is displaced downward by performing the above-mentioned third operation at the end timing of the second operation (the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when each of the rotating members 435 and 455 collides with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward to alleviate the impact of the collision. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 or each of the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Further, in this case, the impact when the rocking member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be used as a driving force for projecting the projecting member 735. Therefore, the drive motor 763 for driving the projecting member 735. The load can be reduced. That is, the impact when the swing member 732 and each of the rotating members 435 and 455 collide is transmitted to the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 via the sliding wall 733c, whereby the drive body 761 (see FIG. 40). Can act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 that drives the projecting member 735 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the third operation may be allowed to wait a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 shift in the excess direction and the swing member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455, the drive that displaces the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735. The rotational resistance of the motor 763 makes it easy to stop the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 while displacementing the rocking member 732.

Further, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotation direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy when driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the displacement of each rotating member 435 and 455 in the third operation will be described. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are front views of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700. Note that FIG. 61 (b) shows a state in which each of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation is displaced.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the gap between each of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation and the rotating member 730 of the slide unit 400 is the gap of the rotating member 730 when the displacement of the third operation is performed. The swing member 732 is increased by being displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61A) with the displacement of the protruding member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation can be further displaced as compared with the second operation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61B, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be rotated by further sliding-displace the base members 434 and 454 of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 toward the central portion of the game machine 10. It can be displaced toward the center of the game machine 10. As a result, it is possible to further give a sense of unity to the united (overhanging) state of the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 visually recognized by the player.

Next, the second united state of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

First, the displacement of the operating unit 200 to the second united state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 to 64 are front views of the operating unit 200. Note that FIGS. 62 to 64 show transition states in which each movable unit of the operating unit 200 projects to the position of the second united state. Further, FIG. 62 shows the operation unit 200 in the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operation unit 200 in the second united position, and FIG. 63 shows the operation unit 200 in the intermediate position between the retracted position and the second united position. However, each is illustrated.

Further, each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) of the operating unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61. ) And the elevating member 820) at the united (overhanging) position will be referred to as the first united state below. Further, in the first united state, each movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as the first effect mode. It can be recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the operation unit 200 is arranged in the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 17A), and the upper united unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22 (a)). The lower united unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 27A) at the position shown in). In the formation of the second united state by the operating unit 200, first, the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 is slidably displaced to the central portion of the game board 13, and the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 63 is formed by being displaced downward and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 being displaced upward. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 18A), the upper union unit 500 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 22A), and the lower union unit 600 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 22A). By being displaced to the positions shown in FIG. 27 (c), the second united state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

In the second united state, each movable unit of the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, and lower united unit 600) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as the second effect mode. It can be recognized by the player. The pattern (character) formed in the second production mode is, for example, a pattern (character) that imitates Pegasus (a fantasy creature with wings on the body of a horse). In this case, the part forming the body portion of the Pegasus is the lower united unit 600, the part forming the head of the Pegasus is the upper uniting unit 500, and the part forming the wings of the Pegasus is the slide unit 400.

In the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 in the second united state, the base member 434 displaced so as to be slidable is displaced to the overhang position (the position shown in FIG. 18A) at the end of the slide. That is, the base member 434 in the first united state and the base member 434 in the second united state are arranged at different distances that are slidably displaced from the retracted position. Further, since the rotating member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged can be different between the first united state and the second united state.

Further, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is linked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 is moved from the retracted position in the first united state and the second united state. The rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged differently due to the difference in the slide displacement distance. In the present embodiment, the rotation angles (postures) of the rotating member 435 are arranged in different postures by about 180 degrees about the rotation axis in the first united state and the second united state.

As described above, the operating unit 200 is a tension of each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) of each operating unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700 and elevating unit 800). By the displacement to the protruding position, each member can be united to form one pattern (character).

That is, as the first effect mode, the operation unit 200 simply combines each member into the central space of the operation unit 200 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81) to form one pattern (character). Instead, as a second effect mode, each member can be combined in the central space of the operation unit 200 to form a pattern different from the first effect mode.

Therefore, since different patterns can be formed between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player can visually recognize each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode depending on the effect, time, and the like. Can be made to. Therefore, since the variation of the production can be increased, it is possible to show the player various productions and give them a hobby.

Here, the first movable unit group composed of a plurality of movable units formed displaceably between the retracted position and the united (extended) position is formed displaceably between the retracted position and the extended position. A game machine including a second movable unit group including a plurality of movable units is known.

According to this game machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged at the overhanging positions, each movable unit of the first movable unit group is associated (integrated) with one pattern (integrated). While making the player recognize the character) as the first effect mode, when each movable unit of the second movable unit group is arranged at the overhang position, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is associated with each other. (Integrated), another pattern (character) is made to be recognized by the player as a second effect mode. That is, in the first effect mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is arranged at the overhanging position. A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the movable unit group of the above, and in the second gaming state, each of the first movable units is retracted to the retracted position, while the second movable unit is retracted. By arranging each movable unit of the group at the overhanging position, the effect of forming a second character in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group is performed.

In this case, it is effective that a larger pattern (character) can be formed in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each movable unit of the first movable unit group and each movable unit of the second movable unit group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (directing modes) are formed, the total number of movable units required to form the plurality of characters increases accordingly, and each movable unit is evacuated. Since the area (space) for keeping the movable unit is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (directing mode).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper united) of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700 and elevating unit 800) Since one of the movable units of the unit 500 and the lower united unit 600) is also used as a movable unit, the movable units required to form a plurality of (first and second) production modes are correspondingly used. The total number can be reduced, and each movable unit can be enlarged. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is a part of the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the second effect mode. Since it is also used as a part of the above, the number of movable units for forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, since a space is created in the evacuation space at the inner edge of the rear case 300 (a space other than the central space in the evacuation state shown in FIG. 62 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81)), each movable unit (slide). The unit 400, the upper united unit 500, the lower united unit 600, the protruding unit 700, and the evacuation unit 800) can be enlarged.

Further, since each member of each movable unit (rotating member 435, 455, upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) can be enlarged, the first The pattern (character) formed by the effect mode and the second effect mode can be enlarged.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is a part of the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the second effect mode. ), And if they are arranged at the same position in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, they are movable in common in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the member of the unit (rotating member 435) is used, which hinders the interest.

Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the members (rotating member 435) arranged at the same position, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 is a united (extended) position arranged when forming the first effect mode and a united (extended) position arranged when forming the second effect mode. Since the position is different from the position (out position), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the interest is hindered. Can be suppressed.

In other words, since the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the pattern (character) formed by the first effect mode and the second effect mode. In addition, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being hindered.

Further, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the rotating member 435 can be arranged at different positions (extending positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode can be increased. It is possible to easily form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from.

Here, when the rotating member 435 is arranged in the same posture in the first united state and the second united state, the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to see this, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the rotating members 435 having the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount, and the first effect mode and the first effect mode are used. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the rotating member 435 when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode are different from each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress that the interest is hindered. Further, it is possible to easily form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 435 is arranged in a different position and in a different posture (rotation angle) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that both the first effect mode and the second effect mode are used, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest.

That is, the rotating member 435 that is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode is in a state in which either the position or the posture arranged in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is different. There is a possibility that the player may recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, but the rotating member 435 is the first effect. Since both the arranged position and the posture are different between the mode and the second effect mode, the player is informed that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first united state and the second united state. It can be difficult to see.

Further, the rotating member 435 is rotatably arranged on the base member 434 which is linearly displaced, so that the rotating member 435 is displaced in a manner in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the overhang position and the posture (rotation angle) when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

Further, since the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative position accuracy (posture) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be improved. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be associated (integrated) and the entire body can be recognized by the player as a predetermined pattern (character).

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating member 435, the rotating member 345 can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be made larger. Can be transformed into. For example, even if there is an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member is in such an area. The rotating member 435 can be formed in a large size while setting the position of the retracted state of the 435.

In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in the region so that the rotating members 435 of the base member 434 are overlapped with each other in the front view at the retracted position. Therefore, the other regions (conversion mechanism) of the base member 434 are increased accordingly. The size can be reduced in the front-back direction of the area where is not placed. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, the displacement mode of the operation unit 200 forming the second united state will be described in detail. 65 (a) to 66 (b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600. 67 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIa of FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 65 (b). It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIb. 68 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa of FIG. 66 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 66 (b). It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb.

It should be noted that FIGS. 65 (a) to 66 (b) show the displacement mode from the retracted state to the second united state in order. 65 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65 (b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, and FIG. 66 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state. The slide unit 400 in the retracted state is shown in the figure.

Further, the displacement from FIG. 65 (a) to the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) is performed by sliding displacement of the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second united state, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

FIG. 66 (a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 at the intermediate position of the displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) to the second united state shown in FIG. 66 (b). It is a front view. Further, in the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66A, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are displaced while the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is continued from the first state. It is done by. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacement of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second effect mode. Further, the transition from the second state to the second united state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

Further, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper uniting unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower uniting unit 600, and the rotating member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated by chain lines for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), in the retracted state (state in which the upper united unit 500 is arranged in the retracted position), the upper displacement member 530 is housed inside the base member 510. The lower uniting unit 600 is arranged at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is arranged on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged between the rotating member 435 of the left slide member 430 and the base member 434.

The base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed of a front side base member 434b arranged on the front side and a back side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) arranged on the back side as described above. A step portion 434b2 recessed on the back surface side is formed on the lower side (lower side of FIG. 67B) of the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b.

The step portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600, and the lower side of the base member 434 below the step portion 434b2 is the entire back surface. By denting to the side, the gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased.

That is, since the lower side of the base member 434 below the step portion 434b2 is formed by being recessed on the back surface side, the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the gap below the lower uniting unit 600 can be increased. The displacement member 640 can be arranged.

Further, since the thickness of the base member 434 on the lower side in the front-rear direction is reduced, the gap between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Therefore, when the base member 434 is slidably displaced in the first state (the state shown in FIG. 65B) described later, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 from coming into contact with each other.

On the other hand, on the upper side of the base member 434 above the step portion 434b2, transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13), which are transmission means for transmitting the drive to the rotating member 435, can be arranged by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction. It is said that.

As described above, the base member 434 is in a state in which the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 65) is connected to the base member 410 so as to be slidable and hangs down, and the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 65) is the rear case 300. Since it is slidably inserted between the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6), a force is applied when the base member 434 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction (FIG. 65 (a) left-right direction) toward the upper side. Where it is easy, since the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434 can be increased, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the base member 434.

Further, at the retracted position (position in FIG. 65A), the back surface side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower uniting unit 600 is brought into contact with the plane between the step portion 434b2 and the shaft support hole 434b1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower united unit 600 in the retracted state from falling in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the lower uniting unit 600, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed long in the vertical direction, the connecting arm 650 and the base member 434 connected above the lower displacement member 640 are where the upper end portion is likely to fall in the front-rear direction. The upper end of the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from falling in the front-rear direction, and the position of the lower unit 600 in the retracted position in the front-rear direction can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base member 434 from coming into contact with the lower displacement member 640 when the base member 434 is slidably displaced to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotating member 435 is rotationally displaced with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, the rotating member 435 is rotated by the displacement of the base member 434 by a predetermined amount, so that the rotating member 435 and the lower uniting unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction, and the base member 434 and the lower unit 434 can be positioned below. The position may be such that the united unit 600 does not overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, it does not overlap the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction inside the region K2 (see FIG. 65B) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower uniting unit 600 in the front view. The lower displacement member 640 of the portion is arranged.

As described above, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 is formed long in the vertical direction, the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged inside the region K2 where the upper end portion is likely to tilt in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

In the first state, the base member 434 is an upper displacement member on the side (upper contact portion 533 side) separated from the connecting shaft 531 for transmitting the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 (rotational driving force). It is arranged at a position where it overlaps with 530 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 is displaced to the second state, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a connecting the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

That is, when the slide unit 400 and the upper uniting unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), the upper displacement member 530 collides with the rotating shaft 435b of the rotating member 435. By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement from the start time for the left slide member 430 to start the displacement, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 from colliding with the rotation shaft 435a.

Further, the downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the overhang position is started when the base member 434 is located on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 630. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 630 from colliding with the side surface of the base member 434 when it is displaced.

That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only on one end side, the other end side (upper contact portion 533 side) is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacement member 530 is rotated downward and displaced as it slides and displaces in the left-right direction (center portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 66B) of the operating unit 200. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced while the base member 434 is slide-displaced to the center side of the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to the back side of the front surface of the base member 434. Then, when it collides with the side surface of the base member 434, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is located on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, so that the base member 530 is displaced when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced. It is possible to suppress collision with the side surface of the member 434.

As shown in FIGS. 66A and 68A, in the second state between the first state and the second united state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further laterally oriented than in the first state. The slide is displaced to the right side (right side in FIG. 66A). Therefore, the rotating member 435, which is rotationally displaced (in conjunction with) according to the sliding displacement of the base member 434, is also rotationally displaced. As a result, one end of the rotating member 435 located on the lower uniting unit 600 side (left side in FIG. 65 (b)) of the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated to be positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (FIG. 66 (a) left-right direction) is increased by sliding displacement of the base member 434, and the width of the region K2 is increased by rotating the rotating member 435 (FIG. 66 (Fig. 66)). a) The width in the vertical direction) can be increased.

As a result, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to prevent the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when tilted in the front-rear direction.

Further, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the displacement is performed from the first state to the second state, the base member 434 can be arranged on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, as described above, the other end of the upper displacement member 530 ( It is possible to prevent the upper contact portion (533 side) from being displaced in the front-rear direction and colliding with the side surface of the base member 434.

In other words, the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the base member 434 in front view while being displaced from the first state to the second united state, so that the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to a position where the second united state is formed. It is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434 before the displacement.

Further, since the overhanging position of the upper displacement member 530 is installed between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 facing each other, the rotating member 435 is positioned closer to the front side so that the player can easily see the upper displacement member 530. The displacement member 530 and the rotating member 435 can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily see the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

As shown in FIGS. 66 (b) and 68 (b), in the second united state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower united unit 600 are in contact with each other. At the same time, a part of the rotating member 435 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 68B) of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower uniting unit 600.

As a result, the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged at close positions so that the player can visually recognize them as one pattern (character).

Here, the rotating member 435 has different overhang positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is necessary to form a plurality of stopped states. The structure becomes complicated, and the stopped state (arrangement position and posture) tends to vary accordingly. Therefore, when the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 when forming the second effect mode, the rotating member 435 If the arrangement position or posture does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, while if the arrangement position or orientation of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper uniting unit 500 is formed. The unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are pushed out to cause a displacement. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the united state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 has each movable unit (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, lower united unit 600, protruding unit 700) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. , Elevating unit 800) movable members (upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, and each movable unit is viewed from the front. Since it overlaps with a part of the movable member of the above, even if the stopped state (extension or posture) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode varies, the relationship between each movable unit and each movable member. It can be easier to maintain sex. That is, by partially overlapping in the front view, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the movable members of each movable unit and the position in the front-rear direction. By making the difference, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 becomes excessive, it is possible to prevent each movable member of each movable unit from being pushed out and causing a misalignment. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship of each movable unit with each movable member in the combined state.

Further, in the second effect mode, the upper contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other and arranged, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper contact portion 533. The upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second united state.

That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be positioned at the same position in the front-rear direction, so that the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (overhanging) state can be placed at the same position. Since the pattern (character) formed in the second production mode can be easily visually recognized by the player because it can be integrated and easily visually recognized by the player.

In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to vary in the stopped state (arrangement position and posture), and the upper displacement member is placed at the stopped position when the rotating member 435 forms the second effect mode. In the structure that abuts on the 530 and the lower displacement member 640, if the arrangement position and the posture of the rotating member 435 do not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 and they are associated (integrated). ) Is inhibited.

Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause a misalignment, so that the association (integration) is hindered. That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other. Therefore, if the rotating member 435 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member When the arrangement position or posture of the 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out. In this case, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the state of being in contact with each other are displaced from each other, not only the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced with respect to the rotating member 435, but also the position is displaced. Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other at the united (overhanging) position, the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640. Especially effective.

Further, in this case, a part of the rotating member 435 is arranged on the front side of at least a part of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. The rotating member 435 makes it difficult for the player to see the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be easily recognized by the player as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second production mode and impairing the interest.

Next, the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 2430 and the right slide member in the second embodiment have been described. The 2450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 rotatably arranged with respect to the main body base member 2480. It is composed.

The main body base member 2480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular body in front view, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board on the lower edge portion. Further, the main body base member 2480 is formed with protruding portions 2481 on the lower surface side of both end portions in the longitudinal direction.

The protruding plate portion 411 is engraved with a base-side rack gear 412 for imparting rotation to the first-side pinion gear 432 arranged on the first member 431 with the slide displacement of the first member 431 on the upper surface side.

As described above, the projecting portions 2481 are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. The protrusion 2481 is recessed with a circular bearing hole 2481a into which the shaft portion 2486 of the rotation transmission member 2485 described later is inserted. Further, a through hole 2481b is formed through the protruding portion 2481 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game machine) of the main body base member 2480 in the left-right direction.

The bearing holes 2481a are recessed on both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 toward the outside, and the axial centers formed at both ends are concentrically formed.

The rotation transmission member 2485 is formed in a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed in a prismatic shape set to a dimension slightly smaller than the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. At both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485, a rotation portion 2487 having a substantially circular shape and a predetermined thickness is formed, and the shaft portion 2486 of the axial body is formed outward in the longitudinal direction from the axis of the rotation portion 2487. Is formed to protrude.

Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmission member 2485, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Will be set up.

The shaft portions 2486 formed at both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485 are formed concentrically with each other. Further, as described above, since the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481a formed in the protruding portion 2488, the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed to be smaller than the bearing hole 2481a.

As a result, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 2486 when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protruding portion 2488 and arranged in the main body base member 2480.

A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of the rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmission member 2485 is arranged on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a is meshed with the pinion gear 2488 arranged on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in the front view) of the main body base member 2480.

The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotary drive motor 2489 to the rotary transmission member 2485, and the axis is fastened to the rotary drive motor 2489. The rotation shaft of the rotary drive motor 2489 is inserted into the through hole 2481b of the protruding portion 2781, and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the opposite surface of the protruding portion 2488.

Therefore, by applying the rotational driving force to the rotary drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and the driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed in the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmitting member 2485. As a result, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate about the shaft portion 2486.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with the transmission gear 2437a arranged on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a transmits the driving force to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f. As a result, the rotating member 435 can be driven to rotate as the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces.

The clockwise rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with the transmission gear 2457a arranged on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the rotation of the transmission gear 2457a transmits the drive to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f. As a result, a rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455 as the right slide member 2450 slides.

Next, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Since the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a will be omitted.

71 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a is formed to include a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437a2 in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the back surface side.

The tooth portion 2437a1 is a portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and has substantially the same thickness dimension as the tooth portion (dimension in the front-rear direction) of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion that bulges into a shape that gradually decreases toward the central portion of the tooth thickness as the tooth thickness increases toward the back surface side. The distance dimension in which the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges from the tooth portion 2437a1 to the back surface side is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1 or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rigidity of the bulging portion 2437a2 from being lowered, and it is possible to prevent the bulging portion 2437a2 from being damaged.

Next, the operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the following, the left slide member 2430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

FIG. 72 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 72 (b) shows the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a. It is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 viewed from the front in the state where the teeth are released. 73 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 on the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa of FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 73 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 on the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 72 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

In FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmission member 2485 is shown by a broken line for ease of understanding. Further, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are shown in a see-through state.

As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 73 (a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is located downward (lower side of FIGS. 72 and 73), it transmits to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. A state in which the gear 2437a is in mesh with the gear 2437a is formed.

Therefore, when the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when a rotation driving force is applied to the rotation drive motor 2489 to rotate the rotation transmission member 2485 upward on the back side, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. Tooth.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 73 (b), when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates about the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmission member 2485 changes to the rotation transmission member 2485. Displaces upward as the rotation of. As a result, the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate because the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. As a result, since the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 435 from the transmission gears 437b to 437f, even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, it can be formed so as not to rotate.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 is rotated according to the sliding displacement of the left slide member 2430, and the slide of the left slide member 2430. The second drive state in which the displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the left slide member 2430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is stopped to rotate. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by the inertial force.

As a result, the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotary member 435 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Here, it is also conceivable to arrange a drive motor that applies a driving force for rotating the rotating member 435 to the left slide member 2430. However, when the drive motor is arranged on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 increases, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding displacement) the left slide member 2430 increases. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the rotation drive motor 2489 arranged on the base member 2410 forms a second drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotation member 435. it can. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for rotationally driving the rotary member 435 on the left slide member 2430, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be suppressed accordingly. it can.

Further, the rotation transmission member 2485 provided with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 for transmitting the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 to transmit the left rotation. When the mesh between the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released, when the second drive state in which the mesh is released is switched to the first drive state in which the gears are engaged, the gears cannot be engaged and the side surfaces are engaged with each other. There was a problem that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a could not be meshed due to collision.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed on the transmission gear 2437a, the area of the side surface of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, when switching from the second drive state in which the teeth are released to the first drive state in which the teeth are engaged, it is easy to insert the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the teeth portion of the transmission gear 2437a. it can.

Further, since the tooth thickness of the bulging portion 2437a2 is gradually reduced toward the back surface side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along the inclined surface that is gradually reduced. can do.

That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 on the transmission gear 2437a, it is possible to smoothly perform the meshing when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is released.

It is preferable that the shaft portion 2486 in the second embodiment has its axis formed on a flat surface on the front surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first drive state to the second drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are suppressed from being displaced toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. it can. Therefore, the rotation transmission member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first drive state to the second drive state.

Next, the slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the third embodiment have been described. The 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and an accommodating member 3490 arranged in front of the main body base member 3480.

The main body base member 3480 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is erected on the edge portion.

On the lower side of the protruding plate portion 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board) on the lower surface side, and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Will be set up. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is formed through the protruding plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side in the vertical direction.

The accommodating member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are arranged, and is formed in a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front. At the same time, a protruding wall 3491 protruding from the edge to the front side of the game machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433, and the rack member 451 are arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

Further, the housing member 3490 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. As a result, the accommodating member 3490 can be arranged inside the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

A base-side rack gear 412 is engraved on the inner surface of the protruding wall 3491 on the lower side of the accommodating member 3490. On the other hand, a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the protruding wall 3491 on the upper side of the accommodating member 3490.

The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the accommodating member 3490 in order to fasten the shaft portion of the telescopic cylinder 3495 described later and the accommodating member 3490, and the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495. The diameter is formed smaller than the diameter of.

The cylinder 3495 is a member that slides and displaces the accommodating member 3490 up and down by its drive, and by applying electric power, a shaft portion protruding from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the inside of the cylinder 3495, and the shaft portion thereof is inserted. It is a member (solenoid) that displaces the protruding distance of the cylinder.

The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the accommodating member 3490 with its shaft portion inserted inside the insertion hole 3481c formed in the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Further, the main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the protruding plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480.

Therefore, when electric power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced vertically, and the accommodating member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be displaced vertically. That is, the accommodating member 3490 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the main body base member 3480.

Next, the operation of the accommodating member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. Further, in the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

FIG. 75A is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a state where the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 75B is a schematic view of the accommodation member 3490. Is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a front view in a state where the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 is released. 76 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 in the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa of FIG. 75 (a), and FIG. 76 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 in the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 75 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 75, a part of the accommodating member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are shown by broken lines for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a perspective state.

As shown in FIGS. 75A and 76A, when the accommodating member 3490 is located above, the distance dimension L1 between the bottom surface of the accommodating member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is large. It is arranged in a sufficiently secured state, and the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so as to protrude from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

That is, when the accommodating member 3490 is located below, the distance dimension L2 between the bottom surface of the accommodating member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is arranged in a state of being smaller than the distance dimension L1 and the main body. The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in a disengaged state (distance dimension L1> L2).

Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 slides with respect to the base member 3410, the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released, so that the transmission gear 437a does not rotate. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotating member 435, it is possible to form a form that does not rotate even if the left slide member 430 is displaced.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to stop the rotating member. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, in the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a arranged on the left slide member 430 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480. It is possible to switch between the 1st drive state and the 2nd drive state.

Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be smoothly meshed with each other.

That is, when the tooth portion of the transmission gear 437a and the tooth portion of the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, if the transmission gear 437a is brought closer to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 in a state of being out of phase, the left rotation transmission rack gear While the tooth surface of 413 and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a are in contact with each other, the transmission gear 437a is engaged while rotating along the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. Therefore, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a There is no need to match the phases, and the gears can be smoothly matched.

Next, the slide unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the fourth embodiment have been described. The 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment is formed of a horizontally long rectangular body in front view, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board on the lower edge portion. .. On the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 455 are formed.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed so as to be located on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. Further, notched portions 4413a notched from the tooth surface are formed at both end portions and the central portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a include a small tooth 4413b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to the notch 4413a.

On the other hand, the clockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed so as to be located on the right side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. Further, notches 4414a notched from the tooth surface are formed at both ends of the clockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4414. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch 4414a include a small tooth portion 4414b whose outer shape is smaller than that of the non-adjacent teeth.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Further, in the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a state where the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic view of the base member 4410. It is a schematic view which looked at the front view of the slide unit 4400 in the state where the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a was released. In FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is shown by a broken line for ease of understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a perspective state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates counterclockwise. It forms a state of being in mesh with the transmission rack gear 4413.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78B, when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is moved. A state in which the teeth are disengaged from the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

That is, the rotating member 435 can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch portion 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing. .. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, so that the rotation of the rotation member 435 is caused by its inertial force. Can be continued by.

Therefore, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotating member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to stop the rotating member. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In addition, switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is configured by removing some teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 to release the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose a drive motor or the like for disengaging the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a on the left slide member 430, so that the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Further, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are damaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. This can be prevented and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a passing through the notch portion 4413a collide with each other.

In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are smoothly engaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. be able to.

That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 not provided with the small tooth portion 4413b, when the third drive state is switched to the first drive state, if the rotation phase with the transmission gear 437a is out of phase, the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth There is a risk that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 will mesh with each other and the teeth cannot be engaged.

In this case, when the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are formed to have a smaller outer shape than the other teeth, the rotation phases of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are out of phase. However, when the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a come into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the teeth from engaging with each other and rotate the transmission gear 437a to adjust the phase thereof. As a result, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be smoothly performed.

Next, the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 5430. In the following, the left slide member 5430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 5430 and the right slide member in the fifth embodiment have been described. The 5450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment, the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

The one-way clutch 5439 has an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 formed through the axis of the transmission gear 5437f in a circular shape, an inner ring 5439c connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435, and each cam surface of the inner ring 5439c. A plurality of rollers 5439d arranged in the above, a cage 5439e for holding each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a connected to the cage 5439e and switching the phase of the rollers 5439d with respect to the cam surface are mainly provided. ..

A sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating in an elongated hole shape is formed in the switching plate 5439a, and a protruding portion 5436d protruding from the front side of the displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. ..

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic view of the left slide member 5430 in a front view before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81 (b) is a left view after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide member 5430 from the front. In FIG. 81, in order to facilitate understanding, the drawings are simplified, and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in a state where the displacement member 5436 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b are arranged. It is bitten by the wedge formed between. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81B, when the displacement member 5436 is displaced with respect to the rotating member 5435, the position of the protruding portion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 is changed to the rotating member 5435 due to the displacement. Displace with respect to. As a result, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by displace the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotating member 5435, it is possible to form a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 allows the transmission of rotation and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 5430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 5430 is slid-displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating, and the one-way clutch is used to stop the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430. By changing the state in which the 5439 allows the transmission of rotation to a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked, a third driving state is formed in which the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by the inertial force while the left slide member 5430 is stopped. be able to.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the displacements of the displacement member 5436 can be combined in addition to the motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435, the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, the displacement member 5436 can have both the role of performing the effect by displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the left slide member 5430 with a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

Next, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85.

First, the overall configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. In the following, the left slide member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member in the sixth embodiment have been described. The 6450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member 6450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is arranged on the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435 with the one-way clutch 5439 inserted through the through hole 6434a1 of the rear side base member 434a. To.

The through hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one-way clutch 5439 from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

In the one-way clutch 5439, the outer ring 5439b is connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, the inner ring 5439c is connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and the sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a is connected to the operator 6438 described later. To.

The operator 6438 is formed in a vertically long rod-like body having a rectangular front view. In the operator 6438, a connecting pin 6438a projecting forward is formed at the lower end portion, and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed slightly above the central portion in the vertical direction.

The through hole 6438b is a hole to be inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 protruding rearward from the back surface side of the back surface side base member 434a, and is formed to have a hole diameter larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operator 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operator 6438 is inserted into the through hole 6438b. Is arranged on the back surface of the back surface side base member 434a in a state of being rotatable about the axis.

The connecting pin 6438a is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and its outer diameter dimension is formed to be smaller than the groove width dimension of the sliding groove 5439a1.

Therefore, when the operator 6438 rotates about the through hole 6438b while the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes and the one-way The switching plate 5439a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back surface side base member 434a, and the other end is locked to the operator 6438. As a result, the operator 6438 is always urged in the clockwise direction with the through hole 6438b as the axis in the front view. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 can always be in the driving state (the state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotating member 5435) when no external force is applied to the operator 6438.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.

FIG. 84 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 6400 in the state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84 (b) is a schematic view of the slide unit 6400 in the state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the 6400 from the front. 85 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 in the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa of FIG. 84 (a), and FIG. 85 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXXVb of FIG. 84 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operator 6438 are shown by broken lines for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the base member 6410 is formed with a protrusion 6411a protruding from the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410 at the slide end portion of the left slide member 6430. ..

As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 85 (a), in a state where no external force is applied to the operator 6438, the operation operator 6438 is in a state in which the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. Placed in.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and is bitten into a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (b) and 85 (b), the left slide member 6430 slides and displaces, and the other end of the operator 6438 arranged on the left slide member 6430 immediately before the end of the slide displacement. The side surface on the right side of the front view on the side (upper side) comes into contact with the protrusion 6411a of the base member 6410.

When the left slide member 6430 further moves to the end portion after the side surface of the operator 6438 comes into contact with the base member 6410, the operator 6438 is displaced around the through hole 6438b in the counterclockwise rotation direction in the front view.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated to switch the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the actuator 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 6430, it is possible to form a state in which the transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of the rotation is blocked. it can.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 6430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430. By changing the one-way clutch 5439 from a state that allows transmission of rotation to a state that shuts off when the left slide member 6430 is stopped, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by its inertial force while the left slide member 6430 is stopped. A third drive state can be formed.

Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 6430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is not necessary to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. The weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced by the amount. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. First, the slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment. In the following, the left slide member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member in the seventh embodiment have been described. The 7450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member 7450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86, a concave groove 7417 in which the second slide member 7460, which will be described later, is arranged is formed on the back surface of the base member 7410.

The second slide member 7460 is sandwiched and held by a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on its upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged to face the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and two plate members 7462. A shaft portion 7463 to be formed, a roller 7465 arranged with the shaft portion 7436 inserted therein, and a drive gear 7464 arranged above the rack gear 7461 and meshing with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461 are mainly provided. Tooth.

The rack gear 7461 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the tooth surface 7461a of the gear is formed on the upper surface side. Further, a stop hole 7461b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction in the front view.

The plate member 7462 is a member for holding the roller 7465, which will be described later, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view. In the plate member 7462, a sliding groove 7462a located on the rack gear 7461 side is recessed on the side surface in the vertical direction, and a through hole 7462b is formed above the sliding groove 7462a in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 7462b is a through hole for fastening to the rack gear 7461. The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the through hole 7462b and fastening the screw to the set hole 7461b of the rack gear 7461.

The shaft portion 7436 is a columnar member inserted into the sliding groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462a. Further, the axial dimension is formed to be larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

As a result, when the shaft portion 7436 is sandwiched and held by the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7436 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction by the amount that the sliding groove 7462a is recessed in the vertical direction. ..

The outer shape of the roller 7465 is formed into a columnar shape, and a shaft hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the axis thereof. The roller 7465 has a shaft portion 7436 inserted through the shaft hole and is arranged between the two plate members 7462.

The drive gear 7464 is a member for applying a driving force that meshes with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to slide and displace the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466 described later.

The motor 7466 is a member that applies a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted through the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates, and the rack gear 7461 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction.

Further, of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 arranged in the front is decorated (display of a pattern or the like) on the plane arranged in the front side thereof. As a result, the second slide member 7460 can be made visible to the player by sliding displacement from the position where it overlaps with the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to the position where it does not overlap.

Next, the state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87 to 89 are schematic views of the slide unit 7400 as viewed from the front.

First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 includes the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment, the range of motion of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position before displacement of the operator 6438, and the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin. The only difference is that no urging spring is arranged between the 6434a2 and the 6434a2, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89.

First, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the state before the left slide member 7430 is slidably displaced, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6438b. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged in a state of being tilted to the right side.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and is bitten into a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, while the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced so that the other end side (upper end side) of the actuator 6438 is displaced to the position where it comes into contact with the roller 7465 (the position shown in FIG. 87B), the left slide member 7430 The rotating member 5435 can be rotationally moved with the displacement of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the operator 6438 comes into contact with the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is a side surface above the axis of the roller 7465. Contact. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the right, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the operator is urged downward by the slide displacement while urging the roller 7465 downward. The 6438 can be rotated around the through hole 6438b as an axis.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the longitudinal direction of the operator 6438 is rotated to a position substantially coincide with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is changed to the roller 7465. It comes into contact with the side surface of the roller 7465 located at substantially the same height as the axis of the roller.

Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the slide displacement allows the operator 6438 to be rotated around the through hole 6438b while urging the roller 7465 to the right.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged so as to be tilted to the right, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side of the through hole 6438b. Will be done.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated to switch the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439.

As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the neutral position on the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Further, when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is rotated to a state of being tilted to the left side, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is in contact with the side surface below the axis of the roller 7465. Get in touch. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the actuator 6438 is tilted to the left side, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the roller 7465 can be urged upward by the slide displacement.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89A, the shaft portion 7463 through which the roller 7465 is inserted is slid upward. As a result, since the roller 7465 is located above the operator 6438, the operator 6438 can be displaced to the right of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

Further, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is located on the right side of the roller 7465 is on the left side of the roller 7465 because the one-way clutch 5439 is blocking the rotation transmission as described above. The rotation can be continued by the inertial force of the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the sliding displacement is performed.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the actuator 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 7430, it is possible to form a state in which the transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of the rotation is blocked. it can.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 are In the stopped state, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 can be continued by its inertial force to form a third driving state.

Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, by stopping the inertial force in the third driving state (for example, waiting until the time when the inertial force stops acting), the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435. It is possible to form a second drive state in which the left slide member 7430 is slide-displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotary member 5435 can be increased. .. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is not necessary to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 7430. The weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced by the amount. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the position where the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is It is possible to change the position where the permissible state is changed to the regulated state or the permissible state is changed to the regulated state. As a result, the position where the rotation state of the rotating member 5435 is changed when the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced, and the position where the rotating member 5435 is rotated while the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is stopped. It can be changed according to the game state and the like, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount. However, the second slide member 7460 is displaced due to the displacement. Since the role of performing the effect and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are combined, it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched by displace the second slide member 7460. be able to.

That is, from the state in which the second slide member 7460 is arranged in either the left or right direction of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 is moved to either the left or right direction in the state where the left slide member 7430 is stopped. By displacement, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

Therefore, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched without sliding the left slide member 7430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 is accompanied by the displacement of the left slide member 7430. The first drive state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 are not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating. Two drive states can be formed.

Next, the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 is a front view of the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 8400. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment has a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 8430 that is slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for sliding-displace the left slide member 8430 along the sliding rod member 420. ..

The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and a sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, a protruding plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410, and a base side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411.

The base side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first side pinion gear 432 and the second side pinion gear 8433d of the left slide member 8430 are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 8430 is a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in front view, a base member 8431b having a rectangular shape in front view hanging from the first member 8431, and a first member rotatably arranged on the first member 8431. A front-view rectangular vertically long second member 8433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a to which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed, and a front-view rectangular vertically long base member suspended from the second member 8433. 8434, a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably arranged on the second member 8433, and a third member 8445 having a rectangular laterally long front view having a third side rack gear 8445a to which the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed. , 8446, which is a horizontally long base member with a rectangular shape in front view, which hangs down from the third member 8445.

The first member 8431 has a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Therefore, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by being acted on by the base side rack gear 8412 with the slide displacement.

The second member 8433 is displaceably arranged in the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end, so that the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the second member 8433 is engraved with the second rack gear 433a on the lower surface thereof. Therefore, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

Further, the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by being acted on by the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the slide displacement.

The third member 8445 is displaceably arranged in the second member 8433, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end so that the third member 8445 is displaced relative to the second member 8433. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the third member 8445 is engraved with the third side rack gear 8445a on the lower surface thereof. Further, the third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 is acted on by the second side pinion gear 8433d, so that the third member 8445 becomes the second member. It is displaced relative to 8433.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, the second member 8433 is referred to. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, the third member 8445 is fitted with the second side pinion gear 8433d. It is possible to apply the driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the second member 8433. Can be done.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93 (a) to 93 (c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 viewed from the front, and show a transition state when the left slide member 8430 is slid and displaced. 94 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 on the XCIVa-XCIVa line of FIG. 93 (a), and FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 on the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 94 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 93 (c). Note that FIG. 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 94 (a), when the left slide member 8430 is arranged in the retracted position, the second member 8433 is arranged inside the first member 8431 and the second member 8433. A third member 8445 is arranged inside the.

In this case, the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 is located in front of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is arranged in front of the base member 8434. Will be done.

That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (in a state of being overlapped in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 are slide-displaced, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be slid-displaced without interfering with each other. .. Further, the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed to reduce the size.

Further, since the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, the effect region K formed in the central portion of the game board (in FIG. 93A, the base member 8410 An area where the lower side and the left side of the base member 8446 overlap each other) can be secured.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 8430 is arranged in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and left. The left drive gear 471 meshed with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the second rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second rack gear 433a and the base side are arranged facing each other. Since the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 8431 is interposed in the state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433 Since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both of the 433a, the driving force accompanying the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 with respect to the second member 8433. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with exercise. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

As a result, the time required to slide-displace the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect region K (shielding state) or retract from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 8400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

Further, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and teeth are provided on both of the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d axially supported by the second member 8433 is interposed in the combined state, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with the third member 8445, the driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. Can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the second member 8433. Can be done.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 93B, the second member 8433 can be slidably displaced relative to the first member 8431. Further, the third member 8445 can be slidably displaced relative to the second member 8433.

As a result, the time required to slide-displace the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retract from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 8400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), when the left slide member 8430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the second member 8433 leaves a part of overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is arranged so as to protrude from the inside of the second member 8433, leaving a part of overlap.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the side surface on the left side of the base member 8431b hanging on the first member 8431 and the side surface on the right side of the base member 8434 hanging on the second member 8433 are substantially in the front-rear direction. They are placed in the same position. Further, the left side surface of the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 and the right side surface of the base member 8446 suspended from the third member 8445 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. To.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire area of the effect region K.

Next, the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430.

In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 is hung on the second member 433 has been described, but in the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b is hung on the first member 431 and the second member 8433. A base member 9434 hanging from the base member 9434 is arranged. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment has a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 9430 that is slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacement the left slide member 9430 along a sliding guide groove.

The left slide member 9430 is a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in front view, a base member 9431b having a rectangular shape in front view hanging from the first member 8431, and a first member rotatably arranged on the first member 8431. A front-view rectangular vertically long second member 9433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a to which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed, and a front-view rectangular vertically long base member suspended from the second member 9433. Mainly provided with 9434, a slide rail 9443 arranged on the base member 9434, a rectangular vertically long base member 9446 connected to the slide rail 9443, and a freely deformable thread-like wire 9444. It is composed of.

The first member 8431 has a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Therefore, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The base member 9431b is formed with a concave groove recessed from the back side on the side surface on the left side in the front view on the upper end side, and a columnar connecting shaft 9431b1 extending in the upward and downward directions inside the concave groove is formed. It is formed (see FIG. 98).

The second member 9433 is displaceably arranged in the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end so that the second member 9433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433, the second member 9433 , The driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

The base member 9434 is formed with a notch 9434c whose upper end side is cut out in the front-rear direction, and a disk-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably arranged inside the notch 9434c. Further, on the base member 9434, a slide rail 9443, which will be described later, is arranged on the front surface of the base member 9434 in a state where the expansion / contraction direction is the left-right direction.

The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444 described later, and its vertical position is arranged at substantially the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The slide rail 9443 is a member for holding the third member in a slidable manner, and is formed of two plates and the plates of each other are slidably displaceable. Further, the slide rail 9443 is provided with a coil spring (not shown) inside, and is urged in a direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

The base member 9437 is slidably arranged with respect to the second member 9433 by fastening the back surface side to the slide rail 9443.

The base member 9437 is formed with a concave groove recessed from the back side on the side surface on the right side of the upper end portion when viewed from the front, and a columnar connecting shaft 9446a extending in the vertical direction is formed inside the concave groove. Will be done. Further, the connecting shaft 9446a is arranged at a position in the vertical direction substantially the same as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The wire 9444 is a member for displace the base member 9437 with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed of a piano wire, a fishing line, or the like. One end of the wire 9444 is connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member, and the other end is connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533. Further, the wire 9444 has a connecting path for connecting one end and the other end located between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434d of the second member 9433. It is arranged in a state where a part of the side surface of the wire is in contact with the wire (see FIG. 9).

Next, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, showing a transition state when the left slide member 9430 is slid displacement. 98 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa of FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 98 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 97 (b). It is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 98 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of FIG. 97 (c). Note that FIG. 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 98 (a), when the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are located at different positions in the front-rear direction. Placed in. Therefore, the base member 9431b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced without interfering with each other. The space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed to reduce the size.

Further, since the space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, the effect region K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

Further, when the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the urging force of the slide rail arranged between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 causes the base member 9446 to move to the left with respect to the base member 9434. Although a sliding force acts, the wire 9444 connects the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438, and the connecting path is between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434, so that the base member 9434 causes the base member. It is possible to prevent the 9446 from sliding to the left with respect to the base member 9434.

That is, the length dimension of the wire 9444 is a combination of the length dimension of the base member 9434 in the left-right direction and the dimension of the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 in the thickness direction. It is possible to maintain a state in which the 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are overlapped in the front-rear direction.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated to rotate the left pinion gear. The left drive gear 471 connected to 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 8431 in a state of being meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. Is provided, so that the second member 9433 can be provided with a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

As a result, the time required to slide-displace the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect region K (shielding state) or retract from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 9400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

Further, in this case, the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 are arranged at positions shifted from each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from the overlapping dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9A to the overlapping dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9B.

Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3> L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the urging force of the slide rail 9443 by the amount that the wire 9444 is loosened. As a result, when the base member 9431b is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 9434 in a state of being faster than the base member 9434.

As a result, the time required for sliding displacement of the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect region K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (open state) is shortened, and the shielding state and The open state can be switched quickly.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), when the left slide member 9430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the left side surface of the base member 9431b in the front view and the right side of the base member 9434 in the front view. The side surfaces are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, the side surface of the base member 9434 on the left side in the front view and the side surface of the base member 9446 on the right side in the front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire area of the effect region K.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the slide displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444, so that the third member 8445 is arranged above the base member 8446 as in the eighth embodiment. You don't have to. Therefore, since the third member 8445 is not arranged, the distance dimension of the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 in the longitudinal direction can be reduced, and the space for arranging the base member 8410 can be suppressed to reduce the size. Can be planned.

Next, the elevating unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. 99 (a) is a front view of the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit 10800, and FIG. 99 (c) is a side view of the elevating unit 10800. Is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 10800.

In the first embodiment, the case where the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) arranged in the operation unit 200 are not connected to each other at the united (extending) position has been described. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units ((slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 10800)) arranged in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in a united state. The same as in each of the above embodiments. The same reference numerals are given to the parts of, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment is formed by including an elevating member 10820 which is dislocated on the base member 810 so as to be elevated. The elevating member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is mainly provided with a protrusion 821 projecting to the back surface side and an engaging portion 10822 formed to project from the back surface side.

The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that is engaged with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 when the operating unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, and is an elevating member. It is formed so as to project from the back surface side of the 10820. The lateral dimension of the engaging portion 10822 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance dimension between the opposing rotating members 435 and 455 in the combined state, and is larger than that of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed so as to protrude toward the back side. Therefore, when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the united state, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 10822 (see FIG. 102 (a)).

Further, the engaging portion 10822 is provided with a through hole 10822a which is formed so as to project in a rectangular shape from the back surface side of the elevating member 10820 and penetrates in the direction of gravity. The through hole 10822a is a member through which the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the tip end portion of the projecting member 735 in the top view. As a result, when the operating unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, the tip end portion of the projecting member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102 (b)).

Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. 101 is an operating unit 10200 in a united state, FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 10200 on the line CIIa-CIIa of FIG. 101, and FIG. 102 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 10200 of FIG. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 in the CIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, each rotating member 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is brought into contact with the elevating unit 10800 (elevating member 10820) of the operating unit 10200 in the combined state with the side surface of the engaging portion 10822. (See FIG. 102 (a)).

The engaging portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the width dimension is reduced as the outer shape thereof is directed downward in the rear view. That is, the left and right side surfaces (left and right in FIG. 99B) of the engaging portion 10822 are formed so as to be inclined toward the central portion in the left-right direction toward the lower side.

Further, as described above, the protruding member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, an inclined portion 10735a is formed on the back surface side of the projecting member 735 so that the projecting distance increases toward the lower side, and the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a are formed so as to be in contact with each other. ..

Therefore, the engaging portion 10822 allows the elevating unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700 to be in contact with each other, so that each movable unit (elevating unit 10800, slide) in the combined state can be brought into contact with each other. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in the arrangement of the unit 400 and the protruding unit 700). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity of each movable unit in the combined state, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700.

More specifically, the elevating member 10820 is displaced (vibrated) up and down at a relatively small distance by repeatedly acting a relatively small rotational drive on the drive motor 891 that drives the elevating member 10820 in a reciprocating manner.

In this case, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is in contact with the left and right (left and right in FIG. 99B) side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822, so that the left and right side surfaces are in contact with each other. The side in contact with the joint portion 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 101) of the operating unit 10200.

At the united (overhanging) position, the rotating members 435 and 455 are given a rotational moment in a direction in which the side in contact with the engaging portion 10822 due to the center of gravity is displaced inward in the left-right direction of the operating unit 10200. .. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455, which are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820, can come into contact with the engaging portion 10822 again by the rotational moment. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700, since the inclined portion 10735a is brought into contact with the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, the elevating member 10820 is given a periodic and repeated displacement, so that the inclined portion 10735 The inner surface of the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface of the above. Therefore, the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a periodically displaces the distance at which the projecting member 735 is pushed forward (to the left in FIG. 102B). As a result, the elevating member 10820 is displaced repeatedly periodically, so that the protruding member 735 can be displaced repeatedly periodically. Therefore, the driving energy can be suppressed because it is not necessary to apply the driving force to the other driving motors 763,475,476.

That is, at the united (overhanging) position, the elevating member 10820 is provided so as to be able to come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, and the elevating member 10820 is formed so that it can be displaced periodically. The rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820. In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), the rotating member 435, 455, and the elevating member 10820 can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. .. Further, in this case, the elevating member 10820 is forcibly displaced by bringing them into contact with each other, and a mechanism for periodically displaces the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 is provided. There is no need. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are in a state of being separated from each other (non-contacting), the elevating member 10820 may be subjected to periodic displacement without being affected by each other. it can. That is, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be easily transmitted to each of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455.

Further, the rotating members 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are not related to each other, and they can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different manners from each other. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 have different configurations (number of parts and shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, they are vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the portion of one character formed by the rotating member 730 and the portion formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably arranged with respect to the base members 434 and 454, due to the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820, the rotational members are circumferentially centered on the rotation axis. The rotating member 730 can be arranged to periodically repeat the operation of being pushed out in the front-rear direction due to the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protruding member 735.

Further, since each of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 is directly connected to the displacement (vibration) driving source, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted.

That is, when the projecting member 735 is connected to each of the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force that displaces (vibrates) the projecting member 735 is transmitted via each of the rotating members 435 and 455, and thus is transmitted to the projecting member 735. Where the driving force is reduced, in the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to the displacement (vibrating) driving source, so that the driving force is efficiently transmitted. be able to.

Further, the elevating member 10820 is arranged on the side closer to the player because the position in the front-rear direction at the united (overhanging) position is arranged in front of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. The elevating member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the pattern (character) is vibrated by the elevating member 10820 on the front side, which is easy for the player to see, as a vibration source, it is possible to easily transmit the force of the vibration to the player.

Next, the operation unit 200 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107.

First, the driving body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 (a) is a front view of the drive body 11761 in a state where the drive body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment is arranged at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103 (b) shows the drive body 11761 in the second rotation. It is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged at a position.

In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the drive body 761 is lowered so that the intermediate member 733 is lowered with the rotation of the drive body 761 that displaces the projecting member 735 to the overhanging position (the state of protruding from the rotating member 730). Although the case where the 761b is formed has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, the interposition member 733 is generated as the driving body 11761 displaces the protruding member 735 to the overhanging position (protruding state from the rotating member 730). The cam portion 11761b of the drive body 11761 is formed so as to rise. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the cam portion 11761b of the drive body 11761 according to the eleventh embodiment is attached to the sliding wall 733c in a state where the drive body 11761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) on the abutted cam surface (position P1) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam abutted on the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 11761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R4) on the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously increase from the position P1 to the position P2.

Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intermediate member 733) is located from the bottom to the top when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. It is continuously raised to the upper side, and when the drive body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 11761b is increased to the position P2 which is the maximum diameter, so that the intermediate member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position. Along with this, the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

Next, the displacement mode will be described when each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to the combined state with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. 104 to 107 are front views of the operating unit 200. It should be noted that FIGS. 104 to 107 show in order the displacement mode when each movable unit is displaced to the united (overhanging) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the tenth embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG. 104.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is slidably displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projecting unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slidably displaced toward the central portion of the game machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. Rotationally displaced, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidably displaced downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slid upwardly displaced, and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding unit 11700 of the operating unit 200 at the initial position is arranged with the tip of the swinging member 732 close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed in the central portion of the operating unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, the arrangement space of each movable unit in the retracted state can be reduced, and the amount of extension during the extension operation can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced. As shown in FIG. 105, the displacement of the protruding unit 11700 in the first operation is performed by sliding the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined position. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to the same distance.

Due to the displacement of the second operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 moves to the base. It is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the member 810. In the third state, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 1170 is housed inside the rotating member 11730.

Further, in this case, the tip of the swing member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is set to a descending position close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the rotating member 11730 is maintained in a state in which the swinging member 732 is close to the rotating member 11730 until it is arranged in the coalescing (overhanging position), and thus rotates in the middle of the displacement to the coalescing position. It is possible to prevent the members 435 and 455 from interfering with the swing member 732. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (elevating member 820, rotating member 435, 455, and rotating member 11730) is formed, and enhance the effect.

Further, since the tip of the swing member 732 is set to a descending position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating member 435 and 455 and the swing member 732 can be increased, so that the rotating member 435 and 455 can be formed large. Therefore, it is a pattern (character) that each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 11720 (rotating member 11730) and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700 and elevating unit 800) is united and formed. ) Can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operating unit (slide unit 400 and elevating unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 can displace the swinging member 732 according to its displacement.

Therefore, with the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700, the tip of the swinging member 732 can be raised in a direction away from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is in the united (overhanging) position, the tip of the swing member 732 is separated from the rotating member 11730, so that the elevating member 820, the rotating member 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating and lowering) The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) in the slide unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed so as to be in contact with the base member 410.

In this case, the base member 410 is provided with the contacted portion, and the contacted portion is arranged at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), and each component is provided. When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to variations in the dimensions of the left drive motor 475 and the control of the left drive motor 475, the first member 431 is brought into contact with the first member 431. It is brought into contact with the member (that is, the contacted member functions as a stopper that regulates the displacement of the left slide member 430). By bringing the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the contacted member, the impact at the time of the contact is weakened and damage to both is suppressed. be able to.

In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) which is the contact target (member with which the first member 431 is abutted) of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). The case where the displacement is a slide displacement (linear motion) and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The contact target of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) should have at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of the displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact object may be a rotational motion or a motion along a curve.

As described above, if the contact target has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431) When they are brought into contact with each other, the above-mentioned parallel displacement component can cause the contacted object to be retracted (released), and a buffering action can be exerted accordingly. Further, by displace the contact object in the direction opposite to the case of contact, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the parallel displacement component described above, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( It is possible to assist the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state).

The contact target does not have to be driven by the driving means. Instead of being driven by a driving means, or in addition to being driven by a driving means, it is formed so as to be urged by an urging means (an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring, etc.). Is also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with the left slide member 430, the urging means is elastically deformed so that the above-mentioned cushioning action can be exerted and the elastic recovery force thereof is increased. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, the case where the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are arranged to the overhanging positions substantially at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the upper displacement member 530 is first placed in the overhang position, and then the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the overhang position (that is, the lower contact portion 643 hits the upper contact portion 533 in the stopped state. It may be touched). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, the upper displacement member which is the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (the object with which the lower displacement member 640 is abutted (combined) at the overhanging position). Although the case where the 530 is formed so as to be displaceable has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the contact target may be a stationary object (non-displaceable object). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position in the lower uniting unit 600 is set to the overhanging rotation position has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited.

For example, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position may be a vertical rotation position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is set as the overhanging position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed to be in contact with the upper displacement member 530 at the overhanging position. You may.

Alternatively, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the overhang position is set to the rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (for example, the drive arm 630 is 80 degrees from the horizontal rotation position). It may be a rotated rotation position). That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position is defined as the extension position of the lower displacement member 640, and at the extension position, the lower displacement member 640 is the upper displacement member. It may be formed so as to be in contact with 530.

In any of these configurations, the impact at the time of contact (collision) can be weakened and the bounce can be suppressed by changing (decreasing) the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower united unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other structures may be adopted. good. As another structure, for example, a columnar guide pin is projected from the back surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the back surface at a position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove into which the guide pin can slide is provided. An example is a structure in which the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position by extending to the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove.

In the case of such a structure, at least a component in the displacement (velocity) component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target (the target with which the lower displacement member 640 is abutted (merged) at the overhang position) is. The shape of the guide groove is set so that it decreases at least in the vicinity of the overhang position. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the bounce is suppressed. can do.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, only the lower uniting unit 600 (lower displacement member 640) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to this, the upper uniting unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. May be done. In this case, the lower united unit 600 that is turned upside down may be arranged as the upper united unit 500.

In the first embodiment, in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant. ) Has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is increased or decreased (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). You may increase or decrease the speed). For example, the power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least one of the velocity components of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the other party is reduced in the vicinity of the overhang position. An example is a mode in which the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are reduced. It should be noted that the target for reducing the supplied power may be only one of the drive motors 543 and 672, or both.

In the first embodiment, in the protruding unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the intermediate member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 come into contact with each other is the rotation of the drive body 761 in the front view. Although the case where the vehicle is located on the vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40), the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the above-mentioned position where the bottom surface and the cam surface abut is passed through the rotation center of the drive body 761. It may be set at a position separated from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 732 are provided so that the drive body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the projecting member 735. When the weight of the member 733 acts on the drive body 761 and the projecting member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the drive body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the swing member 732 and the intermediate member 733. It is preferable that the weights of the swing member 732 and the interposition member 733 are formed so as to act on the drive body 761. This is because the load of the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the weights of the swing member 732, the intermediate member 733, and the projecting member 735.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the protruding unit 700 has been described, but it is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. The central angle of this predetermined range is preferably set according to the angle required for the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The timing at which the displacement of the swing member 732 is started can be matched with the timing at which the displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, while one of the swing member 732 or the projecting member 735 has a displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity). While one of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 has a downward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other has a vertical (velocity) component. ) The case where the load of the drive motor 763 is made uniform by forming it so as to have a displacement (velocity) component in the upward direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 The cam shape (cam diameter) in the above and the shape of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761) may be combined to make the load of the drive motor 763 uniform.

That is, in a region where the load required to exert an action on the sliding wall 733c from the cam portion 761b is relatively large, the load required to exert an action on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is applied. The shape of the sliding hole 735b is set so as to be relatively small, and conversely, in a region where the load required to exert an action on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is relatively large, the sliding hole 735b is slid. The shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load required to exert an action from the cam portion 761b on the moving wall 733c is relatively small.

In the first embodiment, the case where the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735 in the projecting unit 700 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 may be acted as an urging force in the direction of raising (sliding displacement upward) the projecting member 735. In this case, due to the synergistic effect of the sliding hole 735b described above with the curved portion 735b1, the initial velocity when the protruding member 735 is slid upward from the stopped state can be increased.

In the second embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 2437a includes the tooth portion 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2 in the slide unit 2400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the left side of the rotation transmission member 2485. The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with a bulging portion in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced. In this case as well, as in the second embodiment, it is possible to smoothly perform the tooth engagement when switching from the second drive state in which the tooth engagement is released to the toothed first drive state.

Further, bulging portions may be formed on both sides of the gears arranged in the vertical direction of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414. In this case, since bulging portions are formed in the gears that mesh with each other when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the first drive meshed from the second drive state in which the teeth are released. Switching to the state can be performed more smoothly.

Further, in this case, by forming the bulging portions on both sides of the gears to be meshed with each other, the thickness dimension of the bulging portion (dimension in the tooth width direction of the gear) can be made small.

In the second and third embodiments, when the left slide members 430 and 2430 are displaced from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) to the overhanging position (the position at the center of the game machine) in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400. Although the case of displacement from the first drive state to the second drive state has been described above, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 430 and 430 are extended from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) (the position on the left side of the game machine). When it is displaced to the position of the center of the game machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

In the fourth embodiment, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are made into small teeth formed to be compact, thereby increasing the rigidity thereof. Although the case of increasing the height has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the tooth width of the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a may be formed to be large to increase the rigidity thereof.

Also in this case, as in the fourth embodiment, when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a are damaged. This can be prevented, and the durability of the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 6411a that displaces the operator 6438 is formed on the base member 6411 has been described in the slide unit 6400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 6411a is provided on the back case 300. It may be formed in the above and arranged so as to be in contact with the operator 6438. That is, the position where the protrusion 6411a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, and may be formed on the member on the displacement locus of the operator 6438.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are displaced from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) to the overhanging position (the position at the center of the game machine) in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400. The case of displacement from the first drive state to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are in the retracted position (position on the left side of the game machine). When it is displaced from the overhanging position (position at the center of the game machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the roller 7465 that displaces the operator 6438 is arranged on the second slide member 7640 in the slide unit 7400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operator 6438 is not necessarily limited to this. The roller 7645 is arranged on the base member 7410, and the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 arranged on the base member 7410. There may be.

In the eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, so that the second member 8433 is formed with respect to the first member 8431. The relative displacement distance and the relative displacement distance of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are formed to be substantially the same, but the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583d is not necessarily limited to this. The outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432 is formed to be smaller or larger than the outer shape, so that the distance at which the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 are displaced relative to the second member 8433. It may be formed differently from the distance.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, when the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432 and the third member 8445, 9445 are slidably displaced to the effect region K in the slide units 8400, 9400, the effect region The case where K is made invisible has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a part or all of the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432 and the third member 8445, 9445 may be used. , It may be formed from a light-transmitting material so that a part or all of the effect region K can be seen through.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the side surface on the left side of the base members 8431b and 9431b in the front view and the side surface on the right side of the base members 8434 and 9434 in the front view are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. The case where the side surface on the left side of the base members 8434 and 9434 and the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base members 8446 and 9446 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction has been described. The side surface on the left side of the front view of the members 8431b and 9431b and the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base members 8434 and 9434 may be arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction. The side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 on the right side in the front view may be arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position, the mode in which the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other is controlled and dimensioned. The case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when both are closer than the reference position due to the variation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be in a position where they constantly collide with each other.

In this case, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by colliding with the swinging member, so that the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly. That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the transmission path of the drive from the drive motors 475 and 476 is lengthened. Therefore, when it takes time to transmit the stop operation of the drive motors 475 and 476, the rotating members 435 and 455 are brought into contact with the swing member 732 to stop the displacement operation, so that the drive motors are quickly stopped at the united (overhanging) position. can do.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is used. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732, the second members 436 and 456 arranged in the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated to the opposite side of the first embodiment. You may overhang.

In this case, the second members 436 and 456 are arranged in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732, and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 730 (elevating base 720) are moved up and down. The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 at the united position can be easily increased.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 11700 are displaced to the united (extending) position, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720) are separated from each other. Although the case where the rotating members are arranged in the state has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720) may be arranged in the abutted state. .. In this case, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 are arranged in contact with each other, the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720), and the elevating members 820 are displaced and formed at the combined position. The size of the pattern (character) can be easily increased.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other, the rotating member 730 rotates. , The case where the rotating members 435 and 455 absorb the impact when colliding with the swinging member 732 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elevating base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710.

In this case, since the rotating member 730 is connected to the transmission path for transmitting the drive for rotating the elevating base 720, the elevating base 720 is attached to the base member 710 where it is difficult to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720. By rotating the members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily rotated when they come into contact with the swinging member 732. Therefore, the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 can be easily absorbed.

In the first embodiment, when the second effect mode is formed, at least a part of the contact portion of the rotating member 435 with the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. Although it is arranged on the front side, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotating member 435 is the entire contacted portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. It may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the. Further, it may be arranged on the front side of the region beyond this.

In this case, since the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be made invisible to the player by the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 are combined into one pattern. It can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second production mode and impairing the interest.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member dislocated linearly on the base member, and a contact member formed so as to be in contact with the displacement member, the displacement member is the base. It has a first member that is linearly displaceable on the member, a pinion gear that is rotatably arranged on the first member, and a rack gear to which the pinion gear is meshed, and can be linearly displaced on the first member. The base member includes a second member to be arranged, the base member includes a rack gear to which the pinion gear is meshed, and the first member of the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. Game machine A1.

Here, a game machine including a base member and a displacement member disposed of the base member so as to be linearly displaceable is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57166). In this case, for example, a displacement member that is being displaced is brought into contact with the contact member to displace the contact member together with the displacement member, or a contact member is arranged at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. , When the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper). Are known.

However, the above-mentioned conventional configuration has a problem that the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged when the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, it is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member and the contact member while ensuring the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

That is, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member is a second member. Since the rack gear of the base member is meshed with the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the one member, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is increased as compared with the first member. The speed can be linearly displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, the displacement speed of the second member can be increased, and the effect of the displacement can be ensured. On the other hand, since the displacement member brings the first member, which has a slower displacement speed than the second member, into contact with the contact member, the impact at the time of the contact is weakened and the displacement member and the contact member are suppressed from being damaged. can do.

As a form of driving the first member with respect to the base member, for example, a pinion gear arranged on the base member is meshed with a rack gear formed on the first member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven to base the first member. The base member is displaced linearly with respect to the member, or the tip of the arm body whose base end is rotatably supported by the base member is connected to the first member and the arm body is rotationally driven to rotate the first member. An example is one that is linearly displaced with respect to.

Further, the contact between the displacement member and the contact member may be performed when the second member is linearly displaced in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the projecting direction. , The second member may be the one performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the storage direction. In either case, the first member, which has a slower displacement rate than the second member, is brought into contact with the contact member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of the contact, and the displacement member and the contact member Damage can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is a straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is contacted. A game machine A2 characterized in a direction that allows displacement.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is in contact with the displaceable direction of the contact member. Since the direction is such that the displacement of the displacement member is allowed, the contact member can escape while receiving the displacement of the displacement member, so that a cushioning action can be exerted, and as a result, the displacement member and the contact member are damaged. Can be easily suppressed.

The direction in which the linear displacement of the displacement member is allowed means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, but may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

The game machine A3 is characterized in that the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member in the game machine A2.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is in contact with the game machine A3. At that time, the escape operation of the contact member can be smoothly performed. Therefore, the cushioning action can be reliably exerted, and damage to the displacement member and the contact member can be easily suppressed.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that the game machine A3 includes a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member is provided, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member, so that the device as a whole is compact. It can be changed. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the contact member are arranged side by side in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement. As a result, the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement increases, which leads to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, by also using one of the guide members, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

A5 of the game machines A2 to A4, wherein the contact member can be arranged at a position where the contact member is not in contact with the displacement member.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be arranged at a position where the contact member is not in contact with the displacement member, so that the displacement member hits the contact member. It is possible to form a state in which they are not in contact with each other. That is, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, so that the displacement member is brought into contact with the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, it is easy to match the stop position of the displacement member with the target position, so that the contact member is brought into contact with the member (the contact member functions as a stopper). By arranging the displacement member in a non-contact position and not contacting the two, the number of contacts is reduced, the fatigue of the displacement member and the contact member due to the contact is reduced, and the life of the members is improved. Can be planned.

In any of the game machines A2 to A5, a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member is provided, and the contact member pushes back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction.

Here, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member is By engaging the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, the second member is moved from the first member by utilizing the linear displacement of the first member with respect to the base member. Since the structure is such that the vehicle is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is increased, the force required for driving becomes relatively large. In particular, during the initial operation of the displacement member (at the start of linear displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the speed of linear displacement from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the displacement may be hindered.

In this case, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, the initial operation of the displacement member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to speed up the initial operation and improve the effect of the effect due to the displacement.

The direction of pushing back the displacement member means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, but may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In the game machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member comes into contact with the first member of the displacement members. A game machine A7 characterized by being displaced.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member is among the displacement members. Since it is in contact with the first member of the displacement member, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be improved. That is, since the contact member is in contact with the first member whose displacement speed is slower than that of the second member and pushes back the first member, an auxiliary force acts from the contact member to the displacement member (first member). (That is, the time from when the displacement member in the stopped state starts to be pushed back until the speed of the displacement member exceeds the speed of the contact member and the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the contact member) is longer. As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be increased.

In the game machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is the rack in the contact member. The gaming machine A8 characterized in that the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the pinion mechanism.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member Since the gear ratio is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, it is possible to quickly and linearly displace the displacement member from the stopped state, and after the start of the linear displacement, the displacement member ( The speed of linear displacement of the second member) can be increased, and as a result, the effect of effect associated with the displacement can be improved.

That is, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member is set to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. Therefore, the force to push back the displacement member by the contact member is strengthened to cause displacement. The initial operation of the member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a large gear ratio, the speed of linear displacement of the first member can be increased, so that the linear displacement of the second member can be increased accordingly. You can increase the speed.

The large (small) gear ratio means that the linear displacement distance of the rack gear when the pinion gear makes one rotation is large (small).

Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member, the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation is reduced. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member becomes slow. That is, it has been impossible in the past to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member and increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation. By adopting a structure that pushes back the displacement member, this compatibility is possible for the first time.

<Concept of the invention using the lower united unit 600 as an example>
It includes a driving means, a displacement member driven by the driving means and formed so as to be displaceable toward a first position, and a contacted member with which the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that at least a component of the velocity components of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members can be displaced between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined interval and an abutting position (first position) where they are in contact with each other. The game machine to be formed is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-51160). In this type of gaming machine, for example, a pair of displacement members retracted to a retracted position are displaced in a direction close to each other, and the pair of displacement members are integrated at the contact position. The production is performed to form a single character.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when a pair of displacement members are brought into contact with each other at the first position, an impact is generated, and the posture becomes unstable, for example, they are bounced off each other. was there. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time required to integrate the pair of displacement members to form one character increases and the time is extended. The effect of the production is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member among the velocity components of the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, so that the displacement member is located at the first position. It is possible to suppress the generation of an impact when the displaced displacement member is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

Further, since the decrease of at least the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the displacement is performed until the vicinity of the first position is reached. Since the speed of displacement of the member can be increased, the time required to integrate the displacement member with the contacted member to form one character can be reduced, and the extension can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, the contacted member may be a member stopped at the first position, or may be a member formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the contacted member is arranged in the first position before the displacement member (that is, the displacement member is placed in the first position with respect to the contacted member that has reached the first position first and is in a stopped state. It may be abutted), and is arranged at the first position substantially at the same time as the displaced member (that is, the displaced member and the abutted member in a displaced state are abutted at the first position). It may be.

Further, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the contacted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position, a form in which the component decreases continuously toward the first position and a form in which the component gradually decreases toward the first position. , A form combining these is exemplified.

Further, the decrease of the component in the direction toward the contacted member means that not only the speed toward the contacted member is reduced but also the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes 0, and This is intended to include a case where the speed in the direction away from the contacted member increases (that is, the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes negative).

The game machine B1 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means has a speed component of the displacement member in a state where the driving state of the driving means is constant. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the transmission means reduces the velocity component of the displacement member at least in the direction toward the contacted member in the vicinity of the first position. Since it can be performed in a state where the driving state of the driving means is constant, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving means according to the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the drive means, reduce the control cost, and improve the reliability.

As the state in which the drive state is constant, for example, if the drive means is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.), a state in which the supply current or the supply voltage is constant is exemplified. To. However, changes in state during transient response during start and stop shall be ignored.

In the game machine B2, the displacement member is provided with a base member that is displaceably arranged, and the transmission means is located at a position that is rotatably connected to the base member and is separated from the rotation base by a predetermined distance. A connecting member having a connecting tip portion that is formed and rotatably connected to the displacement member is provided, and the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base portion in a direction that brings the connecting tip portion closer to the first position. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced toward the first position.

According to the game machine B3, a connecting member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement locus of the connecting tip portion of the connecting member is an arc centered on the rotation base portion. That is, the tangential displacement of the arc is applied to the displacement member. In this case, since the connecting member is rotated with the rotation base as the center of rotation in the direction in which the connecting tip is brought closer to the first position, the first position (that is, the contacted member) of the velocity components of the displacement member. The component in the direction toward the direction can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. As described above, since the transmission means inserts a connecting member between the base member and the displacement member and displaces the displacement member via the connecting member, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the transmission means is transmitted. The structure of the means can be simplified.

In the game machine B2, the displacement member is provided with a base member in which the displacement member is displaceably arranged, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove extending from the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member is provided with a guide groove. A guided portion guided along the guide groove is provided, and the guide groove is a component of at least a velocity component of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in a direction toward the contacted member. However, the gaming machine B4 is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B4, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove extending from the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member is provided with a guided portion to be guided along the guide groove. Of the velocity components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove, at least a component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion), and the displacement member is displaced along the guide groove. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the transmission means The structure of can be simplified.

A game machine B5, wherein any one of the game machines B2 to B3 is provided with an interposition member which is displaceably connected to the base member on one side and displaceably connected to the displacement member on the other side.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B3, one side is displaceably connected to the base member and the other side is displaceably connected to the displacement member. , The driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means, and when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the intermediate member can be caused to act on the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be in a form in which the displacement due to the action of the transmission means and the displacement due to the action of the interposition member are combined. As a result, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect of the displacement can be enhanced.

In the game machine B5, the interposition member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support on one side and the other side.

According to the game machine B6, one side and the other side of the interposition member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the interposition member is on one side. The other side is displaced by an arc-shaped locus with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Therefore, such an arcuate displacement (that is, a displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied to the displacement member from the intermediate member member. As a result, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect of the displacement can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is at least substantially 0 at the first position. A game machine B7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine B7, in any of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means has such that the component of the speed components of the displacement members in the direction toward the contacted member is at least substantially 0 at the first position. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the generation of an impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

In the game machine B7, the transmission means is characterized in that, among the velocity components of the displacement member, a component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to have a negative value at the first position. Game machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the speed component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member has a negative value at the first position. That is, since the displacement member has a component in the direction away from the contacted member at the first position, the displacement member is contacted when the displacement member displaced at the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Can be released from the contacted member, whereby the generation of impact can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

Further, if the value is negative in the first position, even if the displacement member comes into contact with the contacted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions and control, etc. Since the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or a negative value) can be increased, it is possible to easily suppress the generation of impact.

In any of the game machines B2 to B8, a second driving means for driving the contacted member and a second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the contacting member are provided, and the above-mentioned The contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmitting means is a speed component of the contacted member in a state where the driving state of the second driving means is constant. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that at least a component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, so that the effect of bringing the pair of members into contact with each other is produced. The effect of can be enhanced. For example, by displacing the contacted member and the displacement member in a direction close to each other and abutting (coalescing) them at the first position, the pair of members can be integrated to form one character.

In this case, according to the game machine B9, a second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the contacted member is provided, and the second transmitting means is at least one of the velocity components of the contacted member. Since the component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the generation of an impact when the contacted member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the displacement member is suppressed. it can. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the contacted member and the displacement member from repelling each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of the contacted member and the displacement member.

Further, since the decrease of at least the velocity component of the contacted member in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, it is covered until it reaches the vicinity of the first position. Since the speed of displacement of the contact member can be increased, the time required to integrate the contact member with the displacement member to form one character is reduced for both the contact member and the displacement member, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, the second transmission means reduces the velocity component of the contacted member at least in the direction toward the displacement member in the vicinity of the first position in a state where the drive state of the second drive means is constant. Since this can be performed, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving means according to the displacement position of the contacted member. Therefore, the control of the second driving means can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved.

The contacted member, the second driving means, and the second transmitting means in the game machine B9 can be read as the displacement members, the driving means, and the transmitting means in the game machines B2 to B8, and these can be applied. Therefore, the interposition member in the game machine B5 or B6 may be intervened between the base member and the contacted member.

<Concept of the invention using the protruding unit 700 as an example>
A first transmission means and a second transmission that transmit the driving force of the driving means to the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the first member and the second member, respectively. In a gaming machine provided with means, the first transmission means has a first predetermined section in which a first driving force is loaded on the driving means, and the first driving loaded in the first predetermined section. A first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the force is applied to the driving means can be formed, and the second transmitting means has a second predetermined section in which the driving means is loaded with a second driving force. And a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force loaded in the second predetermined section is loaded on the driving means, and the first transmitting means is the first. 1 In the state of forming a predetermined section, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section at least a part of the first predetermined section. Then, the gaming machine C1 characterized in that the first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section.

Here, the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the first transmitting means and the first transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, respectively. A gaming machine provided with a second transmission means is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-53858). According to such a game machine, since the two members (first member and second member) can be displaced by the driving means of 1, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in the configuration in which the member 2 is displaced by the driving means 1, the driving force for driving both is overlapped, so that the load on the driving means becomes large and the durability thereof is lowered. It was. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members (first member and second member) are alternately displaced (one by one), the load of the driving means is reduced, but the state in which both the two members are displaced cannot be formed. The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the first transmission means can form a first predetermined section and a first suppression section in which the load of the drive means can be made smaller than that of the first predetermined section, and the first suppression section can be formed. In a state in which the two transmission means can form a second predetermined section and a second suppression section in which the load of the drive means can be made smaller than the second predetermined section, and the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section. In a state where the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, at least a part of the second predetermined section is the first. 1 The transmission means forms the first suppression section, that is, when one is relatively high load, the other is relatively low load, and when the other is relatively high load, the other is The load can be relatively low. Therefore, since the load of the drive means can be distributed, the load of the drive means can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

Further, it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one by one), and it is possible to form a state in which the first member and the second member are both displaced. Therefore, while reducing the load on the driving means, It is possible to improve the effect of production.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is rubbed against the cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the peripheral surface of the cam member, and the first member or the first member or A cam rubbing member that imparts a displacement to the second member is provided, and in the first restraining section or the second restraining section, the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member is determined by the first predetermined. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member in a section or a second predetermined section.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin portion located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. And a crank rubbing member which has a guide groove in which the pin portion of the crank member slides and which imparts a displacement to the first member or the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member is measured by the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member.

According to the game machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or the interlocking of the crank member and the crank rubbing member. Unit rotation of the cam member and crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (distance from the center of rotation to the outer peripheral surface (rubbing surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank rubbing member (distance to the center of rotation of the crank member). The amount of displacement of the first member or the second member can be changed. In other words, the load of the driving means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving means (for example, the power supplied to the electric motor) is kept constant, the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member can be changed. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is formed in the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member, and the first or second suppression is performed while enhancing the effect. In the section, the load of the driving means can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity, and the first suppression section or the first suppression section or the first. 2. In the restraint section, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member causes a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity. In the first restraint section or the second restraint section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the weight of the first member or the second member is used to obtain the first. The load of the driving means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be made smaller than the load of the driving means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

Further, in this way, by changing the load of the driving means by utilizing the own weight of the first member or the second member, for example, the cam member and the cam rubbing member are interlocked, or the crank member and the crank rubbing member When the load of the driving means is changed as in the case of using interlocking, it is not necessary to change the displacement speed of the first member or the second member, and the displacement speed of the first member or the second member is constant. The load of the drive means can be changed while maintaining the speed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means gives a displacement to the first member by being rubbed against a cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the peripheral surface of the cam member. The second transmission means includes a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin portion located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion, and a crank thereof. The cam member and the cam member are provided with a guide groove in which a pin portion of the member slides and a crank rubbing member that imparts a displacement to the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that the crank member is integrally formed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C4, the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, so that a space for arranging the cam member and the crank member separately is provided. Can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where they are formed separately, it is possible to suppress the displacement deviation of the first member and the second member and improve the accuracy of synchronization of both members.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not transmit the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member, and the first member or the second member. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that a non-transmission section for maintaining the two members in a stopped state can be formed, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not transfer the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. As a transmission, a non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be formed, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section, so that the first member or the second member is in the stopped state. The first member or the second member can be smoothly displaced.

That is, when the displacement of the first member or the second member in the stopped state is started, the load of the driving means becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force, so that the initial speed of the first member or the second member becomes slow. In places where it is difficult to displace smoothly, the driving force of the driving means is not transmitted to the first member or the second member, and a non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in a stopped state is provided. In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled to give momentum, and after the momentum is given (that is, through the non-transmission section), the displacement of the first member or the second member can be started. Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form the non-transmission section at the same time, and the displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through each of the non-transmission sections. A game machine C7 characterized in that.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form a non-transmission section at the same time, and after passing through each of these non-transmission sections, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, it is not necessary to displace either the first member or the second member, and during that time, the driving means can idle with a small load. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be strengthened, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the game machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member is a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity. A game machine C8 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member Is provided with a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, so that when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state and the other is displaced, the driving force required for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be strengthened, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Further, since the other of the first member or the second member can be displaced while one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state, both the first member and the second member are stopped. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect by avoiding being in a state.

In any of the game machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. A crank member having a portion and a guide groove on which a pin portion of the crank member slides are provided, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to impart displacement to the first member or the second member. A section provided with the crank rubbing member and the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as the non-transmission section, and the pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. After passing through the transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion that has reached a predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section. If so, the gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C6 to C8, a section in which the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as a non-transmission section. , The pin part of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin part reaching a predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction to the non-transmission section. When sliding toward the crank member, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive means.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), but the pin of the crank member. In the structure in which the portion reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the center of rotation of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after changing the direction passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member increases, and the driving means The load of is excessive. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 2400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a slide member displaced so as to be slidable on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide member, the slide member can be rotated. The conversion means includes a rotating member arranged in the base member and a conversion means for converting a slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into a rotational motion of the rotating member. The converting means is such that the slide displacement is the rotation of the rotating member. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is possible to form a state that is not converted into motion.

Here, a game machine including a base member, a slide member displaced on the base member so as to be slidable, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide member is known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236802). Further, there is also known a game machine in which a rotating member and a driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member are provided on the slide member. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to rotate a rotating member arranged on the slide member while sliding displacement (linear motion) of the slide member, and it is possible to produce an effect that combines linear motion and rotary motion. Can be done.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the rotating member and the driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member are arranged on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole increases and the slide member is driven. There is a problem that the load of the driving means for (sliding displacement) becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, a rotating member rotatably arranged on the slide member and a conversion means for converting the slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into the rotational motion of the rotating member are provided. The rotating member can be rotated according to the slide displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole is reduced by that amount to drive the slide member (slide displacement). It is possible to suppress the load of the driving means for causing).

In this case, according to the game machine D1, the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. Therefore, only the form in which the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member. Instead, for example, it is possible to form a form in which the slide member is slidably displaced while the rotating member remains non-rotating. As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotary movement) of the slide member and the rotating member can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. D2 is a gaming machine D2 comprising a pinion gear, and a releasing means formed on the base member so as to be able to release the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear.

According to the game machine D2, the conversion means are a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member and a pinion gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. Since the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, the slide displacement can be converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. Further, since the conversion means includes the releasing means for releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. That is, it is possible to form not only a form in which the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also a form in which the slide member is slid and displaced while the rotating member is not rotating. The number of combinations of member motions (linear motion and rotary motion) can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, the releasing means is arranged on the base member, and it is not necessary to dispose the means for releasing the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear on the slide member, so that the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. .. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D2, the releasing means rotates at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear to obtain a mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A game machine D3 characterized by being released.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the releasing means is to rotate at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear to obtain the rack gear. Since the meshing with the pinion gear is released, the space required for such rotation (that is, the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

The game machine D4 is characterized in that at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction. At least the portion where the rack gear is formed is rotated along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and after the mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is rotated in the opposite direction. , When the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed with each other, such meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine D2, the releasing means displaces at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear to release the mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A game machine D5 characterized by.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the releasing means is to displace at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear so that the rack gear and the pinion gear can be separated from each other. Since the meshing is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction after the release, and when the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed with each other, the meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. A gaming machine D6 comprising a pinion gear and a part of the rack gear in which teeth are missing.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and a slide member formed meshably on the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably arranged in the rack gear, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, so that the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, since the rack gear has teeth missing in a part thereof, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member when the pinion gear passes through the tooth-missing portion of the rack gear. .. That is, according to this configuration, the rotating member can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the slide member until the pinion gear reaches the portion of the rack gear where the teeth are missing, while the teeth of the rack gear. By stopping the slide displacement of the slide member when the pinion gear reaches the missing portion, the rotation of the rotating member can be continued by the inertial force.

As described above, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped. The form in which the rotating member is rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of the sliding member and the motion of the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion) can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the game machine D6, the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear are released by missing a part of the teeth of the rack gear, and the means for releasing the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Since it is not necessary to dispose of the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D6, the tooth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear is characterized in that the rigidity is higher than that of the other teeth.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear have higher rigidity than the other teeth, so that the durability is improved. Can be planned. That is, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion collide with the teeth of the pinion gear that have passed through the missing portion of the rack gear, so that where they are easily damaged, the rigidity is increased to improve durability. be able to.

As a means for increasing the rigidity, for example, a form for increasing the tooth width of the tooth is exemplified. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without causing deterioration of the meshing property with the pinion gear.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. The one-way clutch includes a pinion gear and a one-way clutch disposed in a rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, and the one-way clutch changes a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation is cut off. A game machine D8 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and a slide member formed meshably on the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably arranged in the rack gear, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, so that the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, the one-way clutch is formed so that the state of allowing the transmission of rotation and the state of blocking the transmission of rotation can be changed. Therefore, by changing the one-way clutch to the state of blocking the transmission of rotation, the slide displacement rotates. It is possible to form a state that is not converted into the rotational movement of the member. That is, not only the one-way clutch is in a state of allowing the transmission of rotation and the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also, for example, the one-way clutch is in a state of blocking the transmission of rotation of the rotating member. The slide member is slid and displaced while it is not rotating, or the one-way clutch is changed from a state that allows transmission of rotation to a state that shuts off when the displacement of the slide member is stopped. It is possible to form a form in which the rotation of the rotating member is continued by its inertial force while the is stopped.

As described above, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated according to the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also the sliding member is slid while the rotating member is non-rotating. It is possible to form a form in which the rotating member is rotated while the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped, and the number of combinations of the slide member and the motion of the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion) can be determined. Can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine D8, the one-way clutch includes a displacement member displaceable on the slide member and a driving means for driving the displacement member and displaced on the slide member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. D9 is a gaming machine D9 comprising an operator operated to change between a state in which the clutch is allowed and a state in which the clutch is blocked, and the operator is operated by the displaced displacement member.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of the game machine D8, a displacement member displaceable on the slide member and a driving means for driving the displacement member and being arranged on the slide member are provided. , The displacement of the displacement member can be combined in addition to the motion of the slide member and the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion), and the number of combinations thereof can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the operator of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the displacement member can have both the role of performing the effect by the displacement and the role of operating the operator. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the slide member with a means for operating the operator of the one-way clutch, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D8, the one-way clutch includes an operator operated to change a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation transmission is blocked, and the base member is used when the slide member is slidably displaced. The gaming machine D10 includes an engaging portion located on the displacement locus of the operator, and the operator is operated by the engaging portion when the slide member is slidably displaced.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D8, the base member is provided with an engaging portion located on the displacement locus when the slide member is slidably displaced, and is engaged when the slide member is slidably displaced. Since the operator is operated by the joint, it is not necessary to dispose of a means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (that is, operating the operator) on the slide member, so that the weight of the slide member as a whole is increased accordingly. Can be lightened. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

The position of the engaging portion may be any position as long as it is on the displacement locus of the operator described above. For example, it may be one end or the other end on the displacement locus, or may be in the middle of the displacement locus.

The game machine D10 includes a second slide member displaced on the base member so as to be slidable, and a second driving means for applying a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is mutably formed along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member with the slide displacement of the member.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member with the slide displacement of the second slide member. It is possible to change the position where the state of the clutch is switched, that is, the position where the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the allowable state to the regulated state or from the regulated state to the allowable state. As a result, the position where the rotating state of the rotating member is changed when the sliding member is slidably displaced and the position where the rotating member is rotated while the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped are set according to, for example, a gaming state. It can be changed, and as a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the second slide member plays a role of performing the effect by the displacement. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion are also used, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The game machine D10 includes a second slide member displaced on the base member so as to be slidable, and a second driving means for applying a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member. The gaming machine D12 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is mutably formed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated according to the slide displacement of the member.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between the position where the operator can be operated and the position where the operator cannot be operated due to the slide displacement of the second slide member. Since it is formed, it is possible to form a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched when the slide member is slidably displaced, and a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is not switched. That is, a form in which the rotational state of the rotating member is changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end, and a state in which the rotational state of the rotating member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end. It can be formed and its effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the second slide member plays a role of performing the effect by the displacement. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion are also used, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be arranged on the second slide member or may be arranged on the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be displaceably arranged on the base member, and the second sliding member may directly or indirectly displace the engaging portion.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 8400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a shielding state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member, and a shielding / opening means capable of forming an open state for opening the predetermined area, the shielding / opening means is provided. A first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear that is rotatably arranged on the first member, and a second rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed. The first member and the first member are provided with a second member having and displaced linearly in the first member, and a base-side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first-side pinion gear. The shielding state is formed by linearly displacing the two members to one side, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. A game machine E1 characterized in that an open state is formed.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member and a shielding / opening means capable of forming a shielding state for shielding a predetermined region of the base member and an open state for opening a predetermined region is known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058, a plurality of plate-shaped rotating plates are rotatably arranged in a predetermined region, and the predetermined region is shielded by directing the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotating plates to the front. (Forming a shielded state) On the other hand, by rotating each rotating plate 90 degrees and turning the thick portion (side surface) to the front, a gap is provided between each rotating plate and a predetermined area is opened (opening state is formed). ) What is disclosed.

However, according to the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if the open state is formed, each rotating plate in a state of being rotated by 90 degrees and having the plate thickness portion (side surface) facing the front remains in the predetermined region. However, there is a problem that the area to be opened is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotating plate is reduced, there is a limit to the thinning in order to secure the strength during rotation.

On the other hand, one plate-shaped body having the same area as a predetermined region is displaceably arranged, and the plate-shaped body is displaced (arranged) to a predetermined region to shield (shield) the predetermined region. On the other hand, a gaming machine having a configuration in which a predetermined area is opened (a state is formed) by retracting a plate-shaped body from a predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area) is also known. There is. According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, if the plate-shaped body is retracted from the predetermined area, the predetermined area can be completely opened.

However, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space having the same area as the predetermined area is provided as a space for arranging the plate-shaped body retracted from the predetermined area. There was a problem that it became necessary and caused an increase in size. Further, since it is a plate-like body having the same area as a predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract the plate-like body from the predetermined area or to arrange the plate-like body from the retracted position to the predetermined area. There is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

In this case, according to the game machine E1, the shielding opening means includes a first member rotatably arranged on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and a pinion gear thereof. A second member having a second rack gear to which the first pinion gear is meshed and linearly displaceable to the first member, and a base rack gear formed on the base member to which the first pinion gear is meshed. The first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side to form a shielding state, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to one side. By doing so, an open state is formed.

That is, since the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member and the second member retracted from these predetermined regions are arranged accordingly. It is possible to reduce the size by reducing the space for evacuation.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. The time required for retracting the second member from the predetermined region or arranging the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined region can be shortened, and the shielded state and the open state can be quickly switched.

The shielded state in which the predetermined region is shielded does not have to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined region is completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and the region is open to a part of the predetermined region. May exist. Similarly, the open state in which the predetermined area is opened does not have to be the state in which the entire surface of the predetermined area is completely opened, and a part of the predetermined area is covered by a part of the first member or the second member. There may be a shielded area. That is, in the shielded state, the shielded area may be relatively large with respect to the open state, in other words, in the open state, the opened area may be relatively large with respect to the shielded state.

In the game machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion that is supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion that is connected to the main body portion, and the second member is the said. A second main body portion having the second side rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed and being supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second displacement portion connected to the second main body portion. The gaming machine E2 is provided, wherein the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the first main body portion in which the first member is supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the first displacement portion connected to the main body portion are provided. In addition, the second member is connected to a second main body portion which has a second side rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the second main body portion thereof. When the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side because the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside a predetermined region with the second displacement portion. Only the trajectories of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be superimposed on a predetermined region. That is, it is possible to prevent the first main body portion and the second main body portion from passing outside the predetermined region and their trajectories overlapping the predetermined region. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and a part of the first member and the second member does not remain in the predetermined region. The entire surface of a predetermined area can be completely opened.

In the game machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first main body portion of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first rack gear by the drive gear.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the shielding opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first member is a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. Since the first main body is provided with a structure in which the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first rack gear by the drive gear, the structure for linearly displaces the first member is small. Can be changed. That is, among the spaces required outside the predetermined region of the base member, the space other than the space required for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and the second side pinion gear thereof. The gaming machine E4 is characterized by having a third side rack gear to be meshed with the third member and a third member which is disposed linearly displaceable on the second member.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is rotatably arranged on the second member and the second side pinion gear meshed with the base side rack gear. And a third member having a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and a third member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, so that the second member is provided with the linear displacement of the first member. When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side with the displacement of the second member, and the second member is linearly displaced to the other side with the linear displacement of the first member. When the second member is linearly displaced to, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side with the displacement of the second member.

Therefore, due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state. Due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced outside the predetermined area). ), An open state can be formed.

In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined regions is correspondingly the first. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed to reduce the size.

In particular, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (first member, second member and third member) in this way, it is compared with the case where the predetermined area of the same area is shielded by the second member. As a result, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area can be made smaller by superimposing the three-divided ones than by superimposing the two-divided predetermined areas.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member, and the second member is displaced from the second member. Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is further increased, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined region or from the retracted position. The time required for arranging in a predetermined area can be shortened, and the switching between the shielded state and the open state can be performed more quickly.

In the game machine E4, the third member has the third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a third main body portion thereof. The gaming machine E5 characterized by having a third displacement portion connected to the main body portion.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the third member has a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the main body portion and the third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion are provided, when the first member, the second member and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, the first member is first. Only the loci of the displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion can be superimposed on the predetermined region. That is, it is possible to prevent the first main body, the second main body, and the third main body from passing outside the predetermined region and their trajectories overlapping the predetermined region. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and the first member, the second member, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region. Since a part of the member does not remain, the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

The technical idea (relationship of the third member with respect to the second member) in the game machine E4 or E5 may be extended to provide a game machine further including a fourth member, a fifth member, ..., And an nth member.

That is, the shielding opening means has a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear. By expanding the configuration in which the second member is provided with a third member that is linearly displaceable, the shielding opening means is rotatably arranged on the nth member and meshes with the base side rack gear. An nth side pinion gear to be formed and an n + 1 member having an n + 1 side rack gear to which the nth side pinion gear is meshed and arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the nth member may be further provided ( However, n is an integer of 3 or more).

Similarly, the third member is connected to a third main body portion which has a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the third main body portion thereof. Expanding the configuration including the third displacement portion, the n + 1 member has the n + 1 side rack gear to which the nth side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the nth member so as to be linearly displaceable. And an n + 1 displacement portion connected to the n + 1 main body portion thereof (however, n is an integer of 3 or more).

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means has a third member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and the first member and the second member are directed to one side or the other side. It is characterized by including a third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side according to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced. The game machine E6.

According to the game machine E6, the shield opening means is a case where the third member displaced linearly on the second member and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced toward one side or the other side. A third relative displacement utilization means for linearly displaces the third member to one side or the other side according to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the following effect is produced.

That is, by linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, and at the same time, a shielding state can be formed. Due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced outside the predetermined area). ), An open state can be formed.

In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined regions is correspondingly the first. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed to reduce the size.

In this way, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (first member, second member and third member), it is compared with the case where the predetermined area having the same area is shielded by the second member. As a result, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area is smaller when the predetermined area is divided into three parts than when the predetermined area is divided into two parts.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilization means linearly displaces the third member with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the speed of the second member is increased and the third member The linear displacement of is at least faster than that of the first member. The time required to retract the first member, the second member, and the third member from the predetermined area or to arrange the first member, the second member, and the third member from the retracted position to the predetermined area is shortened, and the shielding state and the open state can be switched. It can be done quickly.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevating unit 800 as examples>
In a gaming machine including a first member and a second member that are displaceably formed between a retracted position and an overhanging position, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to reach the overhanging position. The gaming machine F1 is arranged, and the second member is arranged at the overhanging position by being displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement.

Here, a gaming machine including a first member and a second member that are formed so as to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, respectively (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252533) is known. In this type of gaming machine, for example, the first member and the second member retracted to the retracted position are displaced to the overhanging position and brought close to each other or brought into contact with each other, thereby associating (integrating) them with each other. , The effect of making the player visually recognize as one character is performed.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, since the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the overhang position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, they move to the overhang position. There is a risk of mutual interference during displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the displacements of the respective members. Therefore, it takes a long time to form the character, and the displacement is extended. There was a problem that the production effect was hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the first member is arranged in the overhang position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement. Since it is arranged at the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from interfering with each other during the displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, since the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed at the same time, the time until the character is formed can be shortened and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine F1 is characterized in that the second member is arranged at the overhanging position by being displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the second member is displaced in a mode in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, so that the second member is arranged at the overhanging position, so that it has a curved shape. Can form a trajectory of. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position.

The game machine F2 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the second member is rotatably arranged on the linear base member so that the second member is displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. A game machine F3 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, thereby causing rotational displacement and linear displacement. Since the second member is displaced in a combined manner, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position, and the position of the second member at the retracted position is free. The degree can be increased. That is, since the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the overhang position due to the linear displacement of the linear base member, the rotation is not the movement to the overhang position, but the second member. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Further, as a result, the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the overhanging position, so that the degree of freedom of the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be increased.

The game machine F2 or F3 includes a liquid crystal display device arranged in the game area, and a retracted position of the second member is set on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhanging position and vertically long at the retracted position.

Here, in the configuration in which the second member is formed in a horizontally long shape, arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhanging position, and the character is formed together with the first member, a large character cannot be formed, and the effect is sufficiently produced. I can't show it. That is, since the game area is formed vertically, while the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally, one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed, and the space for arranging the members is relatively narrow. It is difficult to secure. Therefore, in order for the second member not to protrude into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

In this case, according to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture in the overhanging position, while being arranged in a vertically long posture in the retracted position. Therefore, the space for arranging the members on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively utilized, and the size of the second member can be increased accordingly. As a result, the character formed together with the first member at the overhanging position. Can be made larger.

The game machine F3 is characterized by including a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Game machine F5.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause a linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized with each other, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the character formed together with the first member at the overhanging position can be made larger. .. For example, even in an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the second member is retracted to such an area. The second member can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, a third member is provided so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the third member is the first member and the second member at the overhanging position. A game machine F6 characterized in that it is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, the first member and the second member are provided because the third member is displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhanging position. At the same time, a larger character can be formed, and the effect of the production can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, since the third member is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the first member and the second member at the overhang position, it does not come into contact with the first member and the second member at the overhang position. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other at the overhanging position, or when there is a possibility of contact with each other, it is necessary to set the displacement speed in consideration of the damage due to the impact at the time of contact. , Since it is not in contact with the first member and the second member, its displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later third member is displaced so as to catch up with the first and second members of the starting lineup at the overhanging position, and the effect of forming the character can be enhanced. ..

The game machine F6 is characterized in that the third member includes an overhanging portion formed so as to project to a side having the same position in the front-rear direction as the first member and the second member.

Here, if the positions of the first member, the second member, and the third member in the front-rear direction are different, the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction becomes larger and larger by that amount. If the front-rear direction dimensions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are made smaller (thinner) in order to suppress the front-rear direction dimension, it becomes difficult to secure the rigidity.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F7, the third member includes an overhanging portion formed so as to project to the side having the same front-rear direction as the first member and the second member, and thus the whole (first member). And the front-rear direction dimension as the total of the second member and the third member) is suppressed to reduce the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear direction dimension of the third member is increased to ensure its rigidity. can do.

The game machine F8 is characterized in that any one of the game machines F1 to F7 includes a contacted member which is arranged on the first member and a part of the second member is in contact with the first member at an overhanging position.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F7, the first member includes a contacted member with which a part of the second member is abutted at the overhanging position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by the contact with the contact member.

The contacted member may be formed at a position where the second member is constantly in contact with the first member and the second member when they are arranged at the overhanging position, or the first member and the contacted member may be formed. When the second member is arranged at the overhanging position, it may be formed at a position where the second member comes into contact when both are closer than the reference position due to control variation or dimensional variation.

In the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is in a state where the contacted member is separated from the first member. A game machine F9 characterized in that it is placed in an overhanging position.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the contacted member is the first member of the first member. Since it is arranged at the overhanging position in a state of being separated from the member, it is possible to ensure reliable contact with the second member at the overhanging position. Further, at the overhanging position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by the amount that the contacted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member.

In the game machine F9, the game machine F10 is characterized in that after the first member is arranged at an overhanging position, the contacted member is displaced in a direction close to the first member.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F9, after the first member is arranged at the overhanging position, the contacted member is displaced in a direction close to the first member, so that the second member A space can be formed for the member to be displaced. That is, when the first member is arranged at the overhanging position, the contacted member is kept away from the first member to exert the role of receiving the displacement of the second member, and then to the first member. The contacted member can be displaced in the approaching direction, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space of the second member, and the effect can be enhanced by the displacement of the second member.

In the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is at least in the retracted position, and the contacted member is the first member. A game machine F11 characterized in that it is in a state of being in close proximity to.

According to the game machine F11, in addition to the effect of the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is hit at least in the retracted position. Since the contact member is in a state of being close to the first member, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of the first member at the retracted position. Further, when the contacted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member at the overhanging position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by that amount.

In the game machine F11, the game machine F12 is characterized in that the contacted member is maintained in a state of being close to the first member until the first member is arranged at an overhanging position. ..

According to the game machine F12, in addition to the effect of the game machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the contacted member is close to the first member until it is arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contacted member from interfering with the second member during the displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the effect of the effect.

In any of the game machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and when the second member is brought into contact with the contacted member in one set, the contact is made. Along with this, the gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set.

According to the game machine F13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and in one set, the second member hits the contacted member. When they are brought into contact with each other, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set. Therefore, for example, in one set, the second member is in the reference position. When the contacted member is displaced beyond the above and is brought into contact with the contacted member, the contacted member can be displaced toward the second member in the other set in accordance with the contact. Therefore, when the contacted member is brought into contact with the second member in the other set, the impact of the contact of the second member with the contacted member in the other set may be received only by the first member. It can also be received by the second member in the other set. As a result, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the second member in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

In addition, as a structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member due to the contact in one set, for example, the displacement of the contacted member in one set is the displacement in the other set. A structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member by being transmitted to the contact member, and the displacement of the contacted member in one set is transmitted to the first member, and the displacement thereof is transmitted to the first member. A structure in which the first member is displaced along with the transmission so that the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member together with the first member, or a structure in which these are combined. Is exemplified.

A game characterized in that any of the game machines F1 to F13 is provided with a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member at an overhanging position and is formed so as to be periodically displaced. Machine F14.

According to the game machine F14, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F13, the periodic displacement member includes a periodic displacement member formed so as to be in contact with the first member and the second member at the overhanging position. Since periodic displacement is possible, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member. That is, the character formed by the first member, the second member, and the periodic displacement member can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. Further, in this case, the structure is such that the periodic displacement members are shared by bringing them into contact with each other, and it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for periodically displaces the first member and the second member, respectively. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The first member and the second member may be in contact with each other at the overhanging position, or may be separated from each other (non-contact).

In the game machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position where the position in the front-rear direction at the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member.

According to the game machine F15, in addition to the effect of the game machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position where the position in the front-rear direction at the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member. A member (periodic displacement member) arranged on the side closer to the person can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the character is vibrated by the member on the front side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to produce an effect that makes it easy to convey the force of the vibration to the player.

In the game machine F14 or F15, the game machine F16 is characterized in that the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position.

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effect of the game machine F14 or F15, the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position, so that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is determined. It can be easily transmitted to the first member and the second member. Further, the first member and the second member are not related to each other, and they can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different modes. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (number of parts and shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, they are vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the portion formed by the first member and the portion formed by the second member of one character can be vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 700, and the lower united unit 800 as examples>
A first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position, and a second group consisting of a plurality of displaceable means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position. When each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhanging position, the first effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the first group, and the first effect mode is formed. When each displacement means is arranged at an overhang position, in a gaming machine in which a second effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the second group, the displacement means of one of the first group and the displacement means are described. The gaming machine G1 is provided with a means for both displacement and one of the second groups.

Here, from the first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position, and from the plurality of displaceable means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position. A gaming machine including the second group of the above is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).

According to this game machine, when each displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhang position, each displacement means of the first group is associated (integrated) with one character (first). While making the player recognize it as an effect mode), when each displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhang position, each displacement means of the second group is associated (integrated) with another character. As a (second effect mode), an effect of making the player recognize is performed. That is, in the first gaming state, each of the displacement means of the second group is retracted to the retracted position, while each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at the overhanging position, so that each of the first groups The first character is formed in the game area by the displacement means, and in the second gaming state, each displacement means of the first group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the second group is moved to the overhang position. By arranging them, the effect of forming a second character in the game area by each displacement means of the second group is performed.

In this case, it is effective that a larger character can be formed in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each displacement means of the first group and each displacement means of the second group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (directing modes) are formed, the total number of displacement means required for forming the plurality of characters increases accordingly, and each displacement means is evacuated. Since the area (space) for keeping the displacement is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (directing mode).

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, since it is provided with a means for both the displacement means of one of the first group and the displacement means of one of the second group, a plurality of means (third). The total number of displacement means required to form the effect modes 1 and 2) can be reduced, and each displacement means can be increased in size. As a result, each effect mode (character) can be enlarged.

In the game machine G1, the combined means has a different position between the overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and the overhang position arranged when forming the second effect mode. A game machine G2 characterized by being said to be.

Here, if the combined means are arranged at the same overhang position in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) common to the production mode is used, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the combined means arranged at the same position (overhanging position), the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the combined means forms the overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Since the overhanging position is different from the overhanging position, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the combined means is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Can be suppressed from being inhibited. Further, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the combined means can be arranged at different positions (overhanging positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode can be used. Differences (shape and arrangement position) can be easily formed.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the combined means is characterized in that the posture when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode are different. Game machine G3.

Here, if the combined means have the same posture in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, it is common to the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) of the above is used, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the combined means of the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are reduced. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the production mode of.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the combined means has a posture when forming the first effect mode and a posture when forming the second effect mode. Since the posture is different from that of the above, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the combined means is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest. .. In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased by allowing the combined means to have different postures between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the difference between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (shape and arrangement). It is possible to easily form the installation position).

In the game machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged at an overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means are moved back and forth with respect to at least one displacement means in the first group. The gaming machine G4 characterized in that the directional positions are different and at least a part of them overlap in a front view.

Here, the combined means has different overhang positions or (and) different postures depending on whether the first effect mode is formed or the second effect is formed, and forms a plurality of stopped states. Since it is necessary, the control or structure becomes complicated, and the stopped state (arrangement position or (and) posture) tends to vary accordingly. In this case, in the structure in which the combined means abuts on one displacement means at the overhanging position (at least a part of the combined means coincides in the front-rear direction), the arrangement position and posture of the combined means must reach the target position. While a gap is formed between the displacement means and the displacement means, when the arrangement position or posture of the dual-purpose means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a misalignment. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the first group Since the position in the front-rear direction is different from that of at least one of the displacement means and at least a part of the displacement means overlaps in the front view, even if the stopped state (extending position or (and) posture) varies. It is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the displacement means and the dual-purpose means. That is, even if the displacement of the dual-purpose means is insufficient due to the partial overlap in the front view, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the dual-purpose means and the single displacement means, and the positions in the front-rear direction are different. Even if the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to prevent one of the displacement means from being pushed out and causing a misalignment. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the combined means.

In the game machine G4, the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other when they are arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode. A game machine G5 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine G5, in the game machine G4, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, Since they are in contact with each other, one of the displacement means and the other displacement means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In this case, as described above, the combined means tends to vary in the stopped state (overhanging position or (and) posture), and the combined means is used at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode. , In a structure that is in contact with one displacement means (at least a part of the positions match in the front-rear direction), if the arrangement position and posture of the dual-purpose means do not reach the target position, there is a gap between the two displacement means. Is formed and the association (unification) is hindered. Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the combined means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a misalignment, so that the association (integration) is hindered. That is, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are in contact with each other at the overhanging position, the configuration of the game machine G4 (the position in the front-rear direction is different and the front view is different). (Partially overlaps) is particularly effective.

In the game machine G5, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means is located on the front side in the front-rear direction with respect to the one displacement means and the other displacement means. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that one of the displacement means and the other displacement means overlap each other in a front view with respect to a portion in contact with each other.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means is more than the one displacement means and the other displacement means. Since it is located on the front side in the front-rear direction and the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap each other in a front view, for example, one displacement means or (and) another displacement means. When a deviation occurs in the target position of the above and a gap is formed between the two displacement means, the gap can be shielded by the combined means to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the relationship between one displacement means and the other displacement means is hindered, and it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between both displacement means and the combined means.

In any of the game machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the combined means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, whereby rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. An overhanging position of the combined means that is displaced in the embodiment and arranged when forming the first effect aspect, and an overhanging position of the combined means that is arranged when forming the second effect aspect. Are in different positions, and the posture of the combined means when forming the first effect mode and the posture of the combined means when forming the second effect mode are different. A game machine G7 characterized by.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of the game machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the combined means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member so that the linear displacement and the linearity are linear. Since the displacement is combined with the displacement, the degree of freedom of the overhanging position and the posture when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be increased.

In the game machine G7, the game machine G8 is characterized in that the position in the front-rear direction of the displacement means of one of the first groups is set between the linear base member and the combined means.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, the position in the front-rear direction of the displacement means of one of the first groups is set between the linear base member and the dual-purpose means. The means can be positioned closer to the front side so that the player can easily see them, and the position in the front-rear direction of one displacement means and the combined means can be made closer to each other. Therefore, it is possible to easily associate (integrate) one displacement means and the combined means so that the player can recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In the game machine G8, in a state where the displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged in the retracted position, the one displacement means is arranged in a position where the linear base member and the linear base member overlap in front view. A game machine G9 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect of the game machine G8, in a state where one of the displacement means and the dual-purpose means in the first group is arranged at the retracted position, one displacement means and the linear base member Since they are arranged at overlapping positions in the front view, when one displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position in order to form the first effect mode, one displacement means is linear. It is possible to suppress contact with the side surface of the base member.

In the game machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacement means are arranged at a position where they do not overlap the linear base member in front view. Then, while the other displacement means and the combined means are being displaced toward the overhanging position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position where the other displacement means overlaps the linear base member in a front view, and the linear base member is The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that at least the region where the other displacement means overlaps in the front view is smaller in the front-rear direction than the region where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effect of the game machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged in the retracted position, the other displacement means are in front of the linear base member. The other displacement means are arranged at positions that do not overlap in view, and while the other displacement means and the combined means are being displaced toward the overhanging position, the other displacement means are arranged at a position where they overlap the linear base member in front view, and the linear base member. In order to form the first effect mode, at least the region where the other displacement means overlap in the front view is smaller in the front-rear direction than the region where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view. And when the straight base member (combined means) is displaced to the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the straight base member.

The game machine G10 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the combined means. The gaming machine G11 is characterized in that the one displacement means of the linear base member is arranged in a region where the displacement means overlaps in a front view at a retracted position.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effect of the game machine G10, a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause a linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into the rotation of the combined means. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the dual-purpose means can be synchronized with each other, the relative position accuracy (posture) of the dual-purpose means with respect to the linear base member can be improved. Therefore, the displacement means and the dual-purpose means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the combined means, the combined means can be formed in a large size, and the character formed at the overhanging position can be made larger. For example, even in an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the combined means material is retracted to such an area. While setting the position, the combined means can be formed in a large size.

In this case, since the displacement means of one of the linear base members is arranged in the area where the displacement means of the linear base member overlaps in the front view in the retracted position, the other area of the linear base member (the conversion mechanism is not arranged). The anteroposterior dimension of the area) can be reduced. Therefore, when the other displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, and G1 to G11, the game machine K1 is a slot machine. .. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, and G1 to G11, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. K2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, and G1 to G11, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine K3, which is characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
400 slide units (part of the first county, part of the second county)
410, 2410, 3410, 6410, 7410, 8410 Base member 6411 Protrusion (engagement part)
412 Base side rack gear (rack gear)
413, 4413 Left rotation transmission rack gears 4413a, 4414a Notch (missing part)
4413b, 4414b Small teeth (teeth adjacent to the missing part)
414, 4414 Right rotation transmission rack gear 420 Sliding rod member (guide member)
430, 2430, 5430, 6430, 7430, 8430, 9430 Left slide member (displacement member, slide member)
431, 8431 1st member (1st main body)
431a 1st side rack gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
8431b base member (first displacement part)
432 1st side pinion gear (pinion gear)
432a 2nd side rack gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
433, 8433, 9433 Second member (second main body)
433a 2nd side rack gear (rack gear)
8433d 2nd side pinion gear 434 base member (straight base member)
8434, 9434 Base member (second displacement part)
435 Rotating member (combined means)
435, 454, 5435, 5455 Rotating member (second member)
437a, 457a, 2437a, 2457a Transmission gear (pinion gear)
5439 One-way clutch 5439a Switching plate (operator)
9444 wire (relative displacement utilization means)
8445 Third member (third main body)
8445a 3rd side rack gear 8446, 9446 Base member (3rd displacement part)
450, 2450, 5450, 6450, 7430 Right slide member (contact member, slide member)
454 base member (straight base member)
455 Rotating member (second member)
471 Left drive gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
472 Right drive gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
476 Right drive motor (contact member drive means)
475 Left drive motor (drive means)
476 Right drive motor (drive means)
500 upper coalescing unit (part of the second county)
530 Upper displacement member (contact member)
600 lower coalescing unit (part of the second group)
610 Base member 630 Drive arm (connecting member)
631 Shaft support hole (rotation base)
633 Connection hole (connection tip)
640 Lower displacement member (displacement member)
700 protruding units (part of the first county)
7460 Second slide member 7465 Roller (engagement part)
7466 motor (second driving means)
650 connecting arm (intermediate member)
672 Drive motor (drive means)
720 Lifting base (part of the first member)
730 rotating member (part of the first member)
732 Swing member (first member or second member, non-contact member)
733 Intermediary member (cam rubbing member)
733c Sliding wall (part of the first transmission means or part of the second transmission means)
735 projecting member (second member or first member, crank rubbing member)
735b Sliding hole (part of the second transmission means or part of the first transmission means, guide groove)
735b1 Curved part (non-transmission section)
761 Drive body (cam member, crank member)
761b Cam section (part of the first transmission means or part of the second transmission means)
761c Sliding pin (part of the second transmission means or part of the first transmission means, pin part)
763 Drive motor (drive means)
800 elevating unit (part of the second county)
820 Lifting member (third member, periodic displacement member)
871 Second slide member (overhanging part)
Vv Upward velocity component (component in the direction toward the contacted member)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine including a base member and a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable is known (Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-57166

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that the displacement member may be damaged when it comes into contact with another member .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing damage .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a base member, a displacement member disposed linearly displaceable on the base member, and a contact member formed so as to be in contact with the displacement member. The displacement member includes a first member rotatably arranged on the base member, a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and teeth of the pinion gear. The base member includes a rack gear that has a rack gear to be fitted and is disposed linearly displaceable on the first member, and the base member includes a rack gear to which the pinion gear is meshed, and the first member of the displacement member. 1 member Ru abuts on the abutting member.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, damage can be suppressed .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the slide unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. It is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member. It is a front view of the slide unit. It is a front view of the slide unit. (A) is a front view of the upper united unit, and (b) is a rear view of the upper united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit. It is a front view of the upper united unit. It is a rear view of the upper united unit. It is a front view of the lower united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit. It is a front view of the lower united unit. It is a front schematic diagram of the drive arm in the retract rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position and the extension rotation position. It is a partially enlarged front schematic view of the drive arm when it is rotated from a retract rotation position to an extension rotation position. It is a front view of the upper united unit and the lower united unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a protruding unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the protrusion unit. It is a front view of a base member and an elevating base. It is an exploded front perspective view of an elevating base and a rotating member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an elevating base and a rotating member. It is a front view of the elevating base and the rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating member. It is a front view of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the drive body arranged in the first rotation position, and (b) is a front view of the drive body in the state of being arranged in the second rotation position. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. It is a front schematic diagram of a rotating member. (A) is a front view of the elevating unit, (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit, and (c) is a side view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 1st state. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 2nd state. It is a front view of the elevating unit in the 3rd state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the first state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the second state. It is a rear view of the elevating unit in the third state. (A) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the first state, and (b) is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the second state, (c). ) Is a front view of the transmission member, the slide member, and the link member in the third state. It is a front view of the operation unit in the united state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit in the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 53. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. (A) and (b) are front views of each rotating member of the slide unit and the elevating base and the rotating member of the projecting unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit. (A) and (b) are front views of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIa of FIG. 65 (a), and (b) is the slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIb of FIG. 65 (b). , The upper united unit and the lower united unit are schematic views. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit, the upper united unit and the lower united unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa of FIG. 66 (a), and (b) is the slide unit in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb of FIG. 66 (b). , The upper united unit and the lower united unit are schematic views. It is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear, and (b) is a side view of the transmission gear. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in a state where the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are meshed with each other, and (b) is a state in which the rotation transmission member and the transmission gear are disengaged. It is a schematic view of the slide unit viewed from the front. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa of FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 72 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit taken along the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 72 (b). It is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the front view of the slide unit in a state where the counterclockwise transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the main body base member are meshed with each other, and (b) is a schematic view in which the accommodating member is displaced and under the main body base member. It is a schematic view which looked at the front view of the slide unit in the state which the meshing of the side 1st rack gear and a transmission gear was released. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa of FIG. 75 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 75 (b). It is a front view of the base member in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic view of the front view of the slide unit in the state where the left rotation transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the base member are meshed with each other, and (b) is the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear and the transmission gear of the base member is released. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the front view of the slide unit in the state. It is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member in 5th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the left slide member in a state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a front view of the left slide member in the state after the switching plate is operated. It is a schematic diagram. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member in 6th Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member. (A) is a schematic view of the slide unit in the state before the switching plate is operated, and (b) is a schematic view of the slide unit in the state after the switching plate is operated in the front view. is there. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa of FIG. 84 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the line LXXXVb-LXXXVb of FIG. 84 (a). FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit according to the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. It is a front view of the slide unit in 8th Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a slide unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a slide unit. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide unit from the front. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVa-XCIVa line of FIG. 93 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 93 (b). (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 93 (c). FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit according to the ninth embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member. It is a front view of the slide unit. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa of FIG. 97 (a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit on the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 97 (b). (C) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of FIG. 97 (c). (A) is a front view of the elevating unit according to the tenth embodiment, (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit, and (c) is a side view of the elevating unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit. It is an operating unit in the combined state. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit on the line CIIa-CIIa of FIG. 101, and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit on the line CIIb-CIIb of FIG. 101. (A) is a front view of the drive body in the state where the drive body is arranged in the first rotation position in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a state in which the drive body is arranged in the second rotation position. It is a front view of a drive body. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 42, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. It is provided with an inner frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 4, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 4 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to perform a ball game. The inner frame 4 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front door. The lower plate unit 15 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 4 and the lock of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 via the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 5c. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

Below the window portion 5c, a ball lending operation portion 40 is arranged. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled to form an inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood to which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof cannot be seen by the player. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged in the through hole of the game board 13. It is fixed from the front side with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 wins a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the second winning opening 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than the normal time. The time is set. When the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the second winning opening 140 is reached as compared with the case where the first electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made so that the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened is increased from the normal time. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened at the time when it is opened and the first electric accessory 140a is hit once. At least one of the number of times the 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the first electric accessory 140a and the second electric accessory 82 are opened at one time. It may be changed so that only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased as compared with the normal one, without the number of times of doing.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is the third. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that displays variable symbols, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of the first through gate 66. A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of the above is provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol string is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol string, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately alternates the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the first electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening may be made during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to win the 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board can pass through the balls flowing down the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first through gate 66 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 (not shown) is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 140 may be configured as five.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is displayed. The open state (enlarged state) is set, and the ball can easily win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" The symbol “” is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the first electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time saving, by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the first through gate 66. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to open the first electric accessory 140a and aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example. It may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, 82 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. To. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 1, such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441,475,476.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 98. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 200. 7 to 9 are front views of the operating unit 200.

In FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are retracted to the maximum in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member 730, and the elevating member 820 are moved to the retracted positions, respectively. In the displaced state, from the state shown in FIG. 7, the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced toward the right slide member 450, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced to the overhanging positions. In FIG. 9, the state in which the rotating member 730 and the elevating member 820 are displaced to the overhanging positions from the state shown in FIG. 7 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, a slide unit 400, an upper uniting unit 500, a lower uniting unit 600, The projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are rotatably housed.

The back case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 having a substantially rectangular front view, and an outer wall portion 302 erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front, and the wall portions 301 and 302 respectively. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A front-view rectangular opening 301a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 can be visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

The slide unit 400 is arranged with a horizontally long base member 410 having a rectangular shape in the front view, which is arranged in the upper portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and the upper end portion of the base member 410 is slidably displaceable. The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are provided, and each slide member 430 is independently placed in the left-right direction (base member) on the front side of the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300. It is formed so that the effect of sliding displacement in the longitudinal direction of 410) can be executed.

In this case, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be in contact with each other. However, in the present embodiment, when the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are in contact with each other, they are damaged. A restraining structure is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

A rectangular horizontally long guide member 419 in front view is arranged in a posture parallel to the base member 410 in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are arranged. When is slid and displaced in the left-right direction, the lower ends of the slide members 430 and 450 are guided by sliding between the guide member 419 and the bottom wall portion 301 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lower end sides of the slide members 430 and 450 from rattling in the front-rear direction.

The upper uniting unit 500 includes a rectangular horizontally long base member 510 in front view arranged in front of the base member 410 in the slide unit 400, and an upper displacement member 530 displaceably arranged in the base member 510. On the other hand, the lower uniting unit 600 includes a front view substantially L-shaped base member 610 and a lower base member 610 arranged on the left side portion and the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300. The lower displacement member 640 is provided so as to be displaceable.

The upper displacement member 530 is formed so as to be displaceable between a retracted position retracted to the back surface side of the base member 510 and an overhanging position projecting to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the lower displacement member 640. Is displaceably formed between the retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 610 and the overhanging position protruding toward the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300, and the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are formed. When overhanging to the overhanging position, the side surfaces (upper contact portion 533 and lower contact portion 643) of both displacement members 530 and 640 are brought into contact with each other (combined).

In this case, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 displaced in the directions close to each other come into contact with each other, an impact may be generated and the posture may become unstable such as being bounced off each other. In the present embodiment, a structure that suppresses the impact at the time of such contact is adopted. Details of such a structure will be described later.

The projecting unit 700 has a horizontally long rectangular base member 710 in front view arranged in the lower portion of the opening 301a in the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, and an evacuation unit 700 arranged so as to be able to move up and down in the base member 710. A base 720 and a rotating member 730 rotatably arranged on the elevating base 720 are provided, and the elevating base 720, together with the rotating member 730, has a retracted position and a rear case 300 retracted to the front side of the base member 710. It is formed so that it can be displaced (elevated) from the overhanging position overhanging the opening 301a toward the front side.

Further, the projecting unit 700 includes a projecting member 735 that is displaced (slide displacement) in the rotating member 730, a swinging member 732 that is swingably arranged in the rotating member 730, and the projecting member 735. It includes a drive motor 763 (see FIG. 37) that drives the swing member 732.

The protrusion unit 700 drives the protrusion member 735 and the swing member 732 by the drive motor 763 of 1. Therefore, the driving force required to drive the projecting member 735 and the driving force required to drive the swing member 732 overlap, which may increase the load and reduce the durability of the drive motor 763. In the embodiment, a structure that suppresses the load of the drive motor 763 is adopted. Such a structure will be described later.

The elevating unit 800 includes a rectangular horizontally long base member 810 in front view arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper united unit 500, and an elevating member 820 arranged so as to be able to elevate on the base member 810. The elevating member 820 is formed so as to be displaceable (elevated) between a retracted position retracted to the front side of the base member 810 and an overhanging position projecting to the front side of the opening 301a of the rear case 300.

Next, the detailed configuration of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. First, a structure in which the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12.

FIG. 10 is a front view of the slide unit 400. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 400, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 400. It should be noted that FIGS. 10 to 12 show a state in which the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position (the position farthest from the right slide member 450).

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the slide unit 400 includes a base member 410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 410. The member 420, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420. It is mainly provided with a drive mechanism for making the vehicle run.

The base member 410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, in the base member 410, a plate-shaped projecting plate portion 411 is horizontally projected from the lower portion of the sliding rod member 420 toward the front side, and the upper surface of the projecting plate portion 411 (facing the sliding rod member 420). The base side rack gear 412 is engraved on the side), and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are engraved on the lower surface of the protruding plate portion 411.

The sliding rod member 420 is a metal rod-shaped body having a circular cross section for guiding the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, and is inserted into the sliding holes of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. By doing so, both slide members 430 and 450 are held slidably. Both ends of the sliding rod member 420 are fixed to the base member 410 by a pair of holding members 415.

The base side rack gear 412, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are rack gears extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420 (that is, the sliding direction of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450). The first side pinion gear 432 of the left slide member 430 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412, and the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450. The transmission gears 437a and 457a (see FIGS. 13 to 16) are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 430 is a second member in which a first member 431 having a rectangular shape in a front view, a first side pinion gear 432 rotatably arranged on the first member 431, and the first side pinion gear 432 are meshed with each other. A front-view rectangular horizontally long second member 433 having a side rack gear 433a, a front-view rectangular vertically long base member 434 hanging downward from the tip side of the second member 433, and a rotatable base member 434 on the front side of the base member 434. 435, a displacement member 436 that is possibly arranged on the back side of the rotating member 435, and a transmission that transmits the motion (slide displacement) of the base member 434 to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435. The gears 437a to 437f are mainly provided.

The first member 431 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. , Sliding (sliding displacement) is possible along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 431 is slidably displaced on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A first side rack gear 431a is engraved on the upper surface of the first member 431. The first side rack gear 431a is a rack gear to which the left drive gear 471 described later is meshed with, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the first member 431. Therefore, as will be described later, when the left drive gear 471 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the first side rack gear 431a, and the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420. To.

As described above, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotatably arranged (shafted) on the first member 431, and the arranged portion of the first side pinion gear 432 (front side of the first member 431). A front-view rectangular plate-shaped cover 431b is disposed of the vehicle. That is, the first side pinion gear 432 is arranged in a state of being covered on the back side of the cover 431b.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410. Therefore, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420, that is, is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, the first member 431 is acted on by the base side rack gear 412 along with the slide displacement. Then, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated.

The second member 433 is displaceably arranged (connected) to the first member 431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole on the tip side, so that the second member 433 is relative to the first member 431. It is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the sliding rod member 420 while being displaced. The sliding hole has an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section and extends along the longitudinal direction of the second member 433.

In this case, the second member 433 is engraved with the second side rack gear 433a on the lower surface thereof, and the second side rack gear 433a is meshed with the first side pinion gear 432. Therefore, as described above, when the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated with the slide displacement of the first member 431, it is affected by the first side pinion gear 432 (that is, the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is affected. The second member 433 is displaced relative to the first member 431 by being converted into a linear motion by the second rack gear 433a and then transmitted to the second member 433).

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the second member 433 is referred to. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state of being faster than the first member 431. Can be done.

The left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are slidably arranged on the sliding rod member 420, and the movable ranges of both slide members 430 and 450 are set to overlap. Therefore, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can come into contact with each other. In this case, in the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so that the first member 431 and the rack member 451 are in contact with each other and the second member 433 is not in contact with the rack member 451. To.

The right slide member 450 is rotatable toward the front side of the front view rectangular horizontally long rack member 451 and the front view rectangular vertically long base member 454 hanging downward from the base end side of the rack member 451 and the base member 454. To transmit the motion (slide displacement) of the rotating member 455 to the rotating member 455, the displacement member 456 displaced on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and the base member 410 of the base member 454 to the rotating member 455. The transmission gears 457a to 457f of the above are mainly provided.

The rack member 451 is provided with a sliding hole extending along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451 and having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section on the proximal end side, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. As a result, it is possible to slide (slide displacement) along the axial direction (longitudinal direction) of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the rack member 451 is slidably displaced on the base member 410 via the sliding rod member 420.

A rack gear 451a is engraved on the upper surface of the rack member 451 along the longitudinal direction of the rack member 451. A right drive gear 472, which will be described later, is meshed with the rack gear 451a. Therefore, as will be described later, when the right drive gear 472 is rotationally driven, the rotational motion is converted into a linear motion by the rack gear 451a, and the rack member 451 is slidably displaced along the sliding rod member 420.

The drive mechanism includes a left drive gear 471 and a right drive gear 472 rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410, and a left pinion gear 473 and a right pinion gear 474 meshed with the drive gears 471 and 472, respectively. A left drive motor 475 and a right drive motor 476 to which a drive shaft is connected to each of the pinion gears 473 and 474 are mainly provided.

The left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 are meshed with the first side rack gear 431a of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the rack gear 451a of the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), respectively. Therefore, the left drive motor 475 and the right drive motor 476 rotationally drive the left drive gear 471 and the right drive gear 472 via the left pinion gear 473 and the right pinion gear 474, thereby passing through the first side rack gear 431a and the rack gear 451a. Therefore, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) and the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) can be slid and displaced independently of each other.

A cover member 416 is arranged on the front surface of the base member 410, and the drive gears 471 and 472 and the pinion gears 473 and 474 are rotatably held between the facing surfaces of the base member 410 and the cover member 416. .. Further, the drive motors 475 and 476 are fastened and fixed to the front side of the cover member 416. In this case, the cover member 416 is provided with an insertion hole, and the drive shafts of the drive motors 475 and 476 are connected to the pinion gears 473 and 474 through the insertion hole.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16, a structure for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455 with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 will be described.

FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 430, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 430.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the base member 434 is a back side base member 434a connected to the second member 433 and a front side arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 434a. A base member 434b is provided, and transmission gears 437a to 437f are rotatably held (shaft support) between facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side base member 434a and the front side base member 434b. A shaft support hole 434b1 having a circular front view is bored in the front side base member 434b.

As described above, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 434 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 435, and by connecting (toothing) each other in series. , 1 gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 437a at the head and the transmission gear 437f at the tail.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 437a is meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotary shaft 435a of the rotary member 435 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 437f.

Therefore, by sliding-displace the left slide member 430 (base member 434) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 437a is rotated by the action of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 410, and the rotation is rotated. It is transmitted to the tail transmission gear 437f via the transmission gears 437b to 437e, and the rotation of the tail transmission gear 437f can rotate the rotating member 435.

The rotating member 435 includes a rotating shaft 435a and a supporting shaft 435b that project coaxially from the back surface. The rotation shaft 435a is a portion that serves as a rotation axis when the rotation member 435 rotates with respect to the base member 434, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b. In this case, the transmission gear 437f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to each other. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 437f, the rotating member 435 is rotated with respect to the base member 434.

The support shaft 435b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 436 on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 436a of the displacement member 436. By fitting the E-ring into the fitting groove recessed in the tip of the support shaft 435b, the displacement member 436 from the support shaft 435b is prevented from coming off.

The displacement member 436 is a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 435, and includes a shaft support hole 436a, an escape hole 436b, and a curved rack gear 436c. As described above, the support shaft 435b of the rotating member 435 is inserted into the shaft support hole 436a, whereby the displacement member 436 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 435.

The escape hole 436b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing the annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 436a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width is formed by the rotating member 435. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, when the displacement member 436 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 436a) with respect to the rotating member 435, the rotating shaft 435a can be displaced along the relief hole 436b and is displaced from the rotating member 435. Interference with the member 436 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 436c is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 436a. Here, a drive motor 441 is arranged on the back surface of the rotating member 435, and a pinion gear 442 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 441, and the pinion gear 442 is meshed with the curved rack gear 436c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 442 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 441, the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 435 with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the rotation center. Can be made to.

In this case, the rotating member 435 is formed in a substantially elongated shape in which the front view shape has a larger dimension in the length direction than the dimension in the width direction, and is a position that is substantially the center in the length direction and the width direction. The rotation shaft 435a is arranged on the. The front view shape of the displacement member 436 is formed by dividing the rotating member 435 into substantially two at the center in the length direction. Therefore, by rotating the displacement member 436 in one direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation, the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435, making it difficult for the player to see. Can be done.

Further, since the drive motor 441 is arranged on the rotating member 435 on the side opposite to the displacement member 436 with the support shaft 435b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are arranged on the rotating member 435. The position of the center of gravity can be brought close to the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

In the present embodiment, in the state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in one direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation (the state where the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435), the rotating member The position of the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 436 and the drive motor 441 are arranged on the 435 is substantially aligned with the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435. Therefore, the rotation of the structure with respect to the base member 434 can be stabilized.

On the other hand, in a state where the displacement member 436 is rotated in the other direction with the shaft support hole 436a (support shaft 435b) as the center of rotation (a state in which the displacement member 436 is visibly overhanging to the side of the rotating member 435). The position of the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure can be separated from the rotation shaft 435a of the rotation member 435 by the amount of the overhang of the displacement member 436. As a result, the position of the center of gravity can be adjusted according to the rotation direction of the rotating member 435, and the initial operation can be smoothly performed.

That is, when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is started from the stopped state, the driving force becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force. In this case, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in a state where the displacement member 436 projects laterally to the rotating member 435 moves downward in the direction of gravity at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435). When it is located on the side to be displaced, the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 (rotated in one direction), so that the above-mentioned rotating action due to the weight of the structure causes the displacement member 436. It can assist the rotation. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in the state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity at the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435). When the displacement member 436 is hidden behind the rotating member 435 (rotated in the other direction), the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is brought close to (matches) with the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) from increasing. As a result, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure in a state where the displacement member 436 is projected to the side of the rotating member 435 is displaced upward in the direction of gravity when the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 435) is stopped. When it is located on the side of the structure, the rotation of the structure can be easily stopped by the weight of the structure described above. As a result, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the left slide member 430 can be stopped quickly.

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the right slide member 450, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right slide member 450. The base member 454 includes a back side base member 454a connected to the rack member 451 and a front side base member 454b arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side base member 454a. The transmission gears 457a to 457f are rotatably held (shafted) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the member 454a and the front side base member 454b. A shaft support hole 454b1 having a circular front view is bored in the front side base member 454b.

As described above, the transmission gears 457a to 457f are a group of gears for transmitting the movement (slide displacement) of the base member 454 with respect to the base member 410 to the rotating member 455, and by connecting (toothing) each other in series. , 1 gear train (gear train) is formed with the transmission gear 457a at the head and the transmission gear 457f at the tail.

As described above, the leading transmission gear 457a is meshed with the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 of the base member 410, and the rotary shaft 455a of the rotary member 455 is coaxially fixed to the rear transmission gear 457f.

Therefore, by sliding-displace the right slide member 450 (base member 454) with respect to the base member 410, the leading transmission gear 457a is rotated by the action of the base member 410 from the right rotation transmission rack gear 414, and the rotation is rotated. It is transmitted to the tail transmission gear 457f via the transmission gears 457b to 457e, and the rotation of the tail transmission gear 457f can rotate the rotating member 455.

The rotating member 455 includes a rotating shaft 455a and a supporting shaft 455b that project coaxially from the back surface. The rotation shaft 455a is a portion that serves as a rotation axis when the rotation member 455 rotates with respect to the base member 454, and is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 454b1 of the front side base member 454b. In this case, the transmission gear 457f is coaxially connected to the rotating shaft 435a so as not to rotate relative to each other. Therefore, as will be described later, by rotating the transmission gear 457f, the rotating member 455 is rotated with respect to the base member 454.

The support shaft 455b is a portion that rotatably supports the displacement member 456 on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 456a of the displacement member 456. By fitting the E-ring into the fitting groove recessed in the tip of the support shaft 455b, the displacement member 456 from the support shaft 455b is prevented from coming off.

The displacement member 456 is a member displaceably arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 455, and includes a shaft support hole 456a, an escape hole 456b, and a curved rack gear 456c. As described above, the support shaft 455b of the rotating member 455 is inserted into the shaft support hole 456a, whereby the displacement member 456 is rotatably supported by the rotating member 455.

The escape hole 456b is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape by dividing the annular shape centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a at a predetermined central angle, and the groove width is formed by the rotating member 455. The size is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 455a. Therefore, when the displacement member 456 is displaced (rotated around the shaft support hole 456a) with respect to the rotating member 455, the rotating shaft 455a can be displaced along the relief hole 456b and is displaced from the rotating member 455. Interference with the member 456 can be avoided.

The curved rack gear 456c is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface centered on the axial center of the shaft support hole 456a. Here, a drive motor 461 is arranged on the back surface of the rotating member 455, and a pinion gear 452 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 461, and the pinion gear 452 is meshed with the curved rack gear 456c. Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear 452 in the forward direction or the reverse direction by the drive motor 461, the displacement member 456 is rotated in one direction or the other direction with respect to the rotating member 455 with the shaft support hole 456a (support shaft 455b) as the rotation center. Can be made to.

In this case, the rotating member 455 is formed in a substantially elongated shape whose front view shape is larger in the length direction than the width direction, and the rotation shaft 455a is provided on one end side in the length direction. The drive motor 461 is arranged on the other end side as well as being arranged. Further, since the displacement member 456 is arranged on the rotating member 455 on the side opposite to the drive motor 461 with the support shaft 455b interposed therebetween, the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are arranged on the rotating member 455 The position of the center of gravity can be arranged at a position eccentric to one end side of the rotating member 455 (a position separated from the rotating shaft 455a).

Therefore, at the start of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455), the center of gravity of the structure in which the displacement member 456 and the drive motor 461 are arranged on the rotating member 455 is displaced downward in the direction of gravity. By locating it on the side, the weight of the structure can be caused to act in the direction of rotating the structure itself. As a result, the load on the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) can be reduced, and the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 from the stopped state can be smoothly started.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 (that is, the rotation of the rotating member 455) is stopped, the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure is positioned on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, so that the weight of the structure is used as resistance. It can be made to act to make it easier to stop the rotation of the structural value. As a result, when the drive of the right drive motor 476 (see FIG. 11) is stopped, the right slide member 450 can be stopped quickly.

Further, as will be described later, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451), the right slide member 450 is retracted (right side in FIG. 10). By locating the center of gravity of the above-mentioned structure on the side that is displaced upward in the direction of gravity, the weight of the structure acts as a resistance and exerts a buffering action due to the rotation of the structure value. Can be made to.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 and 18 are front views of the slide unit 400, showing a transition state when the left slide member 430 is slid displacement. Note that FIGS. 17 and 18 show a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, the left drive motor 475, and the right drive motor 476 are removed.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the left slide member 430 is arranged in the retracted position, the second member 433 is displaced to the maximum relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is movable. It is arranged at the left end of the range (the left side of FIG. 17A, the position farthest from the right slide member 450). When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the first member 431 moves to the right with respect to the base member 410 due to the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first side rack gear 431a (FIG. 11). 17 (a) Slide displacement toward the right side, in the direction closer to the right slide member 450).

In this case, as described above, the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second rack gear 433a and the base side thereof. Since the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431 is interposed in the state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412, when the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410, By the action of the base side rack gear 412, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated while being slidably displaced together with the first member 431, and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 is acted on the second side rack gear 433a, so that the second member 433 Is slid and displaced in the same direction as the first member 431. That is, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433, whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431, catches up with the first member 431 and is second with respect to the first member 431. The members 433 are partially overlapped (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is shortened).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the positive direction, and the first member 431 is further to the right with respect to the base member 410 (the right side in FIG. 17A, the direction closer to the right slide member 450). ), As shown in FIG. 18A, the second member 433 is displaced to the maximum relative to the first member 431 in the shortening direction, and the base member 434 is at the right end of the movable range (FIG. 18). (A) The right side, the position closest to the right slide member 450), that is, the overhanging position.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is driven in the opposite direction to the above case from the state where the left slide member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position. Due to the action of the left drive gear 471 and the first rack gear 431a, the first member 431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in the left direction (left side in FIG. 18A, in the direction away from the right slide member 450). ..

Also in this case, the action of the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431, as in the case described above. As a result, the second member 433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B, the second member 433, whose slide displacement speed is relatively faster than that of the first member 431, precedes the first member 431 with respect to the first member 431. The second member 433 is relatively displaced in the extension direction (the total length of the first member 431 and the second member 433 in the longitudinal direction is extended more than the total length at the overhang position).

From this state, the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 11) is further driven in the opposite direction, and the first member 431 is further leftward with respect to the base member 410 (the left side in FIG. 17B, the direction away from the right slide member 450). ), As shown in FIG. 17A, the second member 433 is maximally displaced relative to the first member 431 in the extension direction, and the base member 434 is at the left end of the movable range (FIG. 17). (A) The position farthest from the left and right slide members 450), that is, the overhanging position.

In the present embodiment, a detected portion is formed at the tip of the second member 431, and a detection sensor for detecting the detected portion is arranged on the base member 410 (neither is shown). In this case, the detection sensor is arranged at a position where the detected portion of the second member 431 can be detected when the second member 431 (left slide member 430) is arranged at the retracted position, and the detected portion is detected by the detection sensor. When is detected, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped, assuming that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the retracted position.

On the other hand, when the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped at the overhang position, the number of drive steps of the left drive motor 475 after the start of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 from the retracted position to the overhang position is cumulatively added. It is done by doing. That is, when the cumulative addition value reaches a predetermined value, the drive of the left drive motor 475 is stopped, assuming that the left slide member 430 is arranged at the overhanging position.

Here, in this embodiment, the movable range of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (the range from the retracted position to the overhanging position) has a portion overlapping with the movable range of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. Therefore, the movable range of both can be increased to enhance the effect of the effect.

However, if the movable ranges are overlapped in this way, it is caused by variations in component dimensions / assembly, variations in the amount of displacement due to rattling (gap) based on tolerances, or poor control (for example, poor control). Due to the occurrence of the error of cumulative addition of the number of drive steps), the left slide member 430 slide-displaced to the overhanging position may come into contact with the right slide member 450, resulting in damage. On the other hand, if the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the effect of the slide displacement is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are formed so as to be able to suppress damage while ensuring the effect of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430.

That is, as described above, the second member is formed by the action of the second rack gear 433a of the second member 433, the base rack gear 412 of the base member 410, and the first pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 431. The 433 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 410 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member 431, and the base member 434 (rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435) which is visible to the player on the second member 433. Since the displacement member 436) is connected, the speed of the slide displacement of the base member 434 can be increased, and the effect of the slide displacement can be ensured.

On the other hand, as described above, the left slide member 430 brings the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). , The impact at the time of contact can be weakened, and damage to both can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the right slide member 450 is made to stand by (stop) closer to the retracted position than the overhanging position of the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced toward the overhanging position. At the time of making the left slide member 430 come into contact with the right slide member 450, the left slide member 430 pushes the right slide member 450 in the direction of slide displacement to produce an effect of sliding displacement of both in an integrated state. be able to. In this case as well, the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, can be brought into contact with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451). It is possible to weaken the impact of and suppress damage to both.

The right slide member 450 is arranged on the base member 410 so as to be slidable, and the direction of the slide displacement of the right slide member 450 is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. That is, when the right slide member 450 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the left slide member 430 arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is separated from the left slide member 430 (see FIG. 18A). FIG. 18A has a movable range for sliding displacement to the right side), and the direction in which the right slide member 450 can be slidably displaced is the left slide member 430 when the left slide member 430 is brought into contact with the left slide member 430. It is considered to be the direction that allows the slide displacement of.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450 (see FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 is retracted (relieved backward) while receiving the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Therefore, a buffering action can be exerted (see FIG. 18B). As a result, damage to the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 can be easily suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the directions of slide displacement between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 are parallel, so that when the left slide member 430 comes into contact with the right slide member 450, the right slide member 450 The escape operation can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to reliably exert a buffering action and easily suppress damage to both.

Further, in this case, by sharing the sliding rod member 420 between the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450, the directions of slide displacement of both members are parallel to each other, so that the overall size can be reduced. .. That is, when the sliding rod member for guiding the left slide member 430 and the sliding rod member for guiding the right slide member 450 are arranged side by side in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement. The space is increased by that amount, which leads to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the sliding rod member 420 of 1 in both the sliding rod members 430 and 450, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

As described above, the right slide member 450 has a movable range in a direction away from the left slide member 430 arranged at the overhanging position (on the right side in FIG. 18A), and is not different from the left slide member 430. It can be placed at the position of contact. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the left slide member 430 is not brought into contact with the right slide member 450.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the left slide member 430 extends beyond the target position due to the above-mentioned variation and poor control. When the right slide member 450 is positively brought into contact with the slide member 430 (functions as a stopper), while the left slide member 430 is slid and displaced at a relatively low speed, it is easy to match the stop position with the target position. Therefore, by arranging the right slide member 450 at a position where it is not in contact with the left slide member 430, the number of contacts can be reduced and the fatigue associated with the contact can be reduced. As a result, the life of both slide members 430 and 450 can be improved.

Here, the left slide member 430 is provided with both members 431 and 433 separately in order to accelerate the speed of the second member 433 with respect to the first member 431, and the base side rack gear 412 and the second side rack gear. It is necessary to interpose the first side pinion gear 432 between the 433a, and the number of parts and the sliding portion are increased, so that the weight and the driving resistance are increased. Therefore, the force required to drive the left slide member 430 is relatively large.

In particular, during the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (when starting the slide displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the initial velocity when the slide displacement is started from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the slide displacement may be hindered.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the right slide member 450 is formed so as to be in contact with the left slide member 430, and the left slide member 430 is pushed back to the retracted position from the contacted state (FIG. 18 (a). ) It is formed so that it can be slidably displaced to the left). Therefore, the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted by the slide displacement of the right slide member 450. As a result, the left slide member 430 can be quickly slid and displaced from the stopped state. As a result, the initial operation (initial speed) can be increased to improve the effect of the slide displacement.

Further, when the right slide member 450 is slid and displaced in the direction of pushing the left slide member 430 back to the retracted position (the left direction in FIG. 18A), the right slide member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431 of the left slide member 430. (The first member 431 is pushed back), so that the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be increased.

That is, the right slide member 450 comes into contact with the first member 431, which has a slower slide displacement speed than the second member 433 of the left slide members 430, and pushes back the first member 431. Therefore, the right slide member 450 The speed of the left slide member 430 exceeds the speed of the right slide member 450 after the time when the auxiliary force is acting on the left slide member 430 (first member 431) (that is, after the left slide member 430 in the stopped state starts to be pushed back). Therefore, the time until the displacement of the left slide member 430 precedes the displacement of the right slide member 450) can be made longer, and as a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be improved.

Here, a mechanism (left pinion gear 473, left drive gear 471, and first side rack gear 431a) that converts the rotational driving force of the left drive motor 475 into linear motion to slide-displace the left slide member 430 (first member 431). Gear ratio and the rotational driving force of the right drive motor 476 are converted into linear motion to slide and displace the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) (right pinion gear 474, right drive gear 472 and rack gear 451a). The ratio is set to a different gear ratio, and in the present embodiment, the gear ratio in the former (left slide member 430) is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio in the latter (right slide member 450).

In the present embodiment, the left pinion gear 473 is formed in the same shape as the right pinion gear 474 and the first side rack gear 431a is formed in the same shape as the rack gear 451a. Therefore, the number of teeth of the left drive gear 471 is the number of teeth of the right drive gear 472. The number of teeth is set to be larger than the number. That is, a large gear ratio means that the rack gear (first side rack gear 431a or rack gear 451a) is displaced in the direction of slide displacement when the drive shaft of the drive motor (left drive motor 475 or right drive motor 476) makes one rotation. It means that the amount is large.

As a result, the left slide member 430 can be easily slid and displaced quickly from the stopped state, and after the start of the slide displacement, the speed of the slide displacement of the left slide member 450 (second member 433) can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the effect of the slide displacement.

That is, by setting the gear ratio of the right slide member 450 to a relatively small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. Therefore, the force of the right slide member 450 to push back the left slide member 430 is increased. The initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the left slide member 430 can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state.

On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is set to a relatively large gear ratio, the speed of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) can be increased by that amount. The speed of slide displacement of the second member 433 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect due to the slide displacement.

If the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is reduced in order to smoothly perform the initial operation of the left slide member 430 (start of slide displacement from the stopped state), the initial operation becomes smooth, but the initial operation ends. In the later steady state, the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) becomes low. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the left slide member 430 is increased in order to increase the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation, the maximum speed can be increased. , The initial operation (start of slide displacement from the stopped state) is hindered (delayed). That is, both the smooth initial operation of the left slide member 430 and the increase in the speed (maximum speed) of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (second member 433) in the steady state after the initial operation are compatible. However, by adopting a structure in which the right slide member 450 pushes back the left slide member 430, which was not possible in the past, such compatibility has become possible for the first time.

Next, the detailed configuration of the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. First, the upper united unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23.

FIG. 19A is a front view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 19B is a rear view of the upper united unit 500. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper united unit 500, and FIG. 21 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper united unit 500. Note that FIG. 19 shows a state in which the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 21, the upper uniting unit 500 is connected to the base member 510, the rack member 520 displaceable in the internal space of the base member 510, and the rack member 520. It includes an upper displacement member 530 and a drive mechanism for sliding displacement of the rack member 520.

The base member 510 includes a front-view rectangular horizontally long back base 511 and a front-view rectangular horizontally long front base 512 arranged (covered) on the front side of the back-view base 511, and the back-view base 511 and the front base. The rack member 520 is slidably accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of 512.

The back base 511 has a connecting hole 511a formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, a guide hole 511b formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape, and a rack member projecting to the front side. A support shaft 511c inserted into the guide groove 522 of the 520 is provided.

The connecting hole 511a is an opening for connecting the rack member 520 and the upper displacement member 530, and is formed along (parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the back surface base 511 (that is, the sliding direction of the rack member 520). The connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted into the connecting hole 511a.

The guide hole 511b is a portion through which the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is slidably inserted, and when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced due to the slide displacement of the rack member 520, the upper displacement member 530 The posture (direction) of the upper displacement member 530 is changed by sliding the guide pin 532 along the guide hole 511b.

The rack member 520 is formed as a shaft support hole 521, which is a front view circular hole for rotatably supporting the connecting shaft 531 of the upper displacement member 530, and a groove-shaped opening extending linearly. It includes a guide groove 522 and a rack gear 523 carved along a direction parallel to the extending direction of the guide groove 522, and is formed as a rectangular horizontally long plate-like body.

The support shaft 511c of the back surface base 511 is slidably inserted into the guide groove 522. When the support shaft 511c of the back base 511 is inserted into the guide groove 522 and the guide pin 532 of the upper displacement member 530 is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 521, the extension direction of the guide groove 522 is the extension direction of the back base 511. It is parallel to the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a. Therefore, the direction of slide displacement of the rack member 520 is defined as the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a of the back base 511.

The upper displacement member 530 includes a connecting shaft 531 and a guide pin 532 projecting from the front side. The connecting shaft 531 is a columnar body having a circular cross section rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 521 of the rack member 520 via the connecting hole 511a of the back base 511, and the guide pin 532 is the back base 511. It is a columnar body having a circular cross section that slides along the guide hole 511b.

A collar C1 having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support hole 521 and a collar C2 having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide hole 511b are fixed to the tips of the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 to prevent them from coming off. .. Further, the upper displacement member 530 is formed with an upper contact portion 533 on its side surface. The upper contact portion 533 is a portion that comes into contact with the lower contact portion 643 (see FIGS. 25 and 26) of the lower displacement member 640, and is on the side surface opposite to the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 (tip side). It is formed.

The drive mechanism includes a drive gear 541 rotatably supported on the front surface of the rear base 511, a pinion gear 542 meshed with the drive gear 541, and a drive motor 543 to which the drive shaft is connected to the pinion gear 542. Be prepared. The drive gear 541 is meshed with the rack gear 523 of the rack member 520. Therefore, by rotationally driving the drive gear 541 via the pinion gear 542 by the drive motor 543, the rack member 520 can be slidably displaced along the extending direction of the connecting hole 511a via the rack gear 523.

Next, the operation of the upper uniting unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. 22 and 23 are front views and rear views of the upper uniting unit 500, and shows a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 23 (a), when the upper displacement member 530 is arranged in the retracted position, the connecting shaft 531 and the guide pin 532 are on one end side of the connecting hole 511a and the guide hole 511b. It is located on the right side of FIG. 23), and the upper displacement member 530 forms a horizontal posture and is arranged in a state of being hidden behind the base member 510.

When the drive motor 543 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, the connecting shaft 531 is horizontally displaced along the connecting hole 511a and the guide pin 532 is displaced in the guide hole 511b as the rack member 520 slides. As shown in FIGS. 22 (b) and 23 (b), the upper displacement member 530 is tilted diagonally (rotated about the connecting shaft 531) in the horizontal direction by being guided along the above. Displaced to. That is, the tip side (upper contact portion 533) of the upper displacement member 530 is lowered while drawing a curved locus.

When the drive motor 543 is further driven in the positive direction, the upper displacement member 530 is further obliquely tilted (rotated around the connecting shaft 531) and displaced in the horizontal direction, and is displaced in the horizontal direction in FIGS. 22 (c) and FIG. As shown in 23 (c), a vertical posture is formed in which the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward. That is, it is arranged at the overhanging position (first position).

Next, the lower coalescing unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 29.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the lower united unit 600. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower united unit 600, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower united unit 600. Note that FIG. 23 shows a state in which the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, the lower uniting unit 600 has a base member 610, a drive arm holding member 620 disposed below the front side of the base member 610, and a base end of the drive arm holding member 620. A drive arm 630 whose side is rotatably held, a lower displacement member 640 to which the tip end side of the drive arm 630 is connected, a connecting arm 650 to connect the lower displacement member 640 to a base member 610, and a drive arm 630. It includes an urging spring 660 for applying a force and a drive mechanism for applying a driving force to the drive arm 630.

The base member 610 is formed as a plate-like body having a substantially L-shape in front view, and has a projecting base portion 611 projecting from the front at the lower end of the substantially L-shape and projecting from the front at the upper end portion of the substantially L-shape. It is provided with a connecting shaft 612 to be formed. The projecting base 611 is a portion for arranging the drive arm holding member 620 at a position protruding from the front of the base member 610 (raised toward the front side), and is along the edge portion at the lower end of the base member 610. Be thrust.

The drive arm holding member 620 includes a back side holding member 621 arranged on the projecting base 611 of the base member 610 and a front side holding member 622 arranged (covered) on the front side of the back side holding member 621. The drive arm 630 and the transmission gears 671a to 671c are rotatably held (axially supported) between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the back side holding member 621 and the front side holding member 622.

Since the back side of the back side holding member 621 of the drive arm holding member 620 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding base portion 611 of the base member 610, the height of the protruding base portion 611 is increased. A predetermined space can be formed between the back surface of the drive arm holding member 620 (back surface side holding member 621) and the front surface of the base member 610. In the present embodiment, since the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the retracted position is formed so as to be able to be accommodated in such a space, the outer shape of the lower uniting unit 600 can be reduced accordingly.

In the drive arm 630, a plurality of teeth are engraved along an axial support hole 631 rotatably supported by the drive arm holding member 620 and an outer peripheral surface of a columnar portion concentric with the axial support hole 631. As a long member having a gear portion 632 and a connecting hole 633 formed at an end opposite to the gear portion 632, the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 are separated by a predetermined distance. It is formed.

The lower displacement member 640 includes a drive arm connecting shaft 641 and a connecting arm connecting shaft 642 projecting from the front side. The drive arm connecting shaft 641 is a columnar body having a circular cross section rotatably connected to the connecting hole 633 of the drive arm 630, and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 is rotatably connected to the connecting hole 651 of the connecting arm 650. It is a columnar body with a circular cross section. The lower displacement member 640 is interposed between the drive arm 630 and the connecting arm 650, and is displaced with respect to the base member 610 by rotating the drive arm 630.

The lower displacement member 640 is formed with a lower contact portion 643 on its side surface. The lower contact portion 643 is a portion that is brought into contact with the upper contact portion 533 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the upper displacement member 530, and is formed from a virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642. It is formed on the side surface on the side separated from the overhanging direction side (right side in FIG. 24). In the present embodiment, the lower contact portion 643 is formed as a surface oriented substantially orthogonal to the virtual line connecting the drive arm connecting shaft 641 and the connecting arm connecting shaft 642.

The connecting arm 650 includes connecting holes 651 and 652 formed on one end side and the other end side, and the connecting holes 651 and 652 are provided with the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 and the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. Are rotatably connected to each other. Therefore, when the drive arm 630 is rotated and the lower displacement member 640 is displaced with respect to the base member 610, the displacement locus of the lower displacement member 640 at the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 portion is changed to the connecting shaft 612 of the base member 610. It can be defined as an arc shape at the center.

The urging spring 660 is a metal torsional spring, and one leg extending from the winding portion is engaged with the drive arm holding member 620 and the other leg is engaged with the drive arm 630 to engage the drive arm 630. Is urged in the direction of rotation from the retracted position to the overhanging position. That is, when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the retracted position (see FIG. 27A), the elastic deformation (torsional deformation) of the urging spring 660 is maximized, and the elastic recovery force causes the displacement member 630 to be displaced. The 640 is urged in the rotation direction (clockwise rotation in FIG. 27A) to displace the 640 from the retracted position to the overhanging position. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 672 is assisted, and the initial operation of the lower displacement member 640 in the overhanging direction can be smoothly performed.

The drive mechanism is arranged in front of the transmission gears 671a to 671c arranged inside the drive arm holding member 620, the drive shaft is connected to the transmission gear 671a, and the drive arm holding member 620 (front side holding member 622). It is provided with a drive motor 672 to be installed. The transmission gears 671a to 671c are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 672 to the drive arm 630. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gear 671a is at the head and the transmission gear 671c is at the tail. The gear train (gear train) of 1 is formed.

The rear transmission gear 671c is meshed with the gear portion 632 of the drive arm 630. When the drive motor 672 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 671a to the trailing transmission gear 671c, and the trailing transmission gear 671c is rotated. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 671c acts on the gear portion 632, so that the drive arm 630 is rotated.

Next, the operation of the lower uniting unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a front view of the lower uniting unit 600, showing a transition state when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 27 (a), in the state where the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the retracted position, the drive arm 630 is rotated to the maximum counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 27 (a) counterclockwise rotation direction). It is located at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as "retract rotation position"), and is in a tilted posture in which the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631) is tilted downward toward the tip side (connecting hole 633). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a vertical posture in which the directions connecting the connecting holes 651 and 652 are substantially parallel to the vertical direction. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at a position where the horizontal position is on the leftmost side (the position farthest from the overhanging position in the horizontal direction, the left side in FIG. 27 (a)), and the vertical position is the lowest. It is arranged at a position (the position farthest from the overhanging position in the vertical direction, the lower side in FIG. 27 (a)).

When the drive motor 672 is driven in the forward direction from such a state, as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in the front view, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640. Is displaced upward (upper side in FIG. 27 (b)), and the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the right (right side in FIG. 27 (a)).

When the drive motor 672 is further driven in the positive direction from the state shown in FIG. 27 (b), the vicinity of the drive arm connecting shaft 641 of the lower displacement member 640 is further driven as the drive arm 630 rotates clockwise in the front view. Along with being displaced upward, the vicinity of the connecting arm connecting shaft 642 of the lower displacement member 640 is further displaced to the right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position.

In the overhanging position, the drive arm 630 is located at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as "overhanging rotation position") that is maximally rotated clockwise in the front view (FIG. 27 (c) rightward rotation direction). In the rotation position, the drive arm 630 is arranged at a position where its tip side (connecting hole 633) crosses the vertical line passing through the base end side (rotation center, that is, the shaft support hole 631). Further, the connecting arm 650 is in a tilted posture in which the connecting hole 651 is lifted most upward. Therefore, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at a position where the horizontal position is the rightmost position (the position farthest from the retracted position in the horizontal direction, the right side in FIG. 27 (c)), and the vertical position is the uppermost position ( It is arranged at a position farthest from the retracted position in the vertical direction, slightly downward from the upper side of FIG. 27 (a).

Here, the displacement speed of the lower uniting unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a front schematic view of the drive arm 630 at the retracted rotation position, the horizontal rotation position, the vertical rotation position, and the extension rotation position. Further, FIGS. 29 (a) to 29 (d) are partially enlarged front schematic views of the drive arm 630 when it is rotated from the retracted rotation position to the overhanging rotation position.

Here, as described above, the drive arm 630 is rotated between the retracted rotation position and the overhang rotation position. In the following, the drive arm 630 is rotated by an angle θ1 from the retracted rotation position, and the drive arm 630 is in a horizontal posture. The rotation position (the imaginary line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the horizontal direction) is called the "horizontal rotation position", and is rotated by an angle θ2 from the horizontal rotation position. The rotation position in which the drive arm 630 is in an upright posture (a posture in which the virtual line connecting the axial centers of the shaft support hole 631 and the connecting hole 633 is parallel to the vertical direction) is referred to as a "vertical rotation position". The overhang rotation position is a position rotated by an angle θ3 from the vertical rotation position.

In this case, FIG. 29 (a) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, and FIG. 29 (b) shows the drive arm 630 in the horizontal rotation position. 29 (c) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ2) between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position, and FIG. 29 (d) shows the drive arm in the vertical rotation position. Corresponding to 630, FIG. 29 (e) corresponds to the drive arm 630 in the section (range of angle θ3) between the vertical rotation position and the retracted rotation position.

The drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 672 is kept constant, and therefore the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 is kept constant. In this case, it can be assumed that the transient period from the stopped state until the drive arm 630 reaches a constant rotational speed through rotation is sufficiently small and there is no transient response.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (a) and 29 (b), in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The tilted posture is positioned below the hole 631, and the connecting hole 633 is displaced upward as it is rotated from the retracted position to the horizontal rotation position. Therefore, the speed V of the connecting hole 633 (the arc shape of the connecting hole 633) The tangential speed in the displacement locus) is maximized at the horizontal rotation position, with the upward speed component (speed Vv) gradually increasing. That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the speed upward thereof is gradually increased.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 (b) to 29 (d), in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The speed V of the connecting hole 633 is directed upward because the connecting hole 633 is further displaced upward as it is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position in an inclined posture that is positioned above the hole 631. The velocity component (velocity Vv) is gradually reduced to 0 at the vertical rotation position. That is, in such a section (range of the angle θ2), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced upward, and the speed of the downward displacement member 640 is gradually reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (d) and 29 (e), in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhang rotation position (range of angle θ3), the drive arm 630 pivotally supports the connecting hole 633. The speed V of the connecting hole 633 is increased because the connecting hole 633 is displaced downward as the drive arm 630 is rotated from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position in an inclined posture so as to be positioned above the hole 631. It has a downward velocity component (velocity Vv). That is, in such a section (range of angle θ1), the lower displacement member 640 is displaced downward.

In this way, the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced in the vicinity of the retracted position. As will be described later, the lower displacement member 640 abuts (merges) with the upper displacement member 530 at the retracted position. When it is done, the occurrence of the impact can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from being repelled by the upper displacement member 530, and to stabilize the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 28, 29 (a) to 29 (d), in the section (range of the angle θ1) between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position, the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is set. While the velocity component Vh toward the left is gradually increased, the velocity V of the connecting hole 633 is the velocity component Vh toward the right in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). Gradually increased.

As a result, in the lower displacement member 640, the vicinity of the connecting hole 633 is displaced to the left in the section between the retracted rotation position and the horizontal rotation position (range of angle θ1), while the displacement direction is horizontal. It is inverted at the rotation position, and in the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2), it is displaced toward the right (direction toward the retracted position).

That is, after the lower displacement member 640 is horizontally displaced toward the left and stopped at one end on the leftmost side (after the horizontal velocity component Vh is set to 0), the direction of the horizontal displacement is reversed to the right. It can be gradually displaced horizontally in an accelerated state toward the direction. As a result, it is possible to bring out the action of bending and stretching the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction, and to give a dynamic feeling to the action of the lower displacement member 640.

In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the section where the horizontal velocity component Vh is decreased (range of angle θ1), the vertical velocity component Vv is increased while the horizontal velocity component Vh is increased (angle). In the range of θ2), since the velocity component Vv in the vertical direction is reduced, the above-mentioned operation of bending and stretching in the horizontal direction can be emphasized, and as a result, the dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 is made stronger for the player. You can impress.

On the other hand, as described above, in order to suppress the impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with (combines) the upper displacement member 530, the section between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (range of angle θ2). ), In the configuration in which the upward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is reduced to 0, the effect of the displacement of the lower displacement member 640 may be hindered. On the other hand, in such a section (range of angle θ2), the velocity component Vh in the horizontal direction can be increased. Therefore, instead of the displacement in the upward direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction (rightward) causes the downward displacement member. The effect of 640 can be performed, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be ensured.

In this case, according to the present embodiment, in the lower displacement member 640, the connecting arm 650 is attached to a portion (connecting arm connecting shaft 642) separated upward from the connected portion (driving arm connecting shaft 641) of the drive arm 630. Since they are connected, the upper portion of the lower displacement member 640 (near the connecting arm connecting shaft 642) can be horizontally displaced to the right as it rotates around the connecting hole 652 of the connecting arm 650. .. Therefore, as described above, when the motion of bending and stretching the lower displacement member 640 in the horizontal direction is exhibited, the motion of bending and stretching is increased by the amount of the horizontal displacement to the right accompanying the rotation of the connecting arm 650. The dynamic feeling of the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Further, when the lower displacement member 640 is produced by the displacement in the horizontal direction (right side) instead of the displacement in the upward direction, the displacement in the horizontal direction (right side) is increased to produce the effect. Can be easily secured.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the contact (coalescence) operation at the overhanging position of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600 will be described.

FIG. 30 is a front view of the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, and shows a transition state when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position. ..

As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (c), the upper displacement member 530 is moved from the retracted position hidden behind the base member 510 to the tip side as the drive motor 543 is driven. The (upper contact portion 533) is lowered while drawing a curved locus, and is arranged at the overhanging position in a state in which the tip end side (upper contact portion 533) is directed downward in a vertical posture. On the other hand, the lower displacement member 640 is pushed up by the drive arm 630 with the drive of the drive motor 672 from the retracted position where the horizontal position is the leftmost position and the vertical position is the lowermost position, and is stretched. Placed in the out position.

As a result, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 arranged at the overhanging position are united in a state where the upper contact portion 533 and the lower contact portion 643 are in contact with each other. As a result, both can be integrated to form a predetermined character. In the present embodiment, the upper displacement member 530 is formed in the shape of the horse head, the lower displacement member 640 is formed in the shape of the horse body, and the connecting arm 650 is formed in the shape of the horse leg. As a result, a jumping horse character is formed at the evacuation position.

Here, when the descending upper displacement member 530 and the ascending lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position, they are repelled in a direction in which they are separated from each other by the impact generated at the time of the contact. The posture (that is, the shape of the character) becomes unstable. On the other hand, if the displacement speeds of the upper displacement member 530 and the displacement member 640 are slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, it takes time for both displacement members 530 and 640 to be integrated to form one character. Is bulky and stretches, which hinders the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the lower displacement member 640 is displaced to the overhanging position, the velocity toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640. Since the component Vv is reduced when approaching the overhanging position, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact when the lower displacement member 640 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 and the upper displacement member 530 from being repelled in the direction of being separated from each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of both the displacement members 530 and 640.

Further, since the downward velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is gradually reduced in the section (range of the angle θ2) from the horizontal rotation position to the vertical rotation position, the lower displacement member 640 as a whole is reduced. It is possible to secure the velocity component Vv that goes upward. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required to integrate the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 to form one character, and to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the tip (connecting hole 633) of the drive arm 630 is connected to the lower displacement member 640 and the lower displacement member 640 is lifted by the rotation of the drive arm 630, the connecting portion (connecting hole 633) is used. ) Is drawn to draw an arc-shaped locus to gradually reduce the upward speed component Vv. Therefore, the downward speed component Vv of the downward displacement member 640 is reduced to keep the drive state of the drive motor 672 constant. Can be done as. That is, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the drive motor 672 according to the position of the lower displacement member 640. Therefore, the control of the drive motor 672 can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the overhang rotation position of the drive arm 630 (that is, the overhang position where the lower displacement member 640 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530) is set to a position further rotated from the vertical rotation position. (See FIG. 28). Therefore, among the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640, the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) can be set to a negative value at the overhanging position. That is, in the section between the vertical rotation position and the overhanging rotation position (range of the angle θ3), the vertical velocity component Vv of the lower displacement member 640 is in the downward direction (direction away from the upper displacement member 530). It can be an ingredient.

As a result, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other at the retracted position, the lower displacement member 640 can be released (retracted) downward from the upper displacement member 530, so that an impact is generated. Can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent both displacement members 530 and 640 from being repelled in the direction of being separated from each other, and it is possible to stabilize their postures.

Further, in this way, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position in a state where the velocity component Vv toward the upper side (that is, the upper displacement member 530) of the velocity components of the lower displacement member 640 is a negative value. With the configuration, even if the position of contact (coalescence) is displaced due to dimensional tolerance / assembly tolerance or control variation in the drive mechanism of the lower displacement member 640 or the upper displacement member 530, the lower part is displaced. Since the range in which the upward velocity component Vv of the displacement member 640 is reduced can be widened, it is possible to easily bring the displacement member 640 into contact with the upper displacement member 530 within a range in which the impact can be suppressed.

Next, the projecting unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 42. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting unit 700, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projecting unit 700. Further, FIG. 33 is a front view of the base member 710 and the elevating base 720, and shows a transition state when the elevating base 720 is moved up and down with respect to the base member 710.

The projecting unit 700 refers to the base member 710, the elevating base 720 rotatably arranged on the base member 710, the rotating member 730 rotatably arranged on the elevating base 720, and the base member 710. It mainly includes a drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 and a drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720.

First, a structure for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the base member 710 has an insertion hole 711 opened as a circular hole in the front view at substantially the center in the lateral width direction, a support shaft 712 projecting from the front, and projecting from the back surface. It is provided with two support shafts 713 and 714. The rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771 is rotatably inserted into the insertion hole 711. Further, a shaft support hole 719a of the connecting arm 719 is rotatably supported on the front support shaft 712, and transmission gears 772b and 772c are rotatably supported on the back support shafts 713 and 714, respectively. ..

The elevating base 720 includes a back base 721, a front base 722 located in front of the back base 721, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end side of the back base 721 and the front base (FIGS. 34 and FIG. See 35). The rear base 721 and the front base 722 are opposed to the elevating base 720 at a predetermined interval by the thickness of the intermediate base 723, and the rotating member 730 is located between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722. Is rotatably housed (arranged).

One side of the back base 721 in the width direction is connected to the base member 710 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture in which the telescopic direction is along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is interposed between the base end rails arranged on the front surface of the base member 710, the tip rails arranged on the back surface of the elevating base 720 (rear base 721), and the base end rails and the tip rails. It is provided with an intermediate rail that allows the base end rail and the tip rail to be relatively displaced in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, by expanding and contracting the slide rail SL, the elevating base 720 can be moved up and down with respect to the base member 710 along the vertical direction.

The back base 721 of the elevating base 720 has a sliding groove 721a extending linearly along the width direction and a shaft support hole 721b for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft 731a of the rotating member 730. An opening is formed. The sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a via the collar C. As will be described later, the connecting arm 719 is driven by the drive arm 771, and the sliding pin 719b of the connecting arm 719 is slid along the sliding groove 721a to raise and lower the elevating base 720 (rear base 721). To.

The connecting arm 719 has a shaft support hole 719a rotatably supported by the support shaft 712 of the base member 710, and an elevating base 720 (rear base 721) projecting from the front at an end opposite to the shaft support hole 719a. ) Is provided with a sliding pin 719b slidably inserted into the sliding groove 721a and a driven groove 719c extending linearly along the direction connecting the shaft support holes 719a and the sliding pin 719b. .. The drive pin 771b of the drive arm 771 is slidably inserted into the driven groove 719c via the collar C. As will be described later, the drive arm 771 is rotationally driven so that the connecting arm 719 is rotated around the shaft support hole 719a.

The drive mechanism for raising and lowering the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710 is a drive arm 771 in which the rotation shaft 771a is rotatably supported in the insertion hole 711 of the base member 710, and the rotation shaft 771a of the drive arm 771. The drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 772a to 772d to which the tail transmission gear 772d is connected, and the transmission gear 772a at the head of the transmission gears 772a to 772d, and the drive is arranged in front of the base member 710. It is provided with a motor 773.

The transmission gears 772a to 772d are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 773 to the drive arm 771. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gears 772d are headed by the transmission gear 772d. A gear train (gear train) having 1 as a tail is formed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is arranged at the lowermost position (retracted position) (see FIG. 21 (a)), the rotational driving force is transmitted to the head. It is transmitted from the gear 772a to the tail transmission gear 772d, and the tail transmission gear 772d is rotated in one direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the transmission gear 772d at the tail is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise in FIG. 33A) with the rotation shaft 771a as the center of rotation. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the upright direction (clockwise in FIG. 33 (a)) with the shaft support hole 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is raised to the uppermost position (overhang position) (FIG. 21 (c)). )reference).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 773 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state where the elevating base 720 is arranged at the uppermost position (extending position) (see FIG. 21 (c)), the rotational driving force is the leading transmission gear. It is transmitted from 772a to the tail transmission gear 772d, and the tail transmission gear 772d is rotated in the other direction. As a result, the drive arm 771 connected to the transmission gear 772d at the tail is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33C) with the rotation shaft 771a as the center of rotation. As a result, the connecting arm 719 is rotated in the tilting direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 33 (c)) with the shaft support hole 719a as the center of rotation, and the elevating base 720 is lowered to the lowermost position (retracted position) (FIG. 21 (a)). )reference).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, a structure for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 will be described.

FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 36 is a front view of the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the rotating member 730 is rotated with respect to the elevating base 720.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the elevating base 720 includes a rear base 721 and a front base 722, and an intermediate base 723 interposed on the lower end side of the rear base 721 and the front base 722, as described above. In addition, the rotating shaft 731a is pivotally supported in the shaft support hole 721b of the back base 721, so that the rotating member 730 is rotatably accommodated (arranged) between the facing surfaces of the back base 721 and the front base 722.

The rotating member 730 includes a curved rack gear 731b arranged on the back surface thereof. The curved rack gear 731b is formed as a rack gear carved along a peripheral surface having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees centered on the axis of the rotating shaft 731a, and the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the curved rack gear 731b. Therefore, as will be described later, the rotation of the transmission gear 781a causes the rotating member 730 to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720.

The drive mechanism for rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720 is the transmission gears 781a and 781b rotatably held between the rear base 721 and the intermediate base 723 of the elevating base 720 and the transmission gear 781b. A drive motor 782 is provided in front of the intermediate base 723 when the drive shaft is connected.

Here, in a state where the transmission gear 781a is meshed with the center of the curved rack gear 731b in the circumferential direction, the rotating member 730 sets the direction of slide displacement of the projecting member 735 (the direction of projecting or immersing when appearing and descending) as the vertical direction. It is arranged at the rotation position (hereinafter referred to as "center rotation position") (see FIG. 36 (b)).

Therefore, when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the positive direction from the central rotation position and the transmission gears 781a and 781b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 uses the rotating shaft 731a as the rotation center. It is rotated in the positive direction (clockwise in FIG. 36B). As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to one side (right side in FIG. 36 (c)) (see FIG. 36 (c)).

From this state (see FIG. 36C), when the drive motor 782 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the transmission gears 781a and 782b are rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the curved rack gear 731b, and the rotating member 730 is rotated on the rotating shaft. It is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36C) with 731a as the center of rotation. As a result, the rotating member 730 is arranged in a posture in which the direction of the slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is tilted to the other side (left side in FIG. 36 (a)) after passing through the central rotation position (see FIG. 36 (a)). ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 42, a structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the rotating member 730 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating member 730, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating member 730. Further, FIG. 39 is a front view of the rotating member 730, and shows a transition state when the protruding member 735 appears and disappears from the rotating member 730 and the swinging member 732 is swung.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the rotating member 730 includes a rear base 731, a swing member 732 that is swingably arranged in front of the back base 731, and the swing members 732 and the back base 731. An intervening member 733 interposed between the two, a front base 734 disposed in front of the back base 731, a projecting member 735 disposed slidably on the back of the front base 734, and a front base. A drive mechanism for displacement (slide displacement and swing) of the projecting member 735 and the swing member 732 with respect to the 734 and the back base 731 is provided.

The back base 731 is formed in the shape of a container having a substantially circular front view with the front open, and a part of the outer peripheral wall (the outer peripheral wall located above) is missing, and the bottom is formed from the part where the outer peripheral wall is missing. A part of the wall protrudes upward. On the back surface of the rear base 731, as described above, the rotating shaft 731a pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 721b (see FIG. 35) of the elevating base 720 and the curvature meshed with the transmission gear 781a (see FIG. 35) are curved. A rack gear 731b is arranged.

Further, a pair of shaft support holes 731c that rotatably support the rotation shaft 732a of the swing member 732 and the tip of the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732 are slidably inserted into the back base 731. A pair of guide holes 731d and a slide hole 731e through which the slide pin 733b of the intermediate member 733 is slidably inserted are formed.

The shaft support hole 731c is formed as an opening having a circular cross section, and the guide hole 731d is formed as a groove-shaped opening curved in an arc shape about the axis of the shaft support hole 731c, and has one end side and the other end side. The vertical position is set to a different position. Therefore, by sliding the tip of the actuated shaft 732d of the swing member 732 along the guide hole 731d, the swing member 732 can be swung (rotated) so that the tip side thereof moves up and down.

The slide hole 731e is formed as a groove-shaped opening that extends linearly, and the axis of the rotation shaft 731a is positioned on an extension line in the extension direction, and the slide hole 731e and the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 described later Formed in parallel. A pair of shaft support holes 731c and guide holes 731d are arranged symmetrically with respect to a virtual line along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e.

The rocking member 732 includes a rotating shaft 732a and an acted shaft 732b formed as a columnar shaft body, and the base end sides on which the rotating shaft 732a and the acted shaft 732b are arranged face each other. A pair is arranged. The rotating shaft 732a is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 731c of the back base 731, and the actuated shaft 732b is slidably inserted into the working hole 733a of the intermediate member 733 and the guide hole 731d of the back base 731. Will be done.

The collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 732a, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the rotating shaft 732a from coming off, and the body portion of the collar C is formed by the rotating shaft 732a and the shaft support hole 731c. It is slidably interposed between them. Similarly, the collar C is fastened and fixed to the tip of the actuated shaft 732d, the flange portion of the collar C is used to prevent the actuated shaft 732d from coming off, and the body portion of the collar C is the acted shaft 732d and the guide hole. It is slidably interposed between the 731d and the action hole 733a.

The interposition member 733 is a plate-shaped portion interposed between the back surface base 731 and the swing member 732, and includes an action hole 733a, a slide pin 733b, and a sliding wall 733c. The action hole 733a is a hole for transmitting the elevating and lowering (sliding displacement in the vertical direction) of the interposition member 733 to the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732, and the pair is oriented in a front view C shape. It is arranged line-symmetrically.

As will be described later, when the interposition member 733 is raised (sliding displacement upward), the inner peripheral surface of the working hole 733a pushes up the actuated shaft 732b upward, and the swinging member 732 lifts the tip end side thereof. When the interposition member 733 is lowered (sliding displacement downward) while being swung (rotated) to, the inner peripheral surface of the working hole 733a pushes down the actuated shaft 732b, and the swinging member 732 is moved downward. It swings (rotates) in the direction of swinging down the tip side.

The slide pin 733b is a columnar portion slidably inserted into the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) are projected from the back surface of the interposition member 733. At the same time, they are arranged on the line of symmetry of the pair of action holes 733a described above with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the intermediate member 733 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 731e of the back base 731 via the slide pin 733b.

The sliding wall 733c is formed as a plate-like portion having a bottom surface extending along a horizontal direction (a direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the intermediate member 733) so as to project from the front surface of the intermediate member 733. The cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is brought into contact with the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated and the cam portion 761b is slid on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761 to the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c). The intermediate member 733 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) according to the change (increase / decrease) of. That is, when the cam diameter is increased with the rotation of the drive body 761, the interposition member 733 is pushed upward by the cam portion 761b, while when the cam diameter is decreased, the interposition member is pushed up. The 733 is lowered by its own weight.

An urging spring 791 made of a metal coil spring is interposed between the back base 731 and the interposing member 733 in a state of being elastically extended, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 791 is , It acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the intermediate member 733. That is, the lowering of the interposing member 733 (sliding displacement downward) is assisted by the urging force of the urging spring 791 in addition to the action of gravity (the own weight of the interposing member 733). As a result, as will be described later, the swing member 732 can be swung (rotated) quickly in the tilting direction (direction in which the tip is lowered).

The front base 734 is a plate-like body having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and is arranged on the front surface (end surface of the outer peripheral wall) of the back base 731. A slide hole 734a through which the slide pin 735a of the projecting member 735 is slidably inserted is formed in the front base 734. The slide hole 734a is formed as a groove-shaped opening extending linearly, and is formed parallel to the slide hole 731e of the back surface base 731.

The projecting member 735 is a long plate-like body that is slidably displaced on the back surface side of the front base 734, and includes a slide pin 735a and a sliding hole 735b. The slide pin 735a is a columnar portion that is slidably inserted into the slide hole 734a of the front base 734, and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) are projected from the front of the projecting member 735. , Are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735 with a predetermined interval. Therefore, the projecting member 735 is moved up and down along the extending direction of the slide hole 734a of the front base 734 via the slide pin 735a. A holding plate 736 is fastened and fixed to the tip of the slide pin 735a to prevent the slide pin 735a from coming off.

The sliding hole 735b is a groove-shaped opening formed on one end side (base end side) in the longitudinal direction of the projecting member 735, and the sliding pin 761c of the drive body 761 in the drive mechanism described later is slidably inserted. To. Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated and the sliding pin 761c is slid along the sliding hole 735b, the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b is pushed upward or downward by the sliding pin 761c. As a result, the protruding member 735 is moved up and down (sliding displacement upward or downward) along the slide hole 734a.

An urging spring 792 made of a metal torsion spring is interposed between the front base 734 and the projecting member 735 in a state of being elastically twisted and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 is , It acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735.

The drive mechanism for displacement (slide displacement and swing) of the projecting member 735 and the swing member 732 is a drive body 761 rotatably arranged in front of the rear base 731 and a driven gear of the drive body 761. The drive shaft is connected to the transmission gears 762a to 762e to which the tail transmission gear 762d is connected to the 761a, and the transmission gear 762a at the head of the transmission gears 762a to 762e, and is arranged on the back surface of the rear base 731. It is provided with a drive motor 763.

The cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is a portion formed as a disk cam in which a curved surface corresponding to the rotation position of the drive body 761 is formed on the outer peripheral surface, and as described above, the outer peripheral surface (cam surface) is formed. By sliding the intermediate member 733 on the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c, the intermediate member 733 is driven (sliding and displaced). Further, the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 is formed at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the driving body 761 and acts on the inner peripheral surface of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 as described above to project. Drive the member 735 (slide displacement).

The transmission gears 762a to 762e are a group of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the drive body 761. By connecting (toothing) each other in series, the transmission gear 762a is the head of the transmission gear 762e. A gear train (gear train) having 1 as a tail is formed.

Therefore, for example, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 39A, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the leading transmission gear 762a to the trailing transmission gear 762e, and the rotational driving force is transmitted to the trailing transmission gear 762e. The drive body 761 in which the driven gear 761a is meshed with the transmission gear 762e is rotated in one direction.

When the drive body 761 is rotated in one direction, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is reduced, and the intermediate member 733 is lowered by its own weight. Along with this, the actuated shaft 732b of the swing member 732 supported by the action hole 733a of the intermediate member 733 can also be lowered, so that the swing member 732 moves downward on its tip side due to its own weight. It is oscillated (rotated) in the direction of displacement to (see FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c)).

Further, when the above-mentioned drive body 761 is rotated in one direction, the position of the sliding pin 761c in the vertical direction is raised. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed up by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is raised (sliding displacement upward) (see FIGS. 39 (b) and 39 (c)).

On the other hand, when the drive motor 763 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 39 (c), the drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction. In this case, the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b is increased and the interposing member 733 is raised, so that the acting shaft 732b of the swinging member 732 is pushed up by the working hole 733a of the interposing member 733 and shakes. The moving member 732 is swung (rotated) in a direction that displaces its tip side upward.

Further, when the above-mentioned drive body 761 is rotated in the other direction, the vertical position of the sliding pin 761c is lowered. As a result, the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 is pushed down by the sliding pin 761c, and the protruding member 735 is lowered (sliding displacement downward).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42, details of the structure for displacing the projecting member 735 and the swinging member 732 in the rotating member 730 will be described.

40 (a) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged in the first rotation position, and FIG. 40 (b) is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged in the second rotation position. is there. In addition, in FIGS. 40A and 40B, the sliding wall 733c and the protruding member 735 of the intermediate member 733 are slid in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position or the second rotation position. Hole 735b is schematically illustrated by an alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 has a cam surface that comes into contact with the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R1) at (position P1) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam surface (position P2) is in contact with the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R2) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously decrease from the position P1 to the position P2.

As described above, the sliding wall 733c has its bottom surface (the lower surfaces of FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)) in the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the interposition member 733, FIG. 40). It is formed in a straight line along (a) and 40 (b) in the left-right direction). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intermediate member 733) is moved from the top to the maximum when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. It is continuously lowered to the lower side, and when the drive body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously raised from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

The sliding hole 735b includes a curved portion 735b1 extending from one end side of the sliding hole 735b (right side in FIG. 40 (a)) to a predetermined range, and the other end of the sliding hole 735b from the end of the curved portion 735b1. It is formed from a straight portion 735b2 extending in a range up to the side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)).

The curved portion 735b1 is formed by being curved in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the drive body 761 in a state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position. Further, in the first rotation position, the sliding pin 761c is located on one end side of the sliding hole 735b. Therefore, while the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (that is, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1), the drive body 761 slides from the drive body 761. The driving force is not transmitted to the moving hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735). That is, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b is not changed, so that the protruding member 735 is maintained in the state of being stopped at the lowermost position.

The rotation position where the drive body 761 is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the first rotation position (that is, the rotation position where the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and reaches the straight portion 735b2) is set to the "predetermined rotation position". ".

The straight portion 735b2 is formed in a straight line along the horizontal direction (direction orthogonal to the direction of slide displacement of the protruding member 735, the left-right direction in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b)). Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding hole 735b (that is, the protruding member 735) is such that the driving body 761 is in the second rotation position due to the action of the sliding pin 761c while the sliding pin 761c passes through the straight portion 735b2. When it is rotated toward, it is continuously raised from the bottom to the top, and when the drive body 761 is rotated toward the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the top to the bottom.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position (see FIG. 40B), the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 and is predetermined on the straight portion 735b2. It is located at the position (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1).

That is, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 and then enters the straight portion 735b2, and the end (sliding) of the straight portion 735b2. After sliding toward the other end side of the moving hole 735b (left side in FIG. 40 (a)), the direction is changed at the end, and the straight portion 735b2 is slid toward the curved portion 735b1, but the curved portion 735b1. It is stopped immediately before entering (that is, on the straight portion 735b2). As a result, as will be described later, the driving force required for the drive motor 763 can be suppressed.

41 and 42 are schematic front views of the rotating member 730, showing a transition state when the protruding member 735 is slidably displaced and the rocking member 732 is swung. Note that in FIGS. 41 and 42, only a part of the configuration of the rotating member 730 is schematically shown. Further, in FIG. 41 (a), the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position, and in FIG. 41 (b), the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged in the predetermined rotation position is shown in FIG. 42 (a). 42 (b) shows a state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at a rotation position between a predetermined rotation position and a second rotation position, and FIG. 42B shows a state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position. Will be done.

In the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) (that is, the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position), the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position and the projecting member 735 is located at the lowermost position. Will be done. When the drive body 761 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position from this state, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually reduced from the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter, as shown in FIG. 41 (b) (FIG. 40). (See (a)), the intermediate member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swing member 732 is rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position. Therefore, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the stopped state is maintained at the lowermost position (that is, the same position as in FIG. 41A).

When the drive body 761 that has reached the predetermined rotation position (see FIG. 41 (b)) is further rotated toward the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is further increased as shown in FIG. 42 (a). By being reduced (see FIG. 40A), the interposition member 733 is lowered by its own weight, and accordingly, the swing member 732 is further rotated by its own weight in the direction of lowering its tip. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slid upward by pushing up the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 with the rotation of the drive body 761. To.

When the drive body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b is reduced to the radius R2, which is the minimum diameter, as shown in FIG. 42 (b). As a result (see FIG. 40B), the interposition member 733 is lowered to the lowermost position by its own weight, and the swing member 732 is further rotated by its own weight, and its tip is positioned at the lowermost position. On the other hand, the protruding member 735 is positioned at the uppermost position when the straight portion 735b2 is pushed up to the uppermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

Contrary to the case described above, when the drive body 761 is rotated in the opposite direction from the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) (that is, the state in which the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position), FIG. 42 (a) ), The cam diameter in the cam portion 761b is gradually increased from the radius R2 which is the minimum diameter (see FIG. 40B), so that the interposition member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is lifted upward. Along with this, the swing member 732 is rotated in the direction of raising its tip. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, the sliding pin 761c passing through the straight portion 735b2 of the sliding hole 735b is slid downward by pushing down the inner peripheral surface of the straight portion 735b2 as the driving body 761 rotates. To.

When the drive body 761 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a), the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b has not yet reached the maximum diameter r1 as shown in FIG. 41 (b). The upward lifting operation of the installation member 733 (sliding wall 733c) is continued, and along with this, the operation of rotating the swing member 732 in the direction of raising its tip is also continued. On the other hand, the projecting member 735 is positioned at the lowermost position when the straight line portion 735b2 is pushed down to the lowermost position by the sliding pin 761c.

When the drive body 761 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 41 (b) to the first rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 761 b is increased to the radius R1 which is the maximum diameter as shown in FIG. 41 (a). As a result (see FIG. 40A), the interposition member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position, and the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position accordingly. On the other hand, in the protruding member 735, since the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 of the sliding hole 735b, the driving force from the driving body 761 is not transmitted, and the position is at the lowermost position (that is, FIG. 41 (b). ) Is maintained in the stopped state.

As described above, according to the rotating member 730, the member 2 (the swinging member 732 and the protruding member 735) can be displaced by the drive motor 763 of 1.

Here, in the conventional product, when the two members are displaced by the one drive motor, the driving forces for driving the two members are overlapped, so that the load on the drive motor becomes large and the durability thereof decreases. There was a problem of inviting. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members are displaced alternately (one by one), the load of the drive motor can be reduced, but the state in which the two members are displaced together cannot be formed, and the effect of the displacement is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the rotating member 730, the first transmission means (cam portion 761b and the intermediate member 733) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the swing member 732 lowers the tip of the swing member 732. The load of the drive motor 763 in the section (the section in which the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position) is increased by raising the tip of the swing member 732 (the drive body 761 is first rotated from the second rotation position). It can be made smaller than the load of the drive motor 763 in the section to be rotated to the rotation position).

On the other hand, the second transmission means (sliding pin 761c and sliding hole 735b) that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 763 to the projecting member 735 is a section in which the projecting member 735 is slid and displaced downward (the drive body 761 is secondly rotated). The load of the drive motor 763 in the section where the drive motor 763 is rotated from the position to the first rotation position) is driven in the section where the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced upward (the section where the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). It can be smaller than the load of the motor 763.

That is, according to the rotating member 730, when the first transmission means has a relatively high load, the second transmission means has a relatively low load, and the first transmission means has a relatively high load. Can make the second transmission means a relatively low load. Therefore, since the load of the drive motor 763 can be distributed, the load of the drive motor 763 can be reduced and its durability can be improved.

Further, it is not necessary to displace the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 alternately (one by one), and a state in which the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 are both displaced can be formed, so that the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced. While trying to improve the effect, the effect of displacement of both members 732 and 735 can be improved.

Further, the first transmission means displaces the swing member 732 by interlocking the cam portion 761b and the sliding wall 733c, and the second transmission means displaces the protruding member 735 by interlocking the sliding pin 761c and the sliding hole 735b. It is displaced, and swings per unit displacement of the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c (that is, per unit rotation of the drive body 761) according to the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b. The amount of displacement of the member 732 and the protruding member 735 can be changed. In other words, the load of the drive motor 763 can be changed. Therefore, even when the drive state (supply power) of the drive motor 763 is kept constant, the displacement speeds of the swing member 732 and the projecting member 735 can be changed. As a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced while suppressing the load of the drive motor 763.

Further, it is a section for reducing the load of the drive motor 763 (in the first transmission means, a section for lowering the tip of the swing member 732 (a section for rotating the drive body 761 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position). In the second transmission means, the section in which the protruding member 735 is slid and displaced downward (the section in which the driving body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position) is gravitationally driven by the displacement of the swing member 732 or the protruding member 735. It is formed by having a displacement component downward in the direction, that is, by utilizing the displacement of the swing member 732 or the projecting member 735 due to its own weight. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b from becoming complicated. As a result, the cost of parts can be reduced. Further, by suppressing the complication of the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b and the shape of the sliding hole 735b, the displacement speed of the swing member 732 or the protruding member 735 can be easily kept constant, and the drive motor 763 can be increased accordingly. The burden can be suppressed.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the cam portion 761b in the first transmission means and the sliding pin 761c in the second transmission means are integrally formed, so that the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are arranged separately. Space for this can be eliminated, and the size of the rotating member 730 can be reduced accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where the cam portion 761b and the sliding pin 761c are formed separately, the displacement deviation of the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735 is suppressed, and the synchronization accuracy of both members 732 and 735 is improved. Can be enhanced.

Here, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position, that is, when the sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state is started, the drive motor 763 is affected by the inertial force. Since the load on the motor is increased, the initial speed may be slowed down and the effect of the effect may be hindered. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 735b1 is formed in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735, and in the curved portion 735b1, the protruding member 735 (sliding hole 735b) is formed from the driving body 761 (sliding pin 761c). ) Can be non-transmitted. Therefore, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1, the load on the drive motor 763 can be reduced and the rotation of the drive body 761 can be increased by that amount, so that the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be used. The upward slide displacement can be started smoothly.

On the other hand, while the sliding pin 761c passes through the curved portion 735b1 (that is, while the driving body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the predetermined rotation position), the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state. However, the swing member 732 is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the tip is lowered downward (see FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b)). Therefore, when the swing member 732 is swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, the driving force (load) of the drive motor 763 required for the swing can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to increase the momentum to the rotation of the drive body 761, so that the upward slide displacement of the protruding member 735 in the stopped state can be smoothly started.

Further, in this way, the swinging member 732 can be swung while the protruding member 735 is maintained in the stopped state, so that both the protruding member 735 and the swinging member 732 are stopped. This can be avoided and the effect of displacement can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the curved portion 735b1 is provided in the sliding hole 735b and the upward sliding displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the curved portion 735b1 is used to rotate the drive body 761. By giving momentum to the member, the protruding member 735 is smoothly displaced from the stopped state.

In this case, in the present embodiment, after the slide displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, the rotational drive of the drive body 761 is stopped before the sliding pin 761c enters the curved portion 735b1. That is, in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the second rotation position, the sliding pin 761c does not enter the curved portion 735b1 but at a predetermined position on the straight portion 735b2 (the end on the connection side with the curved portion 735b1). Positioned (see FIGS. 40 (b) and 42 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), but the pin of the crank member. In the structure in which the portion reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the center of rotation of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after changing the direction passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the amount of upward slide displacement of the protruding member 735 per unit rotation of the drive body 761 suddenly increases. The load on the drive motor 763 becomes excessive. Therefore, by stopping the rotation of the drive body 761 before the sliding pin 761c reaches the curved portion 735b1, it is possible to prevent the load of the drive motor 763 from becoming excessive.

Next, the elevating unit 800 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. 43 (a) is a front view of the elevating unit 800, FIG. 43 (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 43 (c) is a side view of the elevating unit 800. FIG. 44 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 800, and FIG. 45 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevating unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, the elevating unit 800 is arranged on the horizontally long rectangular base member 810 in front view arranged in front of the base member 510 in the upper united unit 500 and on the base member 810 so as to be able to elevate. The elevating member 820, the drive motor 891 that applies a driving force to the elevating member 820, the transmission gear 840 that transmits the driving force for the rotation of the drive motor 891, and one end of the base member 810 are pivotally supported. A link member 850 that is rotatably arranged around a shaft support by the rotation of the transmission gear 840, a slide member 860 that is connected to the link member 850 and is displaceable by the displacement of the link member 850, and a slide member 860 thereof. It is mainly provided with a transmission member 870 that transmits the slide displacement of the slide member 860 to the elevating member 820.

The base member 810 has sliding holes 811, 812, 813 formed through the central portion in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43B) in the front-rear direction, and shaft support pins 814 to 817 protruding in a columnar shape on the back surface side. It is formed mainly with and.

Each of the sliding holes 811, 812, 813 is a hole through which each of the sliding pins 861, 862, 863 of the slide member 860, which will be described later, is inserted to regulate the slide direction of the slide member 860, and is the direction of gravity (FIG. It is formed in the shape of an elongated hole that opens long in the 43 (b) vertical direction). Therefore, the slide member 860 can be slidably arranged along the longitudinal direction of each of the sliding holes 811, 812, 813.

The sliding holes 811 and 812, 813 are formed side by side, and a sliding hole 811 is formed in the central portion, and a sliding hole 812 and a sliding hole 813 are formed on both sides of the sliding hole 811. .. In other words, a sliding hole 811 is formed between the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813.

The shaft support pins 814 to 816 are protrusions that are inserted into the shafts of the gears 842 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 to be described later and rotatably support the gears 842 to 844, and are formed on the shafts of the gears 842 to 844. It is formed in a columnar shape with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the hole to be formed through.

The shaft support pin 817 is a protrusion that is inserted through a through hole 851 formed through one end of the link member 850, which will be described later, to rotatably support the link member 850, and has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 851. It is formed in a columnar shape.

As described above, the drive motor 891 is a drive source that applies a driving force to the elevating member 820. The drive motor 891 is arranged on the base member 810 via a back cover 892 formed of a plate-like body on the back side of the base member 810. The shaft of the drive motor 891 is inserted into a through hole 892a formed through the back cover 892, and is internally fitted into the shaft of the gear 841 of the transmission gear 840 via the through hole 892a. Therefore, when a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor 891, the gear 841 connected to the shaft of the drive motor 891 is rotated.

The transmission gear 840 is a gear train formed by connecting gears 844 to 844, and as described above, the gears 842 to 844 can rotate to shaft support pins 814 to 816 protruding toward the back surface of the base member 810. It is supported by. Therefore, when the gear 841 is rotated, the driving force thereof is transmitted to the terminal gear 844 via the gear 842 and the gear 843. Therefore, the terminal gear 844 can be rotated by driving the drive motor 891.

The gear 844 is formed with a protrusion 844a projecting in a cylindrical shape on the back surface side. The protrusion 844a is a protrusion for transmitting the driving force to the link member 850, which will be described later, and is formed so as to protrude at a distance where the tip thereof overlaps the link member 850 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 43).

The link member 850 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body. The link member 850 has a through hole 851 that penetrates circularly at one end, a transmission side sliding groove 854 that penetrates in a long hole shape substantially in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the link member 850 at the other end, and the through hole 851 and transmission. It is mainly provided with a connecting side sliding groove 853 formed between the side sliding grooves 854.

As described above, the through hole 851 is a through hole for rotatably supporting the link member 850 with respect to the base member 810 by inserting the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 inside. It is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the pin 817. Therefore, the link member 850 is connected to the base member 810 without falling off by inserting the shaft support pin 817 of the base member 810 into the through hole 851 and inserting the collar C3 from the back surface side and fastening the link member 850 with a screw or the like. Will be done.

At the edge of the through hole 851 of the link member 850, an annular portion 852 projecting in an annular shape is formed on the front side (the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 43B). The annular portion 852 is a gap forming member for forming a predetermined gap between the base member 810 and the link member 850 and rotatably accommodating the transmission gear 840 in the gap, and each of the transmission gears 840 The protrusion dimension is set to be larger than the thickness width of the gears 843 to 844.

Further, a torsion spring SP1 is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the annular portion 852. The torsion spring SP1 is formed by laminating a wire made of a metal material on a columnar spiral, and can apply an urging force in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the annular portion 852 is set to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the inner edge portion wound over the spiral of the torsion spring SP1. As a result, when the torsion spring SP1 is twisted, the state of being wound around the spiral of the torsion spring SP1 is broken, and the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is applied to the axial direction of the spiral portion of the torsion spring SP1 (the axial direction of the annular portion 852). ) Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the torsion spring SP1 has a relatively large cylindrical spiral portion, the annular portion 852 can suppress the spiral state from collapsing and stabilize the urging direction.

That is, the annular portion 852 not only forms a space for arranging the transmission gear 840 between the base member 810 and the link member 850, but also serves to stabilize the urging direction of the torsion spring SP1. Can be done.

One end of the torsion spring SP1 is engaged with a locking portion 855 protruding from the front side of the link member 850 in a hook shape, and the other end is engaged with a locking portion 818 protruding from the back side of the base member 810 in a hook shape. Engage. Therefore, the torsion spring SP1 can elastically deform its shape due to the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and apply an urging force to the link member 850 in the direction around the axis of the rotation axis.

The connecting side sliding groove 853 is an elongated hole through which the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 is inserted, and the width dimension of the inner peripheral surface in the lateral direction is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844a. Therefore, when the protrusion 844a is displaced by the rotation of the gear 844, the protrusion 844a can be displaced by sliding inside the connecting side sliding groove 853. As a result, the link member 850 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 851 as the protrusion 844a is displaced. The detailed displacement mode of the link member 850 will be described later.

The transmission side sliding groove 854 is a hole through which the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 is inserted to displace the slide member 860 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the link member 850, and the width dimension in the lateral direction thereof. Is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding pin 861. Therefore, the sliding pin 861 of the slide member 860 through which the sliding hole 811 of the base member 810 is inserted can be inserted into the inside of the transmission side sliding groove 854.

Further, by fastening the collar C3 to the tip of the shaft support pin 816 from the back side of the link member 850 with a screw or the like, the link member 850 and the slide member 860 can be connected to each other via the base member 810. Therefore, the slide member 860 arranged on the front side of the base member 810 can be slid and displaced by the rotational displacement of the link member 850 arranged on the back side of the base member 810.

The slide member 860 is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view, and the length dimension in the gravity direction is set to be smaller than the length dimension in the gravity direction of the base member 810. Therefore, when the slide member 860 and the base member 810 are overlapped in the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the slide member 860 from protruding outward from the outer edge portion of the base member 810. As a result, the overall outer shape of the elevating unit 800 in front view can be reduced.

The slide member 860 has a plurality of sliding pins 861 to 863 formed to protrude from the back surface side in a columnar shape, a plurality of slide side sliding holes 864 to 866 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and a circle protruding to the front side. It is mainly provided with two columnar protrusions 867.

As described above, the sliding pin 861 is inserted into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850, and can be displaced with the displacement of the transmission side sliding groove 854. The sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 are protrusions that regulate the displacement direction of the slide member 860, and are inserted into the sliding holes 812 and 813 of the base member 810, and the sliding pins 862 and the sliding pins 862 The collar C3 is fastened to the tip of the moving pin 863 from the back surface side of the base member 810 with screws or the like.

Therefore, the sliding pin 862 and the sliding pin 863 of the slide member 860 are inserted into the sliding holes 812 and the sliding holes 813 formed through the base member 810 in a straight elongated hole shape, so that the slide member 860 is inserted. It is made non-rotatable with respect to the base member 810 and is slidably connected to the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813 in the elongated hole direction. As a result, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 851, so that the slide member 860 can be displaced in the direction of gravity (the long hole direction of the sliding hole 812 and the sliding hole 813).

The plurality of slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866 are holes into which the protrusions 871a to 871c of the second slide member 871 described later are inserted, and are formed in a long hole shape long in the gravity direction and have a width dimension in the lateral direction. It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the protrusions 871a to 871c.

The transmission member 870 is a member arranged on the front side of the slide member 860, and meshes with racks 872 extending in the direction of gravity and arranged in pairs on the target and rack gears on the racks 872. Each pinion gear 873 is mainly provided with a second slide member 871 arranged between the pinion gears 873.

The rack 872 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the base member 810. Further, the rack 872 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the central portion of the base member 810. A rack gear 872a is engraved on the opposite side surface of each rack 872, and is meshed with a pinion gear 873 described later.

The pinion gear 873 is rotatably pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 and is meshed with the rack gear 872a of the rack 872. Therefore, when the slide member 860 is slid and displaced in the direction of gravity, the pinion gear 873 is also displaced in the direction of gravity. At this time, the pinion gear 873 is rotatably supported by the slide member 860 and meshed with the rack gear 872a, so that the pinion gear 873 is rotated along with the displacement of the slide member 860.

The second slide member 871 includes an upright portion 871e formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view and bent toward the front side at a lower end portion, and rack gears 871d engraved on both side surfaces in the left-right direction. It is mainly provided with a plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c that project in a columnar shape on the back surface side.

The erecting portion 871e is a wall portion to which the elevating member 820 described later is fastened to the elevating tip surface thereof, and a connecting hole 871e1 for inserting a screw inside the elevating member 820 and fastening the elevating member 820 to the tip portion thereof penetrates. It is formed. Therefore, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened.

Further, the upright portion 871e is a gap forming portion for forming a gap between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810 and arranging the decorative member 830 described later in the gap, and is a gap forming portion in the front-rear direction of the decorative member 830. The vertical dimension is set to be larger than the thickness of. As a result, the decorative member 830 can be arranged between the elevating member 820 and the base member 810.

The rack gear 871d is a tooth contact surface that meshes with the pinion gear 873 described above, and is engraved on both the left and right side surfaces of the second slide member 871. That is, the length dimension of the second slide member 871 in the left-right direction is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension between the two pinion gears 873.

As described above, the plurality of protrusions 871a to 871c are inserted into the slide side sliding holes 864 to 866 of the slide member 860, and each slide from the back side of the slide member 860 to the tip end side of the protrusions 871a to 871c. The collar C4 is inserted inside the side sliding holes 864 to 866 and fastened with screws or the like. As a result, the second slide member 871 is rotatable with respect to the slide member 860 and is held slidably along the longitudinal direction of each of the slide-side sliding holes 864 to 866.

Therefore, when the slide member 860 is displaced, the pinion gear 873 is rotated as described above, and the second slide member 871 that meshes with the pinion gear 873 can be slid-displaced along with the rotation. Therefore, since the second slide member 871 slides and displaces with respect to the slide member 860 in the direction of gravity, the second slide member 871 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 at a displacement speed faster than the displacement speed of the slide member 860 and slides. The displacement distance can be made larger than that of the member 860. Therefore, the size of the elevating unit 800 as a unit can be reduced, and the displacement speed and the displacement distance of the elevating member 820 fastened to the second slide member 871 can be suppressed from becoming small.

As described above, the elevating member 820 is a member that is displaced up and down with the displacement of the second slide member 871, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view. The elevating member 820 includes a protrusion 821 that projects toward the back surface side.

The protrusion 821 is a protrusion connected to the upright portion 871e of the second slide member 871, and is formed at a position facing the connecting hole 871e1 of the upright portion. Further, a fastening hole 821a for screwing is formed on the protruding tip surface, and a screw inserted into the connecting hole 871e1 can be fastened through the fastening hole 821a. As a result, the second slide member 871 and the elevating member 820 can be fastened and fixed.

A cover member 880 and a decorative member 830 are arranged on the front side of the transmission member 870. The cover member 880 is a plate member that regulates the displacement of the transmission member 870 to the front side, whereby the transmission member 870 can be prevented from being displaced to the front side and colliding with the decorative member 830.

The decorative member 830 is formed in a shape imitating the title or logo of the game machine, and an LED that emits light is arranged on the back side. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of interest by emitting light from the title, logo, or the like on the player side.

Next, the movable mode of the elevating unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52.

FIG. 46 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 47 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 48 is a front view of the elevating unit 800 in the third state. .. 49 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the first state, FIG. 50 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the second state, and FIG. 51 is a rear view of the elevating unit 800 in the third state. .. FIG. 52 (a) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the first state, and FIG. 52 (b) shows the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member in the second state. FIG. 52 (c) is a front view of the transmission member 870, the slide member 860, and the link member 850 in the third state.

The first state of the elevating unit 800 is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position and is arranged on the front side of the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the third state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is located at the uppermost position. It is a state in which it is located at the lowermost position and is arranged below the decorative member 830 and the base member 810, and the second state is a state in which the elevating member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the first state and the third state. is there.

Further, in FIG. 51, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 that can be placed at the end farthest from the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and a reference numeral of the virtual line KS3 is given. ..

As shown in FIGS. 46, 49 and 52 (a), when the elevating unit 800 is located in the first state, the other end side of the link member 850 (the side where the transmission side sliding groove 854 is formed). Is located above the one end side (the side where the through hole 851 is formed) in the direction of gravity. In this case, in the transmission member 870, the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the upper end of the rack 872, and the pinion gear 873 is meshed with the lower end of the second slide member. That is, the second slide member 871 is in a state of being positioned upward. Therefore, the elevating member 820 connected to the second slide member 871 is also in a state of being positioned upward.

Further, in the first state, the virtual line KS1 connecting the shaft of the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 and the protrusion 844a for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor 891 to the link member 850 and the shaft of the through hole 851 of the link member 850. The position is orthogonal to the virtual line KS2 connecting the intermediate position of the connecting side sliding groove 853 in the lateral direction (see FIG. 49).

That is, in the first state, the link member 850 and the gear 844 at the end of the transmission gear 840 are in a dead center relationship. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be held by the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850 and the protrusion 844a of the gear 844. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 891 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the link member 850 from being displaced by the load of the elevating member 820. As a result, the first state can be maintained without applying electric power to the elevating unit 800 in the first state, so that energy consumption can be reduced.

When electric power is applied to the drive motor 891 from the state shown in FIGS. 46, 49 and 52 (a) and the driving force for rotation acts on the drive motor 891, as described above, the gears 843 to 844 of the transmission gear 840 rotate. The driving force is transmitted. The position of the protrusion 844a of the terminal gear 844 is displaced as the rotation is driven. The protrusion 844a is inserted and connected to the inside of the connecting side sliding groove 853 of the link member 850. Therefore, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 with the displacement of the protrusion 844a.

When the link member 850 is rotationally displaced, the slide member 860, which is connected by inserting the sliding pin 861 into the transmission side sliding groove 854 of the link member 850, is slidably displaced. As a result, the pinion gear 873 of the transmission member 870 pivotally supported by the protrusion 867 of the slide member 860 can be displaced. Therefore, the pinion gear 873 can be rotated by the rack gear 872a formed on the rack 872 according to its displacement. Therefore, the second slide member 871 disposed between the two pinion gears 873 can be slidably displaced. As a result, the elevating member 820 can be displaced.

As shown in FIGS. 47, 50 and 52 (b), in the elevating unit 800 in the second state, the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851 by rotating the drive motor 891. It is said that it is in a state of being. Therefore, the elevating member 820 can be displaced downward from the first state with respect to the base member 810.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 48, 51 and 52 (c). The elevating unit 800 in the third state is in a state in which the drive motor 891 is further rotated from the second state and the link member 850 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the through hole 851. Therefore, similarly to the displacement from the first state to the second state, the elevating member 820 can be displaced with respect to the base member 810 below the second state.

In this case, the elevating member 820 is arranged at a position adjacent to the lower side of the decorative member 830. Therefore, the title and logo of the game machine formed on the decorative member 830 can be visually recognized by the player. Further, since the elevating member 820 is adjacent below the decorative member 830, the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 can be combined to form one pattern (character). That is, by displacing the elevating unit 800 from the first state to the third state of the initial position, it is possible to display a pattern (character) in which the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830 of the elevating unit 800 are combined in front of the game area. it can.

Further, in the third state, the sliding pins 861 to 863 of the slide member 860 are located at the descending ends of the sliding holes 81 to 813 of the base member 810. Therefore, since the load of the elevating member 820 can be held by each of the three sliding pins 861 to 863, it is possible to suppress the load of the elevating member 820 from acting on the protrusion 844a of the gear 844 of the transmission gear 840. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gear 844 from being damaged.

Next, the united state of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61.

First, a state in which each movable unit is displaced and each movable unit is displaced to the central portion of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a front view of the operating unit 200 in the combined state. FIG. 54 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 200 on the LIV-LIV line of FIG. 53.

In the combined state shown in FIG. 53, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the central portion, and the elevating member of the elevating unit 800. The 820 is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the base member 810. In this way, by bringing each member (elevation base 720, rotating member 435, 455, and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (protruding unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) close to each other, one pattern (elevation unit 700, slide unit 400, and elevating unit 800) is formed. It can be visually recognized by the player as the title, logo, character, etc. of the game machine 10.

In addition, each movable unit is formed in a shape in which each member imitates a pattern. For example, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are formed in a shape imitating the wings of an animal, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700 are formed in a bow shape, and the elevating unit 800. The elevating member 820 is formed in a shape imitating the title of the game machine.

Further, as described above, since the elevating unit 800 can form one pattern (character) by combining the elevating member 820 and the decorative member 830, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 435 in the combined state (overhanging state). The pattern (character) of 1 can be formed by combining 455, the elevating member 820, and the decorative member 830.

That is, the elevating unit 800 not only forms one display surface by combining the elevating base 820 and the decorative member 830, but also other movable units (protruding unit 700 and slide unit 400) arranged in the operation unit 200. Can be combined with and used as one display surface. As a result, a plurality of display forms can be formed by making the displacement states of the movable units (elevating unit 800, projecting unit 700, and slide unit 400) arranged in the operating unit 200 different, which is interesting to the player. Can be given.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the operating unit 200 in the combined state, a part of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is attached to the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction of FIG. 54). It is placed in an overlapping position. That is, the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. The elevating member 820 is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 54) of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 (see FIG. 54).

In other words, the operation unit 200 is formed to include a protrusion unit 700, a slide unit 400, and an elevating unit 800 that are displaceably formed at the retracted position and the united (extended) position, and the elevating member 820 is formed. The unit 700 and the slide unit 400 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the protruding unit 700, the slide unit 400, and the elevating unit 800 of the three movable units can be displaced to form one pattern, a larger pattern (character) can be formed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly. it can.

In this case, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the projecting position. It does not come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. That is, when the members are in contact with each other at the overhanging position, or when there is a possibility of contact with each other, it is necessary to set the elevating member 820 in consideration of damage due to the impact at the time of contact. And since it is not in contact with the rotating members 435 and 455, its displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later elevating member 820 is displaced so as to catch up with the starting rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 at the overhanging position, and an effect is produced when forming a pattern (character). Can be enhanced.

Further, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, when the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced, if the displacement operation is continued without stopping at the original stop position due to a failure or malfunction, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 is attached to the protruding member 735. It is possible to suppress contact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protruding member 735 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Here, when a plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are movable and united in the space at the center of the game machine (in front of the third symbol display device 81), the side surfaces thereof. There are game machines that collide with each other and coalesce. However, when the side surfaces collide and coalesce, the collision tends to form scratches on the collision surface. Therefore, there is a problem that the design of the movable unit is easily impaired.

Further, in order to suppress the formation of scratches on the collision surface, it is conceivable to slow down the speed of the collision, but since it is necessary to reduce the displacement speed of the movable unit, the speed of the uniting operation of the accessory is increased. It has gone down. There is a problem that the interest of the player is impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the plurality of movable units (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and protruding unit 700) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the movable unit is provided. The sides do not collide with each other when they are displaced and combined in the central space of the game machine. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the formation of scratches on the movable unit and prevent the design of the movable unit from being impaired.

Further, when the movable units are displaced to the central space of the game machine and combined, the side surfaces do not collide with each other, so that the speed of displacement can be made constant at the time of the displacement of the united. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the speed of the uniting operation of the characters, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the elevating unit 800 and the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 are two-stage racks (the elevating unit 800 is a pinion gear between the rack 872 and the second slide member 871. The slide unit 400 is configured via a first side pinion gear 432 between the first member 431 and the second member 433 (see FIG. 13), and thus the conventional one-stage. The speed of displacement operation can be improved compared to the rack of the type (a form consisting of only a rack and a pinion). Therefore, by increasing the displacement speed, each operation unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) can be improved. As a result, the time during which the player can visually recognize the union operation can be shortened, so that the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

Here, if each movable unit (elevating unit 800, slide unit 400, and projecting unit 700) is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, the dimensions in the front-rear direction increase and the size increases. If the front-rear direction dimensions of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are made smaller (thinner) in order to suppress the front-rear direction dimension, it becomes difficult to secure the configuration.

On the other hand, since the elevating member 820 includes a second slide member 871 formed so as to project to the same side as the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 in the front-rear direction, the whole (elevating member 820, rotation). The front-rear direction dimension of the member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455) is suppressed to reduce the size of the game machine 10 in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear direction dimension of the elevating member 820 is increased to increase its rigidity. Can be secured.

Further, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is arranged at a position protruding toward the front side by the second slide member 871, and the second slide member 871 and the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged in the front-rear direction. It is arranged at an overlapping position. As a result, the space on the back surface side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 can be increased, and the width of the elevating unit 800 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 54) can be reduced. That is, by arranging the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 at the same positions in the front-rear direction as the second slide member 871 having a small width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 53 left-right direction), the elevating unit 800 and the slide unit 400 It is possible to reduce the width of the bulge in the front-rear direction while suppressing the interference with and (see FIG. 54). Since the second slide member 871 is formed to have a small width in the left-right direction, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be prevented from intersecting with the displacement locus, so that the second slide member 871 and the rotating member 871 can be separated from each other. Collision can be suppressed during displacement (see virtual line KS3 in FIG. 51).

Next, the displacement mode when each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. 55 to 58 are front views of the operating unit 200. In addition, in FIGS. 55 to 58, the displacement mode when each movable unit is displaced to the united state with FIG. 55 as the initial position is shown in order.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the present embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG. 55.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is slidably displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projecting unit 700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slidably displaced toward the central portion of the game machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. Rotationally displaced, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidably displaced downward. In the third operation, the protruding member 835 of the protruding unit 800 is slid upward and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced downward.

First, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the first operation is performed by the projecting unit 700 sliding displacement of the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced upward. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is as described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to be the same.

The second operation is performed in the middle of displacement of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 with respect to the base member 710. Therefore, the end timing of the displacement operation in which the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 can be made substantially the same as the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating member 720.

As described above, in the slide members 430 and 450, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced as they are slid and displaced. Therefore, the rotation angles of the rotating members 435 and 455 are set to the center position of the game board 13. (FIG. 57, center position in the left-right direction) is rotationally displaced at a symmetrical angle.

Here, the first member and the second member, which are formed so as to be linearly displaceable between the retracted position and the united (overhanging) position, are provided, and the first member and the second member are displaced to the united position, respectively. There is a gaming machine that makes the player visually recognize as one character by associating (integrating) the first member and the second member with each other or bringing them into contact with each other.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, if the structure is such that the first member and the second member are displaced to the united (overhanging) position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, they are displaced to the united position while being displaced from each other. May interfere. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the displacements of the respective members. Therefore, it takes a long time to form the character, and the displacement is extended. , The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 is displaced with respect to the base member 710 in a linear displacement, so that the elevating base 720 is arranged at the united position and the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400. Since the 455 is arranged at the united position by being rotationally displaced from the retracted position, the rotating members 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged on the elevating base 720 interfere with each other during the displacement to the united position. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the character is formed is shortened and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to.

Further, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus that does not intersect with the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 that is linearly displaced, and the end position of the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is the displacement of the elevating base 720. It is set at a position adjacent to the end position of the locus. That is, with respect to the displacement locus on the straight line of the elevating base 720, the rotation locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is a rotation locus having at least a displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720, and the rotation locus is united (overhanging). ) The displacement component in the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 is set to decrease as it is displaced to the position.

As a result, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be made into a displacement locus that wraps around from the outside with respect to the displacement locus of the elevating base 720. Therefore, by rotationally displacing the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set as a displacement locus that avoids the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 700 that linearly displaces the elevating unit 700. be able to. Therefore, even if the displacement timings of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the elevating base 720 deviate from each other, the trajectories of the rotating members 435 and 455 do not intersect each other, so that the members can be prevented from interfering with each other. As a result, the displacement of the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 and the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 can be performed at the same time, so that the time until the pattern (character) is formed can be shortened. The production effect can be enhanced.

Further, the displacement locus of the rotating members 435 and 455 becomes a displacement locus that wraps around the displacement locus of the elevating base 720 from the outside, so that the outer shape in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevating base 720 of the slide unit 700 that is linearly displaced. Is increased, it is possible to easily suppress interference with the rotating members 435 and 455. Therefore, the elevating base 720 can be increased in size.

As described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are arranged on the base members 434 and 454 that can be slidably displaced. That is, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, and are displaced to the coalescing (overhanging) position. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a curved locus on the rotating members 435 and 455. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the rotating member 730 during the displacement to the united position.

That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 can rotate in relation to the projecting unit 700 while moving to the united (overhanging) position due to the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the rotation is moved to the united position. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with the projecting unit 700 instead of moving, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed.

Here, when only the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced, the position of the rotating shaft is fixed. Therefore, when the rotating shaft of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set at the end of the rotating members 435 and 455. In addition, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated, the end portion on the opposite side of the rotating shaft is only rotationally displaced, so that it is difficult to set a large displacement distance of the elevating base 720. Further, when the rotation axis of the rotating members 435 and 455 is set at the center of the rotating members 435 and 455, the tip of the rotating member collides with the rear case 300 when the rotating member is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position. , It is difficult to dispose the rotating member in the retracted position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating shafts of the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed at the center positions of the rotating members 435 and 455, and the rotating shafts are formed on the base members 434 and 454 that can be slidably displaced. Since they are connected, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be operated by combining linear displacement and rotational displacement. Therefore, by applying a linear displacement when rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, it is possible to prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 arranged at the retracted position from colliding with the rear case 300 when the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotationally displaced. The displacement distance can be set large.

Further, since the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the retracted position is referred to as the posture in the combined position. Can be specified independently. That is, when the rotating members 435 and 455 are only rotated and displaced between the retracted position and the united position, the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position is defined by the rotation angle from the overhanging position. Since the rotating members 435 and 455 are combined with the rotational displacement and the linear displacement, the posture at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the combined position by the amount of the linear displacement. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position can be increased.

In other words, the longitudinal direction of the rotating members 435 and 455 at the retracted position (position where the base members 434 and 454 are arranged outside) is parallel to the longitudinal direction of the retracted space at the retracted position. On the other hand, at the united position (the position where the base members 434 and 454 are displaced to the center), by rotating, the direction is substantially the same as the longitudinal direction of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the degree of freedom in the posture of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the retracted position can be increased, and in the combined position, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be projected from the central portion of the game board 13.

Further, here, since the third symbol display device 81 formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape is arranged in the central portion of the game machine 10 (operation unit 200), as the size of the third symbol display device 81 increases. , The space on both the left and right sides becomes smaller. Therefore, in a configuration in which the rotating members 435 and 455 are formed in a horizontally long shape and arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (overhanging) position to form a character together with the protruding unit 700, a large character cannot be formed. The production effect cannot be fully exhibited. That is, the game area is formed vertically, while the third symbol display device 81 is formed horizontally, so that one side and the other side of the third symbol display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed. , It is difficult to secure the arrangement space for the members. Therefore, in order for the rotating members 435 and 455 to not protrude into the display area of the third symbol display device 81 at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 are arranged in a horizontally long posture at the united (overhanging) position, while they are arranged in a vertically long posture at the retracted position. By effectively utilizing the arrangement space of the members on one side or the other side of the third symbol display device 81, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be enlarged by that amount, and as a result, they are formed together with the projecting unit 700 at the united position. The pattern (character) can be made larger.

That is, the evacuation space for the rotating members 435 and 455 to retract is reduced to secure the space for the central portion (third symbol display device 81) of the game machine 10, and at the combined position, the evacuation space is moved to the central portion of the game machine 10. The amount of overhang can be secured. Therefore, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 and the projecting unit 700 can be enlarged.

Further, as described above, the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably connected to the base members 434 and 454 so that the rotational displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the linear displacement of the base members 434 and 454 are synchronized. Therefore, the relative positional accuracy of the rotating member with respect to the protruding unit 700 can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the rotating members 435 and 455 from interfering with the projecting unit 700 during the displacement to the overhanging position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size together with the projecting unit 700 at the united (overhanging) position. The character to be formed can be made larger. For example, even in a relatively narrow area where it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member 435 is in such an area. The rotating members 435 and 455 can be formed in a large size while setting the retracted positions of, 455.

Further, the projecting unit 700 includes a swing member 732 on the rotating member 730. In the second operation, the swing member 732 is in a state of being displaced upward with respect to the rotating member 730, so that the swing member 732 can be brought into close contact with the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. Therefore, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by abutting on the swinging member 732. In this case, since the tip of the swing member 732 is displaced upward, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be reliably brought into contact with the swing member 732. A detailed description of the contact of the swing member 732 with the rotating members 435 and 455 will be described later.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700. That is, only the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 is performed at the end of the operation of each movable unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700, and elevating unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 can displace the swinging member 732 according to its displacement.

Therefore, by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700, the tip of the projecting member 735 is displaced to the back surface side of the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800. Therefore, since the projecting unit 700 and the elevating unit 800 are connected to each other, the player can visually recognize the state in which each movable unit is integrated (combined state), and can give a hobby by the displacement of the accessory.

Further, since the swing member 732 can be displaced downward with the displacement of the projecting member 735, between the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide members 430 and 450 in the slide unit 400 and the swing member 732. The gap (space) can be made larger than that in the second operation.

As a result, it is possible to secure a displaceable space when the rotating members 435 and 455 (sliding members 430 and 450) are in the combined state. As a result, in the operating unit 200 in the combined state, the rotating members 435 and 455 (slide members 430 and 450) can be further rotated, and the variation of the displacement mode in the combined state of the operating unit 200 can be increased. ..

That is, when the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is displaced to the overhanging position, the swing member 732 is kept away from the rotating member 730 to exert a role of receiving the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455, and then. Displaces the swing member 732 in a direction close to the rotating member 730, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space of the rotating members 435 and 455. The displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 produces an effect. Can be enhanced.

Here, an example of a pattern (character) formed by combining each operation unit (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is shown. For example, when each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) of each operation unit is combined, a shape imitating a bow and an arrow is formed. In this case, by forming the rotating members 435 and 455 into a shape imitating a bow, the rotating members 435 and 455 are operated by utilizing the gap between the swinging member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 described above, and the bow is formed. It is possible to form a state in which the bow is pulled by an arrow or a state in which the arrow is released from the bow and the bending is released. The rotating members 435 and 455 are part of both ends of the bow portion, and the elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) is a part of the rear end side (opposite side of the arrowhead) of the arrow, and the elevating member 820. Is the central portion of the bow, and the decorative member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is a part of the tip side (arrowhead side) of the arrow.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a case where the stop position of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is displaced in the excess direction will be described. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. Note that FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) show transition states when the stop position of the left slide member 430 shifts in the excess direction and the left rotation member 435 and the swing member 732 collide with each other.

Further, in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), only the case where the left rotating member 435 collides with the swing member 732 will be described, and when the right rotating member 455 collides with the swing member 732, the left rotating member The 435 is considered to be the same as the case where the operating unit 200 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the center position in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 6), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 in the combined state are originally due to poor control, rattling of each member, or an error in the mounting position of the sensor, as shown in FIG. 59 (a). It was not stopped at the stopped position in the combined state, and there was a possibility that the side surfaces of the rotating members 435 and 455 collided with the swinging member 732 of the protruding unit 700. Therefore, there is a risk that the swing member 732 and each of the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with each other and the parts are damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotating member 730 on which the swinging member 732 is arranged is rotatably arranged with respect to the elevating base 720, and is therefore shown in FIG. 59 (b). As described above, by rotating the rotating member 730 with respect to the elevating base 720, the impact when the rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

That is, by rotating the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 with respect to the elevating base 720, not only the variation of the displacement mode of the projecting unit 700 can be increased, but also the left rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732 collide with each other. It can be suppressed from being damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the side surface of the left rotating member 435 collides with the swinging member 732 of the projecting unit 700 and the rotating member 730 is rotationally displaced with respect to the elevating base 720, The rocking member 732 arranged in pairs with the rocking member 732 that collides with the rotating member 435 rotates and comes into contact with the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450.

Therefore, after rotating the rotating member 730 to alleviate the impact of the collision between the rotating member 435 and the swinging member 732, a driving force for the rotating member 435 to further rotate is applied to the rotating member 455 of the right slide member 450. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to regulate that the rotating member 730 is further rotated.

That is, two sets of the swing member 732 and the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) are formed on the left and right, and when the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swing member 732 in one set, the corresponding With the contact, the swing member 732 is formed so as to be displaced to the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. Therefore, for example, in one set, the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is formed. When the swing member 732 is displaced beyond the reference position and abuts on the swing member 732, the swing member 732 is directed toward the rotary member 455 (rotary member 435) in the other set in accordance with the contact. It can be displaced. Therefore, in the other set, the swinging member 732 is brought into contact with the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), so that the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) is brought into contact with the swinging member 732 in the other set. The impact can be received not only by the rocking member 732 (rotating member 730) but also by the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) in the other set. As a result, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the rotating member 435 (rotating member 455) in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

Further, in this case, the rocking member 732 collides with the side surface of the portion of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) on the upper side in the gravity direction (upper side in FIG. 07 (b)) than the rotation axis, so that the rotating member 455 (rotation) When abutting on the member 435), a driving force can be applied in a direction opposite to the rotational moment acting on the axis of the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435), so that the rotating member 455 (rotating member 435) can be applied. ) Can be used to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730. Therefore, it is not necessary to supply electric power to regulate the rotation of the rotating member 730, so that the driving energy can be suppressed.

Next, a case where the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 of the slide unit 400 are displaced in the excess direction will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (a) and 60 (b) are front views of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the protruding unit 700. Note that FIGS. 60A and 60B show transition states when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 are displaced and the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732.

Here, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 deviate in the excess direction, the swing member 732 and the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with each other, and the swing member 732 or the rotating members 435 and 455. Was in danger of being damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swing member 732 is displaced downward by performing the above-mentioned third operation at the end timing of the second operation (the end timing of the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455). Therefore, when each of the rotating members 435 and 455 collides with the swinging member 732, the swinging member 732 can be displaced downward to alleviate the impact of the collision. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rocking member 732 or each of the rotating members 435 and 455 from being damaged.

Further, in this case, the impact when the rocking member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be used as a driving force for projecting the projecting member 735. Therefore, the drive motor 763 for driving the projecting member 735. The load can be reduced. That is, the impact when the swing member 732 and each of the rotating members 435 and 455 collide is transmitted to the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 via the sliding wall 733c, whereby the drive body 761 (see FIG. 40). Can act in the direction of rotation. As a result, the load on the drive motor 763 that drives the projecting member 735 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the third operation may be allowed to wait a predetermined time after the second operation is completed. In this case, when the stop positions of the slide members 430 and 450 shift in the excess direction and the swing member 732 collides with each of the rotating members 435 and 455, the drive that displaces the swing member 732 and the protruding member 735. The rotational resistance of the motor 763 makes it easy to stop the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 while displacementing the rocking member 732.

Further, since the load of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be applied in the rotation direction of the drive motor 763, the drive energy when driving the drive motor 763 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the displacement of each rotating member 435 and 455 in the third operation will be described. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are front views of each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 in the third operation, and the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700. Note that FIG. 61 (b) shows a state in which each of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation is displaced.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the gap between each of the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation and the rotating member 730 of the slide unit 400 is the gap of the rotating member 730 when the displacement of the third operation is performed. The swing member 732 is increased by being displaced downward (downward in FIG. 61A) with the displacement of the protruding member 735. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455 in the third operation can be further displaced as compared with the second operation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61B, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be rotated by further sliding-displace the base members 434 and 454 of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 toward the central portion of the game machine 10. It can be displaced toward the center of the game machine 10. As a result, it is possible to further give a sense of unity to the united (overhanging) state of the elevating member 820 and the rotating members 435 and 455 visually recognized by the player.

Next, the second united state of the operating unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68.

First, the displacement of the operating unit 200 to the second united state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 to 64 are front views of the operating unit 200. Note that FIGS. 62 to 64 show transition states in which each movable unit of the operating unit 200 projects to the position of the second united state. Further, FIG. 62 shows the operation unit 200 in the retracted (initial) position, FIG. 64 shows the operation unit 200 in the second united position, and FIG. 63 shows the operation unit 200 in the intermediate position between the retracted position and the second united position. However, each is illustrated.

Further, each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 700, and elevating unit 800) of the operating unit 200 described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 61. ) And the elevating member 820) at the united (overhanging) position will be referred to as the first united state below. Further, in the first united state, each movable unit of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as the first effect mode. It can be recognized by the player.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the operation unit 200 is arranged in the retracted position, the slide unit 400 is in the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 17A), and the upper united unit 500 is in the retracted position (FIG. 22 (a)). The lower united unit 600 is arranged at the retracted position (the position shown in FIG. 27A) at the position shown in). In the formation of the second united state by the operating unit 200, first, the base member 434 of the slide unit 400 is slidably displaced to the central portion of the game board 13, and the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. The state shown in FIG. 63 is formed by being displaced downward and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 being displaced upward. Next, the slide unit 400 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 18A), the upper union unit 500 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 22A), and the lower union unit 600 is in the overhanging position (position shown in FIG. 22A). By being displaced to the positions shown in FIG. 27 (c), the second united state shown in FIG. 64 is obtained.

In the second united state, each movable unit of the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, and lower united unit 600) is associated (integrated), and one pattern is used as the second effect mode. It can be recognized by the player. The pattern (character) formed in the second production mode is, for example, a pattern (character) that imitates Pegasus (a fantasy creature with wings on the body of a horse). In this case, the part forming the body portion of the Pegasus is the lower united unit 600, the part forming the head of the Pegasus is the upper uniting unit 500, and the part forming the wings of the Pegasus is the slide unit 400.

In the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 in the second united state, the base member 434 displaced so as to be slidable is displaced to the overhang position (the position shown in FIG. 18A) at the end of the slide. That is, the base member 434 in the first united state and the base member 434 in the second united state are arranged at different distances that are slidably displaced from the retracted position. Further, since the rotating member 435 is connected to the base member 434, the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged can be different between the first united state and the second united state.

Further, as described above, since the rotational displacement of the rotating member 435 is linked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434, the base member 434 is moved from the retracted position in the first united state and the second united state. The rotation angle (posture) of the rotating member 435 is arranged differently due to the difference in the slide displacement distance. In the present embodiment, the rotation angles (postures) of the rotating member 435 are arranged in different postures by about 180 degrees about the rotation axis in the first united state and the second united state.

As described above, the operating unit 200 is a tension of each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) of each operating unit (slide unit 400, protruding unit 700 and elevating unit 800). By the displacement to the protruding position, each member can be united to form one pattern (character).

That is, as the first effect mode, the operation unit 200 simply combines each member into the central space of the operation unit 200 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81) to form one pattern (character). Instead, as a second effect mode, each member can be combined in the central space of the operation unit 200 to form a pattern different from the first effect mode.

Therefore, since different patterns can be formed between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the player can visually recognize each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode depending on the effect, time, and the like. Can be made to. Therefore, since the variation of the production can be increased, it is possible to show the player various productions and give them a hobby.

Here, the first movable unit group composed of a plurality of movable units formed displaceably between the retracted position and the united (extended) position is formed displaceably between the retracted position and the extended position. A game machine including a second movable unit group including a plurality of movable units is known.

According to this game machine, when the movable units of the first movable unit group are arranged at the overhanging positions, each movable unit of the first movable unit group is associated (integrated) with one pattern (integrated). While making the player recognize the character) as the first effect mode, when each movable unit of the second movable unit group is arranged at the overhang position, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is associated with each other. (Integrated), another pattern (character) is made to be recognized by the player as a second effect mode. That is, in the first effect mode, each movable unit of the second movable unit group is retracted to the retracted position, while each movable unit of the first movable unit group is arranged at the overhanging position. A first pattern (character) is formed in the game area by each movable unit group of the movable unit group of the above, and in the second gaming state, each of the first movable units is retracted to the retracted position, while the second movable unit is retracted. By arranging each movable unit of the group at the overhanging position, the effect of forming a second character in the game area by each movable unit of the second movable unit group is performed.

In this case, it is effective that a larger pattern (character) can be formed in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each movable unit of the first movable unit group and each movable unit of the second movable unit group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (directing modes) are formed, the total number of movable units required to form the plurality of characters increases accordingly, and each movable unit is evacuated. Since the area (space) for keeping the movable unit is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each movable unit. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (directing mode).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, one movable unit and the second movable unit group (slide unit 400, upper united) of the first movable unit group (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700 and elevating unit 800) Since one of the movable units of the unit 500 and the lower united unit 600) is also used as a movable unit, the movable units required to form a plurality of (first and second) production modes are correspondingly used. The total number can be reduced, and each movable unit can be enlarged. As a result, each pattern (character) can be enlarged.

That is, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is a part of the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the second effect mode. Since it is also used as a part of the above, the number of movable units for forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be reduced accordingly. Therefore, since a space is created in the evacuation space at the inner edge of the rear case 300 (a space other than the central space in the evacuation state shown in FIG. 62 (the space in front of the third symbol display device 81)), each movable unit (slide). The unit 400, the upper united unit 500, the lower united unit 600, the protruding unit 700, and the evacuation unit 800) can be enlarged.

Further, since each member of each movable unit (rotating member 435, 455, upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730) and elevating member 820) can be enlarged, the first The pattern (character) formed by the effect mode and the second effect mode can be enlarged.

Here, as described above, the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 is a part of the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the first effect mode and the pattern (character) to be visually recognized by the player as the second effect mode. ), And if they are arranged at the same position in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, they are movable in common in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the member of the unit (rotating member 435) is used, which hinders the interest.

Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the members (rotating member 435) arranged at the same position, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 is a united (extended) position arranged when forming the first effect mode and a united (extended) position arranged when forming the second effect mode. Since the position is different from the position (out position), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the interest is hindered. Can be suppressed.

In other words, since the position where the rotating member 435 is arranged differs between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the pattern (character) formed by the first effect mode and the second effect mode. In addition, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being hindered.

Further, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the rotating member 435 can be arranged at different positions (extending positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode can be increased. It is possible to easily form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from.

Here, when the rotating member 435 is arranged in the same posture in the first united state and the second united state, the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to see this, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the rotating members 435 having the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount, and the first effect mode and the first effect mode are used. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the second effect mode.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the rotating member 435 when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode are different from each other. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the member 435 is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress that the interest is hindered. Further, it is possible to easily form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

Therefore, as described above, the rotating member 435 is arranged in a different position and in a different posture (rotation angle) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize that both the first effect mode and the second effect mode are used, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest.

That is, the rotating member 435 that is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode is in a state in which either the position or the posture arranged in the first effect mode and the second effect mode is different. There is a possibility that the player may recognize that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, but the rotating member 435 is the first effect. Since both the arranged position and the posture are different between the mode and the second effect mode, the player is informed that the rotating member 435 is also used in the first united state and the second united state. It can be difficult to see.

Further, the rotating member 435 is rotatably arranged on the base member 434 which is linearly displaced, so that the rotating member 435 is displaced in a manner in which the rotational displacement and the linear displacement are combined. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the overhang position and the posture (rotation angle) when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode.

Further, since the rotating member 435 is interlocked (synchronized) with the slide displacement of the base member 434 as described above, the relative position accuracy (posture) of the rotating member 435 with respect to the base member 434 can be improved. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be associated (integrated) and the entire body can be recognized by the player as a predetermined pattern (character).

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the rotating member 435, the rotating member 345 can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the pattern (character) formed in the second effect mode can be made larger. Can be transformed into. For example, even if there is an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the third symbol display device 81 in the width direction of the game area, the rotating member is in such an area. The rotating member 435 can be formed in a large size while setting the position of the retracted state of the 435.

In this case, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are arranged in the region so that the rotating members 435 of the base member 434 are overlapped with each other in the front view at the retracted position. Therefore, the other regions (conversion mechanism) of the base member 434 are increased accordingly. The size can be reduced in the front-back direction of the area where is not placed. Therefore, when the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 are linearly displaced, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, the displacement mode of the operation unit 200 forming the second united state will be described in detail. 65 (a) to 66 (b) are front views of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600. 67 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIa of FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 65 (b). It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIb. 68 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIIa of FIG. 66 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is a schematic view of FIG. 66 (b). It is a schematic diagram of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb.

It should be noted that FIGS. 65 (a) to 66 (b) show the displacement mode from the retracted state to the second united state in order. 65 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the retracted state, FIG. 65 (b) shows the slide unit 400 in the first state, and FIG. 66 (a) shows the slide unit 400 in the second state. The slide unit 400 in the retracted state is shown in the figure.

Further, the displacement from FIG. 65 (a) to the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) is performed by sliding displacement of the base member 434 of the slide unit 400. That is, in the initial displacement operation from the retracted position to the second united state, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are stopped, and the slide unit 400 is displaced to the first state.

FIG. 66 (a) shows the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 at the intermediate position of the displacement from the first state shown in FIG. 65 (b) to the second united state shown in FIG. 66 (b). It is a front view. Further, in the transition to the second state shown in FIG. 66A, the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are displaced while the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400 is continued from the first state. It is done by. That is, the transition from the first state to the second state is performed by displacement of the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 500, and the lower united unit 600 that form the pattern (character) of the second effect mode. Further, the transition from the second state to the second united state is performed by continuing the displacement operation from the first state to the second state.

Further, in FIGS. 65 to 68, the base member 510 of the upper uniting unit 500, the base member 610 of the lower uniting unit 600, and the rotating member 536 of the slide unit 400 are illustrated by chain lines for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 67 (a), in the retracted state (state in which the upper united unit 500 is arranged in the retracted position), the upper displacement member 530 is housed inside the base member 510. The lower uniting unit 600 is arranged at a position where the lower displacement member 640 overlaps the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction. Further, in the left slide member 430 of the slide unit 400, a part of the base member 434 is arranged on the back side of the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the lower displacement member 640. That is, the lower displacement member 640 is arranged between the rotating member 435 of the left slide member 430 and the base member 434.

The base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is formed of a front side base member 434b arranged on the front side and a back side base member 434a (see FIG. 13) arranged on the back side as described above. A step portion 434b2 recessed on the back surface side is formed on the lower side (lower side of FIG. 67B) of the shaft support hole 434b1 of the front side base member 434b.

The step portion 434b2 is a portion that forms a recess for suppressing interference between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600, and the lower side of the base member 434 below the step portion 434b2 is the entire back surface. By denting to the side, the gap between the rotating member 435 and the base member 434 can be increased.

That is, since the lower side of the base member 434 below the step portion 434b2 is formed by being recessed on the back surface side, the gap between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 can be increased, and the gap below the lower uniting unit 600 can be increased. The displacement member 640 can be arranged.

Further, since the thickness of the base member 434 on the lower side in the front-rear direction is reduced, the gap between the base member 434 and the lower displacement member 640 can be increased. Therefore, when the base member 434 is slidably displaced in the first state (the state shown in FIG. 65B) described later, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 and the base member 434 from coming into contact with each other.

On the other hand, on the upper side of the base member 434 above the step portion 434b2, transmission gears 437a to 437f (see FIG. 13), which are transmission means for transmitting the drive to the rotating member 435, can be arranged by increasing the thickness in the front-rear direction. It is said that.

As described above, the base member 434 is in a state in which the upper end side (upper side in FIG. 65) is connected to the base member 410 so as to be slidable and hangs down, and the lower end side (lower side in FIG. 65) is the rear case 300. Since it is slidably inserted between the guide member 419 (see FIG. 6), a force is applied when the base member 434 is slidably displaced in the left-right direction (FIG. 65 (a) left-right direction) toward the upper side. Where it is easy, since the thickness in the front-rear direction above the base member 434 can be increased, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the base member 434.

Further, at the retracted position (position in FIG. 65A), the back surface side of the connecting arm 650 of the lower uniting unit 600 is brought into contact with the plane between the step portion 434b2 and the shaft support hole 434b1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower united unit 600 in the retracted state from falling in the front-rear direction.

That is, in the lower uniting unit 600, since the lower displacement member 640 is formed long in the vertical direction, the connecting arm 650 and the base member 434 connected above the lower displacement member 640 are where the upper end portion is likely to fall in the front-rear direction. The upper end of the lower displacement member 640 can be prevented from falling in the front-rear direction, and the position of the lower unit 600 in the retracted position in the front-rear direction can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the base member 434 from coming into contact with the lower displacement member 640 when the base member 434 is slidably displaced to the first state.

As shown in FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b), when the left slide member 430 is displaced to the position of the first state, the rotating member 435 is rotationally displaced with the displacement of the base member 434. As a result, the rotating member 435 is rotated by the displacement of the base member 434 by a predetermined amount, so that the rotating member 435 and the lower uniting unit 600 can be positioned so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction, and the base member 434 and the lower unit 434 can be positioned below. The position may be such that the united unit 600 does not overlap in the front-rear direction.

That is, it does not overlap the lower base member 610 in the front-rear direction inside the region K2 (see FIG. 65B) surrounded by the base member 434, the rotating member 435, and the lower base member 610 of the lower uniting unit 600 in the front view. The lower displacement member 640 of the portion is arranged.

As described above, since the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 is formed long in the vertical direction, the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged inside the region K2 where the upper end portion is likely to tilt in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

In the first state, the base member 434 is an upper displacement member on the side (upper contact portion 533 side) separated from the connecting shaft 531 for transmitting the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 (rotational driving force). It is arranged at a position where it overlaps with 530 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, when the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 is displaced to the second state, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 from colliding with the rotating shaft 435a connecting the base member 434 and the rotating member 435.

That is, when the slide unit 400 and the upper uniting unit 500 are displaced from the retracted position at the same start time (timing), the upper displacement member 530 collides with the rotating shaft 435b of the rotating member 435. By delaying the start time for starting the downward displacement from the start time for the left slide member 430 to start the displacement, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 from colliding with the rotation shaft 435a.

Further, the downward displacement of the upper displacement member 530 to the overhang position is started when the base member 434 is located on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 630. As a result, it is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 630 from colliding with the side surface of the base member 434 when it is displaced.

That is, since the upper displacement member 530 is connected to the base member 510 only on one end side, the other end side (upper contact portion 533 side) is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. Further, as described above, the upper displacement member 530 is rotated downward and displaced as it slides and displaces in the left-right direction (center portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 66B) of the operating unit 200. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced while the base member 434 is slide-displaced to the center side of the upper displacement member 530, the other end side of the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to the back side of the front surface of the base member 434. Then, when it collides with the side surface of the base member 434, the upper displacement member 530 is displaced when the base member 434 is located on the back side of the upper displacement member 530, so that the base member 530 is displaced when the upper displacement member 530 is displaced. It is possible to suppress collision with the side surface of the member 434.

As shown in FIGS. 66A and 68A, in the second state between the first state and the second united state, the base member 434 of the left slide member 430 is further laterally oriented than in the first state. The slide is displaced to the right side (right side in FIG. 66A). Therefore, the rotating member 435, which is rotationally displaced (in conjunction with) according to the sliding displacement of the base member 434, is also rotationally displaced. As a result, one end of the rotating member 435 located on the lower uniting unit 600 side (left side in FIG. 65 (b)) of the rotating shaft 435a can be rotated to be positioned above the rotating shaft 435a. Therefore, the width of the region K2 in the left-right direction (FIG. 66 (a) left-right direction) is increased by sliding displacement of the base member 434, and the width of the region K2 is increased by rotating the rotating member 435 (FIG. 66 (Fig. 66)). a) The width in the vertical direction) can be increased.

As a result, when the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 is displaced, it is possible to prevent the upper end portion of the lower displacement member 640 from colliding with the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 when tilted in the front-rear direction.

Further, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 is displaced while maintaining a state of overlapping with the base member 434 in the front-rear direction. That is, when the displacement is performed from the first state to the second state, the base member 434 can be arranged on the back surface side of the upper displacement member 530. Therefore, as described above, the other end of the upper displacement member 530 ( It is possible to prevent the upper contact portion (533 side) from being displaced in the front-rear direction and colliding with the side surface of the base member 434.

In other words, the upper displacement member 530 is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the base member 434 in front view while being displaced from the first state to the second united state, so that the upper displacement member 530 is displaced to a position where the second united state is formed. It is possible to prevent the upper displacement member 530 from coming into contact with the side surface of the base member 434 before the displacement.

Further, since the overhanging position of the upper displacement member 530 is installed between the base member 434 and the rotating member 435 facing each other, the rotating member 435 is positioned closer to the front side so that the player can easily see the upper displacement member 530. The displacement member 530 and the rotating member 435 can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily see the whole as a predetermined pattern (character).

As shown in FIGS. 66 (b) and 68 (b), in the second united state, the upper displacement member 530 of the upper united unit 500 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower united unit 600 are in contact with each other. At the same time, a part of the rotating member 435 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 68B) of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower uniting unit 600.

As a result, the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, and the lower displacement member 640 can be arranged at close positions so that the player can visually recognize them as one pattern (character).

Here, the rotating member 435 has different overhang positions and different postures (rotation angles) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is necessary to form a plurality of stopped states. The structure becomes complicated, and the stopped state (arrangement position and posture) tends to vary accordingly. Therefore, when the rotating member 435 of the slide unit 400 comes into contact with the upper displacement member 530 of the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower displacement member 640 of the lower uniting unit 600 when forming the second effect mode, the rotating member 435 If the arrangement position or posture does not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, while if the arrangement position or orientation of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper uniting unit 500 is formed. The unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 are pushed out to cause a displacement. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship between the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600 in the united state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating member 435 has each movable unit (slide unit 400, upper united unit 500, lower united unit 600, protruding unit 700) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode. , Elevating unit 800) movable members (upper displacement member 530, lower displacement member 640, elevating base 720 (rotating member 730), elevating member 820) are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction, and each movable unit is viewed from the front. Since it overlaps with a part of the movable member of the above, even if the stopped state (extension or posture) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode varies, the relationship between each movable unit and each movable member. It can be easier to maintain sex. That is, by partially overlapping in the front view, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 is insufficient, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the movable members of each movable unit and the position in the front-rear direction. By making the difference, even if the displacement of the rotating member 435 becomes excessive, it is possible to prevent each movable member of each movable unit from being pushed out and causing a misalignment. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship of each movable unit with each movable member in the combined state.

Further, in the second effect mode, the upper contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640 are brought into contact with each other and arranged, and the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper contact portion 533. The upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the pattern (character) formed in the second united state.

That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be positioned at the same position in the front-rear direction, so that the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the combined (overhanging) state can be placed at the same position. Since the pattern (character) formed in the second production mode can be easily visually recognized by the player because it can be integrated and easily visually recognized by the player.

In this case, as described above, the rotating member 435 is likely to vary in the stopped state (arrangement position and posture), and the upper displacement member is placed at the stopped position when the rotating member 435 forms the second effect mode. In the structure that abuts on the 530 and the lower displacement member 640, if the arrangement position and the posture of the rotating member 435 do not reach the target position, a gap is formed between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 and they are associated (integrated). ) Is inhibited.

Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the rotating member 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are pushed out to cause a misalignment, so that the association (integration) is hindered. That is, in the second effect mode, the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other. Therefore, if the rotating member 435 is in contact with the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640, the rotating member When the arrangement position or posture of the 435 exceeds the target position, the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 is pushed out. In this case, since the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 in the state of being in contact with each other are displaced from each other, not only the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are displaced with respect to the rotating member 435, but also the position is displaced. Each member is displaced. Therefore, when the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are in contact with each other at the united (overhanging) position, the rotating member 435 is arranged in front of the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640. Especially effective.

Further, in this case, a part of the rotating member 435 is arranged on the front side of at least a part of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. The rotating member 435 makes it difficult for the player to see the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member. Therefore, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 can be easily recognized by the player as one pattern. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second production mode and impairing the interest.

Next, the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 2400 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 2400 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 2400.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 2430 and the right slide member in the second embodiment have been described. The 2450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the base member 2410 in the second embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 2480 and a rotation transmission member 2485 rotatably arranged with respect to the main body base member 2480. It is composed.

The main body base member 2480 is formed of a horizontally long rectangular body in front view, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board on the lower edge portion. Further, the main body base member 2480 is formed with protruding portions 2481 on the lower surface side of both end portions in the longitudinal direction.

The protruding plate portion 411 is engraved with a base-side rack gear 412 for imparting rotation to the first-side pinion gear 432 arranged on the first member 431 with the slide displacement of the first member 431 on the upper surface side.

As described above, the projecting portions 2481 are formed at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. The protrusion 2481 is recessed with a circular bearing hole 2481a into which the shaft portion 2486 of the rotation transmission member 2485 described later is inserted. Further, a through hole 2481b is formed through the protruding portion 2481 formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game machine) of the main body base member 2480 in the left-right direction.

The bearing holes 2481a are recessed on both sides of the main body base member 2480 from the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480 toward the outside, and the axial centers formed at both ends are concentrically formed.

The rotation transmission member 2485 is formed in a substantially rectangular cross section, and is formed in a prismatic shape set to a dimension slightly smaller than the distance dimension in the longitudinal direction of the main body base member 2480. At both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485, a rotation portion 2487 having a substantially circular shape and a predetermined thickness is formed, and the shaft portion 2486 of the axial body is formed outward in the longitudinal direction from the axis of the rotation portion 2487. Is formed to protrude.

Further, on the lower surface side of the rotation transmission member 2485, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board), and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Will be set up.

The shaft portions 2486 formed at both ends of the rotation transmission member 2485 are formed concentrically with each other. Further, as described above, since the shaft portion 2486 is inserted inside the bearing hole 2481a formed in the protruding portion 2488, the diameter dimension of the shaft portion 2486 is formed to be smaller than the bearing hole 2481a.

As a result, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate about the axis of the shaft portion 2486 when the shaft portion 2486 is inserted into the bearing hole 2481a of the protruding portion 2488 and arranged in the main body base member 2480.

A circular rack 2487a is engraved on the side surface of the rotating portion 2487 formed on one side (right side of the game board) of the rotation transmitting member 2485. The rotation transmission member 2485 is arranged on the main body base member 2480 in a state where the circular rack 2487a is meshed with the pinion gear 2488 arranged on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side in the front view) of the main body base member 2480.

The pinion gear 2488 is a gear for transmitting the driving force of the rotary drive motor 2489 to the rotary transmission member 2485, and the axis is fastened to the rotary drive motor 2489. The rotation shaft of the rotary drive motor 2489 is inserted into the through hole 2481b of the protruding portion 2781, and the pinion gear 2488 is fastened from the opposite surface of the protruding portion 2488.

Therefore, by applying the rotational driving force to the rotary drive motor 2489, the pinion gear 2488 is rotated, and the driving force is applied to the circular rack 2487a formed in the rotating portion 2487 of the rotation transmitting member 2485. As a result, the rotation transmission member 2485 can rotate about the shaft portion 2486.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 meshes with the transmission gear 2437a arranged on the left slide member 2430. The transmission gear 2437a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a transmits the driving force to the plurality of transmission gears 437b to 437f. As a result, the rotating member 435 can be driven to rotate as the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces.

The clockwise rotation transmission rack gear 414 meshes with the transmission gear 2457a arranged on the right slide member 2450. The transmission gear 2457a meshes with the transmission gear 437b, and the rotation of the transmission gear 2457a transmits the drive to the plurality of transmission gears 457b to 457f. As a result, a rotational driving force can be applied to the rotating member 455 as the right slide member 2450 slides.

Next, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Since the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gear 2457a have the same shape, detailed description of the transmission gear 2457a will be omitted.

71 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 2437a, and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the transmission gear 2437a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the transmission gear 2437a is formed to include a tooth portion 2437a1 having a constant tooth thickness and a bulging portion 2437a2 in which the tooth thickness gradually decreases toward the back surface side.

The tooth portion 2437a1 is a portion that meshes with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b, and has substantially the same thickness dimension as the tooth portion (dimension in the front-rear direction) of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437b. It is formed.

The bulging portion 2437a2 is a portion that bulges into a shape that gradually decreases toward the central portion of the tooth thickness as the tooth thickness increases toward the back surface side. The distance dimension in which the bulging portion 2437a2 bulges from the tooth portion 2437a1 to the back surface side is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1 or smaller than the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the tooth portion 2437a1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rigidity of the bulging portion 2437a2 from being lowered, and it is possible to prevent the bulging portion 2437a2 from being damaged.

Next, the operation of the rotation transmission member 2485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the following, the left slide member 2430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 2450 will be omitted.

FIG. 72 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 in a state where the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 72 (b) shows the rotation transmission member 2485 and the transmission gear 2437a. It is a schematic view of the slide unit 2400 viewed from the front in the state where the teeth are released. 73 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 on the line LXXIIIa-LXXIIIa of FIG. 72 (a), and FIG. 73 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 2400 on the line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb of FIG. 72 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram.

In FIG. 72, a part of the rotation transmission member 2485 is shown by a broken line for ease of understanding. Further, the transmission gear 2437a and the transmission gears 437b to 437f are shown in a see-through state.

As shown in FIGS. 72 (a) and 73 (a), when the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the rotation transmission member 2485 is located downward (lower side of FIGS. 72 and 73), it transmits to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. A state in which the gear 2437a is in mesh with the gear 2437a is formed.

Therefore, when the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a meshed with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for the rotation of the transmission gear 2437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when a rotation driving force is applied to the rotation drive motor 2489 to rotate the rotation transmission member 2485 upward on the back side, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. Tooth.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 73 (b), when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates about the shaft portion 2486, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the rotation transmission member 2485 changes to the rotation transmission member 2485. Displaces upward as the rotation of. As a result, the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released.

Therefore, even if the left slide member 2430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 2410, the transmission gear 2437a does not rotate because the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released. As a result, since the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating member 435 from the transmission gears 437b to 437f, even if the left slide member 2430 is displaced, it can be formed so as not to rotate.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 is rotated according to the sliding displacement of the left slide member 2430, and the slide of the left slide member 2430. The second drive state in which the displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the left slide member 2430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is stopped to rotate. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of the member 435 is continued by the inertial force.

As a result, the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 2430 and the rotary member 435 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Here, it is also conceivable to arrange a drive motor that applies a driving force for rotating the rotating member 435 to the left slide member 2430. However, when the drive motor is arranged on the left slide member 2430, the weight of the left slide member 2430 increases, and the addition of the left drive motor 475 for driving (sliding displacement) the left slide member 2430 increases. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, the rotation drive motor 2489 arranged on the base member 2410 forms a second drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 2430 is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotation member 435. it can. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for rotationally driving the rotary member 435 on the left slide member 2430, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 2430 can be suppressed accordingly. it can.

Further, the rotation transmission member 2485 provided with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 for transmitting the driving force to the transmission gear 2437a is rotated along the rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 to transmit the left rotation. When the mesh between the rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a is released, when the second drive state in which the mesh is released is switched to the first drive state in which the gears are engaged, the gears cannot be engaged and the side surfaces are engaged with each other. There was a problem that the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 2437a could not be meshed due to collision.

On the other hand, according to the second embodiment, since the bulging portion 2437a2 is formed on the transmission gear 2437a, the area of the side surface of the transmission gear 2437a can be reduced. Therefore, when switching from the second drive state in which the teeth are released to the first drive state in which the teeth are engaged, it is easy to insert the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 between the teeth portion of the transmission gear 2437a. it can.

Further, since the tooth thickness of the bulging portion 2437a2 is gradually reduced toward the back surface side of the transmission gear 2437a, the tooth portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is guided to the tooth portion 2437a1 along the inclined surface that is gradually reduced. can do.

That is, by forming the bulging portion 2437a2 on the transmission gear 2437a, it is possible to smoothly perform the meshing when switching from the second driving state in which the meshing is released to the first driving state in which the meshing is released.

It is preferable that the shaft portion 2486 in the second embodiment has its axis formed on a flat surface on the front surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 in the first drive state. Therefore, when the rotation transmission member 2485 rotates and switches from the first drive state to the second drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 are suppressed from being displaced toward the transmission gears 2437a and 2457a. it can. Therefore, the rotation transmission member 2485 can be smoothly switched from the first drive state to the second drive state.

Next, the slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. FIG. 74 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 3400 according to the third embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the third embodiment have been described. The 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74, the base member 3410 in the third embodiment mainly includes a main body base member 3480 and an accommodating member 3490 arranged in front of the main body base member 3480.

The main body base member 3480 is formed in a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular front view, and a protruding plate portion 3411 is erected on the edge portion.

On the lower side of the protruding plate portion 3411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 413 is engraved on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (left side of the game board) on the lower surface side, and a right rotation transmission rack gear 414 is engraved on one side in the longitudinal direction (right side of the game board). Will be set up. On the other hand, an insertion hole 3481c is formed through the protruding plate portion 3411 on the upper surface side in the vertical direction.

The accommodating member 3490 is a member in which the first member 431 and the second member 433 of the left slide member 430 and the rack member 451 of the right slide member 450 are arranged, and is formed in a rectangular plate-like body when viewed from the front. At the same time, a protruding wall 3491 protruding from the edge to the front side of the game machine is formed, and the first member 431, the second member 433, and the rack member 451 are arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the protruding wall 3491.

Further, the housing member 3490 is formed so that the outer shape in front view is smaller than the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. As a result, the accommodating member 3490 can be arranged inside the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480.

A base-side rack gear 412 is engraved on the inner surface of the protruding wall 3491 on the lower side of the accommodating member 3490. On the other hand, a through hole 3491a penetrating in the vertical direction is formed in the protruding wall 3491 on the upper side of the accommodating member 3490.

The through hole 3491a is a hole for inserting a bolt (not shown) from the inside of the accommodating member 3490 in order to fasten the shaft portion of the telescopic cylinder 3495 described later and the accommodating member 3490, and the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495. The diameter is formed smaller than the diameter of.

The cylinder 3495 is a member that slides and displaces the accommodating member 3490 up and down by its drive, and by applying electric power, a shaft portion protruding from the inside of the cylinder 3495 is inserted into the inside of the cylinder 3495, and the shaft portion thereof is inserted. It is a member (solenoid) that displaces the protruding distance of the cylinder.

The cylinder 3495 is fastened to the accommodating member 3490 with its shaft portion inserted inside the insertion hole 3481c formed in the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480. Further, the main body side of the cylinder 3495 is fastened and fixed to the protruding plate portion 3411a of the main body base member 3480.

Therefore, when electric power is applied to the cylinder 3495, the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced vertically, and the accommodating member 3490 fastened to the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 can be displaced vertically. That is, the accommodating member 3490 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the main body base member 3480.

Next, the operation of the accommodating member 3490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. Further, in the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

FIG. 75A is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a state where the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 75B is a schematic view of the accommodation member 3490. Is a schematic view of the slide unit 3400 in a front view in a state where the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a of the main body base member 3480 is released. 76 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 in the line LXXVIa-LXXVIa of FIG. 75 (a), and FIG. 76 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 3400 in the line LXXVIb-LXXVIb of FIG. 75 (b). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 75, a part of the accommodating member 3490 and a part of the main body base member 3480 are shown by broken lines for easy understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a perspective state.

As shown in FIGS. 75A and 76A, when the accommodating member 3490 is located above, the distance dimension L1 between the bottom surface of the accommodating member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is large. It is arranged in a sufficiently secured state, and the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the main body base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other.

Therefore, when the left slide member 430 slides and displaces with respect to the base member 3410, the transmission gear 437a meshing with the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 rotates. As a result, the driving force for the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the transmission gears 437b to 437f, so that the rotating member 435 rotates.

On the other hand, as described above, when the shaft portion of the cylinder 3495 is displaced so as to protrude from the inside of the cylinder 3495, the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released.

That is, when the accommodating member 3490 is located below, the distance dimension L2 between the bottom surface of the accommodating member 3490 and the inner surface of the protruding plate portion 3411 of the main body base member 3480 is arranged in a state of being smaller than the distance dimension L1 and the main body. The left rotation transmission rack gear 413 of the base member 3480 and the transmission gear 437a are in a disengaged state (distance dimension L1> L2).

Therefore, even if the left slide member 430 slides with respect to the base member 3410, the mesh between the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a is released, so that the transmission gear 437a does not rotate. As a result, since the driving force from the transmission gears 437b to 437f is not transmitted to the rotating member 435, it is possible to form a form that does not rotate even if the left slide member 430 is displaced.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to stop the rotating member. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, in the third embodiment, the transmission gear 437a arranged on the left slide member 430 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 formed on the main body base member 3480. It is possible to switch between the 1st drive state and the 2nd drive state.

Therefore, when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a can be smoothly meshed with each other.

That is, when the tooth portion of the transmission gear 437a and the tooth portion of the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 413 are out of phase, it is necessary to match the phases. However, when the transmission gear 437a is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, if the transmission gear 437a is brought closer to the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 in a state of being out of phase, the left rotation transmission rack gear While the tooth surface of 413 and the tooth surface of the transmission gear 437a are in contact with each other, the transmission gear 437a is engaged while rotating along the tooth surface of the left rotation transmission rack gear 413. Therefore, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the transmission gear 437a There is no need to match the phases, and the gears can be smoothly matched.

Next, the slide unit 4400 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a front view of the base member 4410 according to the fourth embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 430 and the right slide member in the fourth embodiment have been described. The 450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77, the base member 4410 in the fourth embodiment is formed of a horizontally long rectangular body in front view, and a protruding plate portion 411 is erected on the front side of the game board on the lower edge portion. .. On the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411, a left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 435 and a right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 that applies a rotation driving force to the rotation member 455 are formed.

The left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed so as to be located on the left side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. Further, notched portions 4413a notched from the tooth surface are formed at both end portions and the central portion of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413. Further, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch 4413a include a small tooth 4413b having a smaller outer shape than the teeth not adjacent to the notch 4413a.

On the other hand, the clockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4414 is formed so as to be located on the right side in the longitudinal direction of the base member 4410. Further, notches 4414a notched from the tooth surface are formed at both ends of the clockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4414. Further, the teeth of the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notch 4414a include a small tooth portion 4414b whose outer shape is smaller than that of the non-adjacent teeth.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 4400 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Further, in the following, the left slide member 430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 450 will be omitted.

FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 4400 in a state where the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4413 of the base member 4410 and the transmission gear 437a are in mesh with each other, and FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic view of the base member 4410. It is a schematic view which looked at the front view of the slide unit 4400 in the state where the meshing of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a was released. In FIG. 78, a part of the base member 4410 is shown by a broken line for ease of understanding. Further, the transmission gears 437a to 437f are shown in a perspective state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 other than the notch 4413a, the transmission gear 437a rotates counterclockwise. It forms a state of being in mesh with the transmission rack gear 4413.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78B, when the left slide member 430 is displaced and the transmission gear 437a is located below the notch 4413a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the transmission gear 437a is moved. A state in which the teeth are disengaged from the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 is formed.

That is, the rotating member 435 can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 until the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch portion 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing. .. On the other hand, when the transmission gear 437a reaches the notch 4413a in which the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 are missing, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped, so that the rotation of the rotation member 435 is caused by its inertial force. Can be continued by.

Therefore, the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the first drive state in which the rotating member 435 rotates with the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the slide displacement of the left slide member 430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 435, and the left sliding member 430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 435 remains non-rotating, and the sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 is stopped to stop the rotating member. It is possible to form a third driving state in which the rotation of 435 is continued by its inertial force. As a result, the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 430 can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In addition, switching between the first drive state and the third drive state is configured by removing some teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 to release the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a. Therefore, it is not necessary to dispose a drive motor or the like for disengaging the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a on the left slide member 430, so that the weight of the left slide member 430 can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for sliding displacement of the left slide member 430 can be suppressed.

Further, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are damaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. This can be prevented and the durability of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 can be improved.

That is, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are easily damaged because the teeth of the transmission gear 437a passing through the notch portion 4413a collide with each other.

In this case, since the small tooth portion 4413b is formed on the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are smoothly engaged when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state. be able to.

That is, in the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 not provided with the small tooth portion 4413b, when the third drive state is switched to the first drive state, if the rotation phase with the transmission gear 437a is out of phase, the teeth of the transmission gear 437a and the teeth There is a risk that the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 will mesh with each other and the teeth cannot be engaged.

In this case, when the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 adjacent to the notch portion 4413a are formed to have a smaller outer shape than the other teeth, the rotation phases of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a are out of phase. However, when the small tooth portion 4413b and the transmission gear 437a come into contact with each other, it is possible to prevent the teeth from engaging with each other and rotate the transmission gear 437a to adjust the phase thereof. As a result, the meshing between the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the transmission gear 437a can be smoothly performed.

Next, the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective front view of the left slide member 5430 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 5430. In the following, the left slide member 5430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the left slide member 5430 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 5430 and the right slide member in the fifth embodiment have been described. The 5450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state according to the slide displacement. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, in the left slide member 5430 in the fifth embodiment, the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged on the rotation shaft 5435a of the rotation member 5435.

The one-way clutch 5439 has an outer ring 5439b connected to a shaft hole 5437f1 formed through the axis of the transmission gear 5437f in a circular shape, an inner ring 5439c connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435, and each cam surface of the inner ring 5439c. A plurality of rollers 5439d arranged in the above, a cage 5439e for holding each of the rollers 5439d, and a switching plate 5439a connected to the cage 5439e and switching the phase of the rollers 5439d with respect to the cam surface are mainly provided. ..

A sliding groove 5439a1 penetrating in an elongated hole shape is formed in the switching plate 5439a, and a protruding portion 5436d protruding from the front side of the displacement member 5436 described later is inserted into the inner peripheral surface of the sliding groove 5439a1. ..

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic view of the left slide member 5430 in a front view before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 81 (b) is a left view after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the slide member 5430 from the front. In FIG. 81, in order to facilitate understanding, the drawings are simplified, and a part of the one-way clutch 5439 and the displacement member 5436 is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in a state where the displacement member 5436 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotating member 5435, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface, and the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b are arranged. It is bitten by the wedge formed between. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81B, when the displacement member 5436 is displaced with respect to the rotating member 5435, the position of the protruding portion 5436d formed on the displacement member 5436 is changed to the rotating member 5435 due to the displacement. Displace with respect to. As a result, the switching plate 5439a is switched.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by displace the displacement member 5436 connected to the rotating member 5435, it is possible to form a state in which the one-way clutch 5439 allows the transmission of rotation and a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 5430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430. Is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 5430 is slid-displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating, and the one-way clutch is used to stop the slide displacement of the left slide member 5430. By changing the state in which the 5439 allows the transmission of rotation to a state in which the transmission of rotation is blocked, a third driving state is formed in which the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by the inertial force while the left slide member 5430 is stopped. be able to.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the displacements of the displacement member 5436 can be combined in addition to the motions (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 5430 and the rotary member 5435, the number of combinations can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is operated by the displaced displacement member 5436, the displacement member 5436 can have both the role of performing the effect by displacement and the role of operating the switching plate 5439a. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the left slide member 5430 with a drive motor or the like for operating the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load on the left drive motor 475 for driving the left slide member 5430 can be suppressed.

Next, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85.

First, the overall configuration of the left slide member 6430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an exploded rear perspective view of the left slide member 6430. In the following, the left slide member 6430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 6450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member in the sixth embodiment have been described. The 6450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 and the right slide member 6450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment is arranged on the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5435 with the one-way clutch 5439 inserted through the through hole 6434a1 of the rear side base member 434a. To.

The through hole 6434a1 formed in the back side base member 434a is a hole for inserting the one-way clutch 5439 from the back side to the front side, and the hole diameter thereof is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the one-way clutch 5439.

In the one-way clutch 5439, the outer ring 5439b is connected to the shaft hole 5437f1 of the transmission gear 5437f, the inner ring 5439c is connected to the rotating shaft 5435a of the rotating member 5437, and the sliding groove 5439a1 of the switching plate 5439a is connected to the operator 6438 described later. To.

The operator 6438 is formed in a vertically long rod-like body having a rectangular front view. In the operator 6438, a connecting pin 6438a projecting forward is formed at the lower end portion, and a through hole 6438b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed slightly above the central portion in the vertical direction.

The through hole 6438b is a hole to be inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 protruding rearward from the back surface side of the back surface side base member 434a, and is formed to have a hole diameter larger than the outer diameter of the insertion pin 6434a2.

Therefore, when the through hole 6438b of the operator 6438 is inserted into the insertion pin 6434a2 of the back side base member 434a and the bolt T (not shown) is fastened to the tip of the insertion pin 6434a2, the operator 6438 is inserted into the through hole 6438b. Is arranged on the back surface of the back surface side base member 434a in a state of being rotatable about the axis.

The connecting pin 6438a is a cylindrical body that is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, and its outer diameter dimension is formed to be smaller than the groove width dimension of the sliding groove 5439a1.

Therefore, when the operator 6438 rotates about the through hole 6438b while the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is inserted into the sliding groove 5439a1 of the one-way clutch 5439, the position of the connecting pin 6438a changes and the one-way The switching plate 5439a of the clutch 5439 can be displaced.

Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is arranged between the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin 6434a2. One end of the torsion spring is locked to the back surface side base member 434a, and the other end is locked to the operator 6438. As a result, the operator 6438 is always urged in the clockwise direction with the through hole 6438b as the axis in the front view. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 can always be in the driving state (the state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is transmitted to the rotation of the rotating member 5435) when no external force is applied to the operator 6438.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85.

FIG. 84 (a) is a schematic view of the slide unit 6400 in the state before the switching plate 5439a is operated, and FIG. 84 (b) is a schematic view of the slide unit 6400 in the state after the switching plate 5439a is operated. It is a schematic diagram which viewed the 6400 from the front. 85 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 in the line LXXXVa-LXXXVa of FIG. 84 (a), and FIG. 85 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 6400 in the line LXXXVb-LXXXXVb of FIG. 84 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram. In FIG. 84, the one-way clutch 5439 and the operator 6438 are shown by broken lines for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 84 (b), the base member 6410 is formed with a protrusion 6411a protruding from the bottom surface side of the protruding plate portion 411 of the base member 6410 at the slide end portion of the left slide member 6430. ..

As shown in FIGS. 84 (a) and 85 (a), in a state where no external force is applied to the operator 6438, the operation operator 6438 is in a state in which the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the longitudinal direction of the base member 434. Placed in.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and is bitten into a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 84 (b) and 85 (b), the left slide member 6430 slides and displaces, and the other end of the operator 6438 arranged on the left slide member 6430 immediately before the end of the slide displacement. The side surface on the right side of the front view on the side (upper side) comes into contact with the protrusion 6411a of the base member 6410.

When the left slide member 6430 further moves to the end portion after the side surface of the operator 6438 comes into contact with the base member 6410, the operator 6438 is displaced around the through hole 6438b in the counterclockwise rotation direction in the front view.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated to switch the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439.

When the switching plate 5439a is switched, the roller 5439d is arranged at a neutral position on the cam surface and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the actuator 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 6430, it is possible to form a state in which the transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of the rotation is blocked. it can.

That is, the first drive state in which the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 6430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430. By changing the one-way clutch 5439 from a state that allows transmission of rotation to a state that shuts off when the left slide member 6430 is stopped, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is continued by its inertial force while the left slide member 6430 is stopped. A third drive state can be formed.

Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 6430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 6430, it is not necessary to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 6430. The weight of the left slide member 6430 can be reduced by the amount. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 6430 can be reduced.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. First, the slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 7400 according to the seventh embodiment. In the following, the left slide member 7430 will be described as a representative example, and the description of the right slide member 7450 will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating member 435 and the rotating member 455 are rotated according to the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 and the right slide member 450 has been described, but the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member in the seventh embodiment have been described. The 7450 is switched between a state in which the rotating member 5435 and the rotating member 5455 are rotated and a non-rotating state in accordance with the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the right slide member 7450 by switching the one-way clutch 5439. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86, a concave groove 7417 in which the second slide member 7460, which will be described later, is arranged is formed on the back surface of the base member 7410.

The second slide member 7460 is sandwiched and held by a rack gear 7461 having a gear tooth surface formed on its upper surface, two plate members 7462 arranged to face the front and rear side surfaces of the rack gear 7461, and two plate members 7462. A shaft portion 7463 to be formed, a roller 7465 arranged with the shaft portion 7436 inserted therein, and a drive gear 7464 arranged above the rack gear 7461 and meshing with the tooth surface of the rack gear 7461 are mainly provided. Tooth.

The rack gear 7461 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the tooth surface 7461a of the gear is formed on the upper surface side. Further, a stop hole 7461b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction in the front view.

The plate member 7462 is a member for holding the roller 7465, which will be described later, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular plate-like body in front view. In the plate member 7462, a sliding groove 7462a located on the rack gear 7461 side is recessed on the side surface in the vertical direction, and a through hole 7462b is formed above the sliding groove 7462a in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 7462b is a through hole for fastening to the rack gear 7461. The plate member 7462 is fixed by inserting a screw (not shown) into the through hole 7462b and fastening the screw to the set hole 7461b of the rack gear 7461.

The shaft portion 7436 is a columnar member inserted into the sliding groove 7462a of the plate member 7462, and is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the width dimension of the sliding groove 7462a. Further, the axial dimension is formed to be larger than the thickness (front-rear direction) dimension of the rack gear 7461.

As a result, when the shaft portion 7436 is sandwiched and held by the two plate members 7462, the shaft portion 7436 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction by the amount that the sliding groove 7462a is recessed in the vertical direction. ..

The outer shape of the roller 7465 is formed into a columnar shape, and a shaft hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the axis thereof. The roller 7465 has a shaft portion 7436 inserted through the shaft hole and is arranged between the two plate members 7462.

The drive gear 7464 is a member for applying a driving force that meshes with the tooth surface 7461a of the rack gear 7461 to slide and displace the rack gear 7461 in the left-right direction, and is connected to a motor 7466 described later.

The motor 7466 is a member that applies a driving force to the rack gear 7461, and is attached to the motor mounting plate 7467 with the shaft of the motor 7466 inserted through the through hole 7467a of the motor mounting plate 7467.

Therefore, when a rotational force is applied to the motor 7466, the drive gear 7464 connected to the motor 7466 rotates, and the rack gear 7461 can be slid and displaced in the left-right direction.

Further, of the two plate members 7462, the plate member 7462 arranged in the front is decorated (display of a pattern or the like) on the plane arranged in the front side thereof. As a result, the second slide member 7460 can be made visible to the player by sliding displacement from the position where it overlaps with the left slide member 7430 in the front-rear direction to the position where it does not overlap.

Next, the state transition of the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. 87 to 89 are schematic views of the slide unit 7400 as viewed from the front.

First, the left slide member 7430 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As shown in FIG. 87, the left slide member 7430 includes the left slide member 6430 in the sixth embodiment, the range of motion of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439, the position before displacement of the operator 6438, and the through hole 6438b and the insertion pin. The only difference is that no urging spring is arranged between the 6434a2 and the 6434a2, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the operation of the one-way clutch 5439 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89.

First, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the state before the left slide member 7430 is slidably displaced, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side in the left-right direction with respect to the through hole 6438b. That is, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged in a state of being tilted to the right side.

In this case, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the end of the cam surface and is bitten into a wedge formed between the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into the driving state. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Therefore, while the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced so that the other end side (upper end side) of the actuator 6438 is displaced to the position where it comes into contact with the roller 7465 (the position shown in FIG. 87B), the left slide member 7430 The rotating member 5435 can be rotationally moved with the displacement of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), when the operator 6438 comes into contact with the roller 7465, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is a side surface above the axis of the roller 7465. Contact. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is tilted to the right, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the operator is urged downward by the slide displacement while urging the roller 7465 downward. The 6438 can be rotated around the through hole 6438b as an axis.

As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the longitudinal direction of the operator 6438 is rotated to a position substantially coincide with the longitudinal direction of the second member, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is changed to the roller 7465. It comes into contact with the side surface of the roller 7465 located at substantially the same height as the axis of the roller.

Therefore, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the slide displacement allows the operator 6438 to be rotated around the through hole 6438b while urging the roller 7465 to the right.

As shown in FIG. 88 (b), when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is arranged so as to be tilted to the right, the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is arranged on the left side of the through hole 6438b. Will be done.

Therefore, the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 connected to the connecting pin 6438a of the operator 6438 is rotated to switch the driving state of the one-way clutch 5439.

As a result, the roller 5439d of the one-way clutch 5439 is arranged at the neutral position on the cam surface, and is separated from the meshing space of the inner ring 5439c and the outer ring 5439b. As a result, the one-way clutch 5439 is put into a neutral idling state. As a result, it is possible to form a state in which the rotation of the transmission gear 437a is not transmitted to the rotating member 5435.

Further, when the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is rotated to a state of being tilted to the left side, the other end side (upper end side) of the operator 6438 is in contact with the side surface below the axis of the roller 7465. Get in touch. Therefore, since the other end side (upper end side) of the actuator 6438 is tilted to the left side, when the left slide member 7430 is further slid and displaced, the roller 7465 can be urged upward by the slide displacement.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89A, the shaft portion 7463 through which the roller 7465 is inserted is slid upward. As a result, since the roller 7465 is located above the operator 6438, the operator 6438 can be displaced to the right of the roller 7465. Therefore, the left slide member 7430 can be displaced to the position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

Further, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the left slide member 7430 is located on the right side of the roller 7465 is on the left side of the roller 7465 because the one-way clutch 5439 is blocking the rotation transmission as described above. The rotation can be continued by the inertial force of the rotation of the rotating member 5435 when the sliding displacement is performed.

Therefore, by applying an external force to the actuator 6438 according to the displacement amount of the left slide member 7430, it is possible to form a state in which the transmission of the rotation of the one-way clutch 5439 is allowed and a state in which the transmission of the rotation is blocked. it can.

That is, the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member 5435, and the first drive state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates with the displacement of the left slide member 7430 and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 are In the stopped state, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 can be continued by its inertial force to form a third driving state.

Therefore, the first drive state and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotating member 5435 can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in this case, by stopping the inertial force in the third driving state (for example, waiting until the time when the inertial force stops acting), the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435. It is possible to form a second drive state in which the left slide member 7430 is slide-displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating.

Therefore, the first drive state, the second drive state, and the third drive state can be formed, and the number of combinations of movements (linear motion and rotary motion) of the left slide member 7430 and the rotary member 5435 can be increased. .. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, since the operation of the switching plate 5439a of the one-way clutch 5439 is performed by the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, it is not necessary to arrange a motor or the like for switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 on the left slide member 7430. The weight of the left slide member 7430 can be reduced by the amount. As a result, the load on the driving means for driving the left slide member 7430 can be reduced.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the position where the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched, that is, the rotation of the rotating member 5435 is It is possible to change the position where the permissible state is changed to the regulated state or the permissible state is changed to the regulated state. As a result, the position where the rotation state of the rotating member 5435 is changed when the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced, and the position where the rotating member 5435 is rotated while the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is stopped. It can be changed according to the game state and the like, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount. However, the second slide member 7460 is displaced due to the displacement. Since the role of performing the effect and the role of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439 are combined, it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of switching the state of the one-way clutch 5439. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, since the second slide member 7460 is displaceably arranged along the slide direction of the left slide member 7430, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched by displace the second slide member 7460. be able to.

That is, from the state in which the second slide member 7460 is arranged in either the left or right direction of the left slide member 7430, the second slide member 7460 is moved to either the left or right direction in the state where the left slide member 7430 is stopped. By displacement, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 can be switched.

Therefore, the state of the one-way clutch 5439 is switched without sliding the left slide member 7430, and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 is converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the displacement of the left slide member 7430 is accompanied by the displacement of the left slide member 7430. The first drive state in which the rotating member 5435 rotates and the slide displacement of the left slide member 7430 are not affected by the rotational movement of the rotating member 5435, and the left slide member 7430 is slid and displaced while the rotating member 5435 remains non-rotating. Two drive states can be formed.

Next, the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 is a front view of the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 8400. FIG. 92 is an exploded rear perspective view of the slide unit 8400. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 90 to 92, the slide unit 8400 according to the eighth embodiment has a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 8430 that is slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for sliding-displace the left slide member 8430 along the sliding rod member 420. ..

The base member 8410 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and a sliding rod member 420 is arranged on the front side along the longitudinal direction thereof. Further, a protruding plate portion 411 is formed on the base member 8410, and a base side rack gear 8412 is formed on the upper surface side of the protruding plate portion 411.

The base side rack gear 8412 is a rack gear extending along the longitudinal direction of the sliding rod member 420, and the first side pinion gear 432 and the second side pinion gear 8433d of the left slide member 8430 are meshed with each other.

The left slide member 8430 is a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in front view, a base member 8431b having a rectangular shape in front view hanging from the first member 8431, and a first member rotatably arranged on the first member 8431. A front-view rectangular vertically long second member 8433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a to which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed, and a front-view rectangular vertically long base member suspended from the second member 8433. 8434, a second side pinion gear 8433d rotatably arranged on the second member 8433, and a third member 8445 having a rectangular laterally long front view having a third side rack gear 8445a to which the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed. , 8446, which is a horizontally long base member with a rectangular shape in front view, which hangs down from the third member 8445.

The first member 8431 has a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Therefore, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 8410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The first side pinion gear 432 is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the first side pinion gear 432 is rotated by being acted on by the base side rack gear 8412 with the slide displacement.

The second member 8433 is displaceably arranged in the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end, so that the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the second member 8433 is engraved with the second rack gear 433a on the lower surface thereof. Therefore, the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431.

Further, the second side pinion gear 8433d is meshed with the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410. Therefore, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated by being acted on by the base side rack gear 8412 in accordance with the slide displacement.

The third member 8445 is displaceably arranged in the second member 8433, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end so that the third member 8445 is displaced relative to the second member 8433. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, the third member 8445 is engraved with the third side rack gear 8445a on the lower surface thereof. Further, the third side rack gear 8445a is meshed with the second side pinion gear 8433d. Therefore, as described above, when the second side pinion gear 8433d is rotated with the displacement of the second member 8433, the third member 8445 is acted on by the second side pinion gear 8433d, so that the third member 8445 becomes the second member. It is displaced relative to 8433.

That is, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 8433, the second member 8433 is referred to. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

Further, since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445, the third member 8445 is fitted with the second side pinion gear 8433d. It is possible to apply the driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the second member 8433. Can be done.

Next, the operation of the slide unit 8400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94. 93 (a) to 93 (c) are schematic views of the slide unit 8400 viewed from the front, and show a transition state when the left slide member 8430 is slid and displaced. 94 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 on the XCIVa-XCIVa line of FIG. 93 (a), and FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 on the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 94 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 8400 in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 93 (c). Note that FIG. 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 94 (a), when the left slide member 8430 is arranged in the retracted position, the second member 8433 is arranged inside the first member 8431 and the second member 8433. A third member 8445 is arranged inside the.

In this case, the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 is located in front of the base member 8431b suspended from the first member 8431, and the base member 8446 of the third member 8445 is arranged in front of the base member 8434. Will be done.

That is, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (in a state of being overlapped in the front-rear direction) (see FIG. 5A). Therefore, when the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 are slide-displaced, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be slid-displaced without interfering with each other. .. Further, the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed to reduce the size.

Further, since the space for arranging the first member 8431, the second member 8433, and the third member 8445 can be suppressed, the effect region K formed in the central portion of the game board (in FIG. 93A, the base member 8410 An area where the lower side and the left side of the base member 8446 overlap each other) can be secured.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 91) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 8430 is arranged in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated and left. The left drive gear 471 meshed with the pinion gear 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the second rack gear 433a of the second member 8433 and the base rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and the second rack gear 433a and the base side are arranged facing each other. Since the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 8431 is interposed in the state of being meshed with both of the rack gears 412, the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the second side rack gear of the second member 8433 Since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both of the 433a, the driving force accompanying the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the rotation of the first side pinion gear 432 with respect to the second member 8433. It is possible to apply a driving force associated with exercise. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

As a result, the time required to slide-displace the first member 8431 and the second member 8433 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect region K (shielding state) or retract from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 8400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

Further, the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410 are arranged facing each other in a posture parallel to each other, and teeth are provided on both of the third side rack gear 8445a and the base side rack gear 412. Since the second side pinion gear 8433d axially supported by the second member 8433 is interposed in the combined state, both the base side rack gear 8412 of the base member 8410 and the third side rack gear 8445a of the third member 8445 Since the second side pinion gear 8433d of the second member 8433 is meshed with the third member 8445, the driving force associated with the linear motion of the second member 8433 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the second side pinion gear 8433d are applied to the third member 8445. Can be granted. As a result, when the second member 8433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the third member 8445 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the second member 8433. Can be done.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 93B, the second member 8433 can be slidably displaced relative to the first member 8431. Further, the third member 8445 can be slidably displaced relative to the second member 8433.

As a result, the time required to slide-displace the second member 8433 and the third member 8445 of the slide unit 8400 to the effect area K (shielding state) or retract from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 8400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), when the left slide member 8430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the second member 8433 leaves a part of overlap from the inside of the first member 8431. The third member 8445 is arranged so as to protrude from the inside of the second member 8433, leaving a part of overlap.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the side surface on the left side of the base member 8431b hanging on the first member 8431 and the side surface on the right side of the base member 8434 hanging on the second member 8433 are substantially in the front-rear direction. They are placed in the same position. Further, the left side surface of the base member 8434 suspended from the second member 8433 and the right side surface of the base member 8446 suspended from the third member 8445 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. To.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire area of the effect region K.

Next, the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98.

First, the overall configuration of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is an exploded front perspective view of the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 96 is an exploded front perspective view of the left slide member 9430.

In the first embodiment, the case where the base member 434 is hung on the second member 433 has been described, but in the slide unit 9400 in the ninth embodiment, the base member 9431b is hung on the first member 431 and the second member 8433. A base member 9434 hanging from the base member 9434 is arranged. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the slide unit 9400 according to the ninth embodiment has a base member 8410 arranged on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300 and a sliding rod arranged on the base member 8410. It mainly includes a member 420, a left slide member 9430 that is slidably connected to the sliding rod member 420, and a drive mechanism for slidingly displacement the left slide member 9430 along a sliding guide groove.

The left slide member 9430 is a first member 8431 having a rectangular shape in front view, a base member 9431b having a rectangular shape in front view hanging from the first member 8431, and a first member rotatably arranged on the first member 8431. A front-view rectangular vertically long second member 9433 having a side pinion gear 432 and a second side rack gear 433a to which the first side pinion gear 432 is meshed, and a front-view rectangular vertically long base member suspended from the second member 9433. Mainly provided with 9434, a slide rail 9443 arranged on the base member 9434, a rectangular vertically long base member 9446 connected to the slide rail 9443, and a freely deformable thread-like wire 9444. It is composed of.

The first member 8431 has a sliding hole having an inner peripheral surface having a circular cross section extending along the longitudinal direction of the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole. Therefore, it is possible to slide along the axial direction of the sliding rod member 420. That is, the first member 8431 is slidably arranged on the base member 9410 via the sliding rod member 420.

The base member 9431b is formed with a concave groove recessed from the back side on the side surface on the left side in the front view on the upper end side, and a columnar connecting shaft 9431b1 extending in the upward and downward directions inside the concave groove is formed. It is formed (see FIG. 98).

The second member 9433 is displaceably arranged in the first member 8431, and the sliding rod member 420 is inserted into the sliding hole at the upper end so that the second member 9433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431. , Sliding along the sliding rod member 420.

In this case, since the first side pinion gear 432 of the first member 8431 is meshed with both the base side rack gear 9412 of the base member 9410 and the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433, the second member 9433 , The driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and the driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432 can be applied. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

The base member 9434 is formed with a notch 9434c whose upper end side is cut out in the front-rear direction, and a disk-shaped roller 9434d is rotatably arranged inside the notch 9434c. Further, on the base member 9434, a slide rail 9443, which will be described later, is arranged on the front surface of the base member 9434 in a state where the expansion / contraction direction is the left-right direction.

The roller 9434d is a member for assisting the displacement of the wire 9444 described later, and its vertical position is arranged at substantially the same position as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The slide rail 9443 is a member for holding the third member in a slidable manner, and is formed of two plates and the plates of each other are slidably displaceable. Further, the slide rail 9443 is provided with a coil spring (not shown) inside, and is urged in a direction in which the plates are separated from each other.

The base member 9437 is slidably arranged with respect to the second member 9433 by fastening the back surface side to the slide rail 9443.

The base member 9437 is formed with a concave groove recessed from the back side on the side surface on the right side of the upper end portion when viewed from the front, and a columnar connecting shaft 9446a extending in the vertical direction is formed inside the concave groove. Will be done. Further, the connecting shaft 9446a is arranged at a position in the vertical direction substantially the same as the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member 8431.

The wire 9444 is a member for displace the base member 9437 with the displacement of the first member 8431 and the second member 9433, and is formed of a piano wire, a fishing line, or the like. One end of the wire 9444 is connected to the connecting shaft 9431b1 of the first member, and the other end is connected to the connecting shaft 9446a of the third member 9533. Further, the wire 9444 has a connecting path for connecting one end and the other end located between the base member 9431b of the first member 8431 and the base member 9434 of the second member 9433, and the roller 9434d of the second member 9433. It is arranged in a state where a part of the side surface of the wire is in contact with the wire (see FIG. 9).

Next, the operation of the slide unit 9400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are front views of the slide unit 9400, showing a transition state when the left slide member 9430 is slid displacement. 98 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa of FIG. 97 (a), and FIG. 98 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 97 (b). It is a schematic cross-sectional view, and FIG. 98 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the slide unit 9400 in the XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc line of FIG. 97 (c). Note that FIG. 93 shows a state in which the cover member 416, the guide member 419, and the drive motor 475 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 98 (a), when the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are located at different positions in the front-rear direction. Placed in. Therefore, the base member 9431b, the base member 9446, and the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced without interfering with each other. The space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed to reduce the size.

Further, since the space for arranging the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 can be suppressed, the effect region K formed in the center of the game board can be secured.

Further, when the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the urging force of the slide rail arranged between the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 causes the base member 9446 to move to the left with respect to the base member 9434. Although a sliding force acts, the wire 9444 connects the connecting shaft 9431b1 and the connecting shaft 9438, and the connecting path is between the base member 9431b and the base member 9434, so that the base member 9434 causes the base member. It is possible to prevent the 9446 from sliding to the left with respect to the base member 9434.

That is, the length dimension of the wire 9444 is a combination of the length dimension of the base member 9434 in the left-right direction and the dimension of the base member 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 in the thickness direction. It is possible to maintain a state in which the 9431b, the base member 9434, and the base member 9446 are overlapped in the front-rear direction.

When the left drive motor 475 (see FIG. 95) is driven in the forward direction from the state where the left slide member 9430 is arranged in the retracted position, the left pinion gear 473 connected to the left drive motor 475 is rotated to rotate the left pinion gear. The left drive gear 471 connected to 473 is rotated.

When the left drive gear 471 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the first rack gear 431a of the first member 8431 that meshes with the left drive gear 471, and the first member 8431 is slidably displaced.

In this case, as described above, the first side pinion gear 432 pivotally supported by the first member 8431 in a state of being meshed with both the second side rack gear 433a of the second member 9433 and the base side rack gear 412 of the base member 8410. Is provided, so that the second member 9433 can be provided with a driving force associated with the linear motion of the first member 8431 and a driving force associated with the rotational motion of the first side pinion gear 432. As a result, when the first member 8431 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the second member 9433 is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410 in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member 8431. Can be done.

As a result, the time required to slide-displace the first member 8431 and the second member 9433 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect region K (shielding state) or retract from the effect area K (open state) is shortened to shield the slide unit 9400. It is possible to quickly switch between the state and the open state.

Further, in this case, the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 are arranged at positions shifted from each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from the overlapping dimension L3 shown in FIG. 9A to the overlapping dimension L4 shown in FIG. 9B.

Therefore, the wire 9444 can be loosened by the amount that the overlapping dimension of the base member 9431b and the base member 9434 in the front-rear direction is displaced from L3 to L4 (L3> L4). Therefore, the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 9434 by the urging force of the slide rail 9443 by the amount that the wire 9444 is loosened. As a result, when the base member 9431b is slidably displaced with respect to the base member 8410, the base member 9446 can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member 9434 in a state of being faster than the base member 9434.

As a result, the time required for sliding displacement of the base member 9434 and the base member 9446 of the slide unit 9400 to the effect region K (shielding state) or retracting from the effect area K (open state) is shortened, and the shielding state and The open state can be switched quickly.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (c) and 94 (c), when the left slide member 9430 is arranged at the overhanging position, the left side surface of the base member 9431b in the front view and the right side of the base member 9434 in the front view. The side surfaces are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Further, the side surface of the base member 9434 on the left side in the front view and the side surface of the base member 9446 on the right side in the front view are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction.

That is, no gap is formed between the base member and the base member. Therefore, the base member 8431b, the base member 8434, and the base member 8446 can be arranged in the entire area of the effect region K.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the slide displacement of the base member 9446 can be performed by the slide rail 9443 and the wire 9444, so that the third member 8445 is arranged above the base member 8446 as in the eighth embodiment. You don't have to. Therefore, since the third member 8445 is not arranged, the distance dimension of the base member 8410 and the sliding rod member 420 in the longitudinal direction can be reduced, and the space for arranging the base member 8410 can be suppressed to reduce the size. Can be planned.

Next, the elevating unit 800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102.

First, the overall configuration of the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. 99 (a) is a front view of the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment, FIG. 99 (b) is a rear view of the elevating unit 10800, and FIG. 99 (c) is a side view of the elevating unit 10800. Is. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating unit 10800.

In the first embodiment, the case where the movable units (slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 800) arranged in the operation unit 200 are not connected to each other at the united (extending) position has been described. In the tenth embodiment, the movable units ((slide unit 400, protrusion unit 700, and elevating unit 10800)) arranged in the operation unit 10200 are connected to each other in a united state. The same as in each of the above embodiments. The same reference numerals are given to the parts of, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the elevating unit 10800 according to the tenth embodiment is formed by including an elevating member 10820 which is dislocated on the base member 810 so as to be elevated. The elevating member 10820 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view, and is mainly provided with a protrusion 821 projecting to the back surface side and an engaging portion 10822 formed to project from the back surface side.

The engaging portion 10822 is a rectangular protrusion that is engaged with each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700 when the operating unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, and is an elevating member. It is formed so as to project from the back surface side of the 10820. The lateral dimension of the engaging portion 10822 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance dimension between the opposing rotating members 435 and 455 in the combined state, and is larger than that of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400. It is formed so as to protrude toward the back side. Therefore, when the operating unit 200 is displaced to the united state, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be brought into contact with the engaging portion 10822 (see FIG. 102 (a)).

Further, the engaging portion 10822 is provided with a through hole 10822a which is formed so as to project in a rectangular shape from the back surface side of the elevating member 10820 and penetrates in the direction of gravity. The through hole 10822a is a member through which the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 700 is inserted, and is formed in an opening larger than the tip end portion of the projecting member 735 in the top view. As a result, when the operating unit 200 is displaced in the combined state, the tip end portion of the projecting member 735 can be inserted into the through hole 10822a (see FIG. 102 (b)).

Next, the operation unit 10200 in the combined state will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. 101 is an operating unit 10200 in a united state, FIG. 102 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 10200 on the line CIIa-CIIa of FIG. 101, and FIG. 102 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operating unit 10200 of FIG. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the operation unit 10200 in the CIIb line.

As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, each rotating member 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is brought into contact with the elevating unit 10800 (elevating member 10820) of the operating unit 10200 in the combined state with the side surface of the engaging portion 10822. (See FIG. 102 (a)).

The engaging portion 10822 is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the width dimension is reduced as the outer shape thereof is directed downward in the rear view. That is, the left and right side surfaces (left and right in FIG. 99B) of the engaging portion 10822 are formed so as to be inclined toward the central portion in the left-right direction toward the lower side.

Further, as described above, the protruding member 735 is inserted into the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822. In this case, an inclined portion 10735a is formed on the back surface side of the projecting member 735 so that the projecting distance increases toward the lower side, and the inner wall of the through hole 10822a and the inclined portion 10735a are formed so as to be in contact with each other. ..

Therefore, the engaging portion 10822 allows the elevating unit 10800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 700 to be in contact with each other, so that each movable unit (elevating unit 10800, slide) in the combined state can be brought into contact with each other. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of deviation in the arrangement of the unit 400 and the protruding unit 700). As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of unity of each movable unit in the combined state, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, since the movable units are connected to each other, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be transmitted to the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 and the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700.

More specifically, the elevating member 10820 is displaced (vibrated) up and down at a relatively small distance by repeatedly acting a relatively small rotational drive on the drive motor 891 that drives the elevating member 10820 in a reciprocating manner.

In this case, each of the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 is in contact with the left and right (left and right in FIG. 99B) side surfaces of the engaging portion 10822, so that the left and right side surfaces are in contact with each other. The side in contact with the joint portion 10822 can be displaced outward in the left-right direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 101) of the operating unit 10200.

At the united (overhanging) position, the rotating members 435 and 455 are given a rotational moment in a direction in which the side in contact with the engaging portion 10822 due to the center of gravity is displaced inward in the left-right direction of the operating unit 10200. .. Therefore, the rotating members 435 and 455, which are rotationally displaced by the displacement of the elevating member 10820, can come into contact with the engaging portion 10822 again by the rotational moment. As a result, the elevating member 10820 is periodically and repeatedly displaced, so that the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically and repeatedly displaced.

On the other hand, in the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 700, since the inclined portion 10735a is brought into contact with the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822, the elevating member 10820 is given a periodic and repeated displacement, so that the inclined portion 10735 The inner surface of the through hole 10822a of the engaging portion 10822 slides on the inclined surface of the above. Therefore, the inclination of the inclined surface 10735a periodically displaces the distance at which the projecting member 735 is pushed forward (to the left in FIG. 102B). As a result, the elevating member 10820 is displaced repeatedly periodically, so that the protruding member 735 can be displaced repeatedly periodically. Therefore, the driving energy can be suppressed because it is not necessary to apply the driving force to the other driving motors 763,475,476.

That is, at the united (overhanging) position, the elevating member 10820 is provided so as to be able to come into contact with the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455, and the elevating member 10820 is formed so that it can be displaced periodically. The rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820. In other words, the pattern (character) formed by the rotating member 730 (elevating base 720), the rotating member 435, 455, and the elevating member 10820 can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. .. Further, in this case, the elevating member 10820 is forcibly displaced by bringing them into contact with each other, and a mechanism for periodically displaces the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 is provided. There is no need. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Further, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are in a state of being separated from each other (non-contacting), the elevating member 10820 may be subjected to periodic displacement without being affected by each other. it can. That is, the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820 can be easily transmitted to each of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455.

Further, the rotating members 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 are not related to each other, and they can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different manners from each other. That is, since the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455 have different configurations (number of parts and shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the elevating member 10820, they are vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the portion of one character formed by the rotating member 730 and the portion formed by the rotating members 435 and 455 can be vibrated in different manners. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

For example, in the case of the tenth embodiment, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotatably arranged with respect to the base members 434 and 454, due to the periodic displacement of the elevating member 10820, the rotational members are circumferentially centered on the rotation axis. The rotating member 730 can be arranged to periodically repeat the operation of being pushed out in the front-rear direction due to the inclination of the inclined portion 10735 of the protruding member 735.

Further, since each of the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 is directly connected to the displacement (vibration) driving source, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted.

That is, when the projecting member 735 is connected to each of the rotating members 435 and 455, the driving force that displaces (vibrates) the projecting member 735 is transmitted via each of the rotating members 435 and 455, and thus is transmitted to the projecting member 735. Where the driving force is reduced, in the tenth embodiment, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the protruding member 735 are directly connected to the displacement (vibrating) driving source, so that the driving force is efficiently transmitted. be able to.

Further, the elevating member 10820 is arranged on the side closer to the player because the position in the front-rear direction at the united (overhanging) position is arranged in front of the rotating member 730 and the rotating members 435 and 455. The elevating member 10820 can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the pattern (character) is vibrated by the elevating member 10820 on the front side, which is easy for the player to see, as a vibration source, it is possible to easily transmit the force of the vibration to the player.

Next, the operation unit 200 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107.

First, the driving body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 (a) is a front view of the drive body 11761 in a state where the drive body 11761 in the eleventh embodiment is arranged at the first rotation position, and FIG. 103 (b) shows the drive body 11761 in the second rotation. It is a front view of the drive body 761 in the state of being arranged at a position.

In the first embodiment, the cam portion of the drive body 761 is lowered so that the intermediate member 733 is lowered with the rotation of the drive body 761 that displaces the projecting member 735 to the overhanging position (the state of protruding from the rotating member 730). Although the case where the 761b is formed has been described, in the eleventh embodiment, the interposition member 733 is generated as the driving body 11761 displaces the protruding member 735 to the overhanging position (protruding state from the rotating member 730). The cam portion 11761b of the drive body 11761 is formed so as to rise. The same parts as those in the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), the cam portion 11761b of the drive body 11761 according to the eleventh embodiment is attached to the sliding wall 733c in a state where the drive body 11761 is arranged at the first rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R3) on the abutted cam surface (position P1) is set to the minimum diameter, and the cam abutted on the sliding wall 733c when the drive body 11761 is arranged at the second rotation position. The cam diameter (radius R4) on the surface (position P2) is set to the maximum diameter, and the cam diameter is formed so as to continuously increase from the position P1 to the position P2.

Therefore, the vertical position of the sliding wall 733c (that is, the intermediate member 733) is located from the bottom to the top when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position by the action of the cam portion 761b. It is continuously raised to the upper side, and when the drive body 761 is rotated from the second rotation position to the first rotation position, it is continuously lowered from the lowermost position to the uppermost position.

Therefore, when the drive body 761 is rotated from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the cam diameter in the cam portion 11761b is increased to the position P2 which is the maximum diameter, so that the intermediate member 733 is pushed up to the uppermost position. Along with this, the tip of the swing member 732 is positioned at the uppermost position.

Next, the displacement mode will be described when each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700, and elevating unit 800) is displaced to the combined state with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. 104 to 107 are front views of the operating unit 200. It should be noted that FIGS. 104 to 107 show in order the displacement mode when each movable unit is displaced to the united (overhanging) state with FIG. 104 as the initial position.

The operation of each movable unit arranged in the operation unit 200 is switched at three predetermined timings. In the tenth embodiment, the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation will be described in order from the initial position shown in FIG. 104.

In the first operation, the elevating base 720 of the projecting unit 700 is slidably displaced upward with respect to the base member 710. In the second operation, the projecting unit 11700 continues its operation from the first operation, the base members 434 and 435 of the slide unit 400 are slidably displaced toward the central portion of the game machine 10, and the rotating members 435 and 455 are about 45 degrees. Rotationally displaced, the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 is slidably displaced downward. In the third operation, the projecting member 835 of the projecting unit 800 is slid upwardly displaced, and the tip of the swinging member 832 is rotationally displaced upward.

First, as shown in FIG. 104, the protruding unit 11700 of the operating unit 200 at the initial position is arranged with the tip of the swinging member 732 close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the space formed in the central portion of the operating unit 200 in the retracted state can be increased. That is, the arrangement space of each movable unit in the retracted state can be reduced, and the amount of extension during the extension operation can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, in the first operation, the protrusion unit 11700 is displaced. As shown in FIG. 105, the displacement of the protruding unit 11700 in the first operation is performed by sliding the elevating base 720 with respect to the base member 710. As a result, the elevating base 720 and the rotating member 730 of the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the combined position. Since the detailed description of the displacement of the elevating base 720 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the second operation is performed by displacing the slide unit 400 and the elevating unit 800. At this time, the slide displacement distances of the left and right slide members 430 and 450 (base members 434 and 454) are set to the same distance.

Due to the displacement of the second operation, the elevating base 720 of the protruding unit 11700 moves up and down with respect to the base member 710, the rotating members 435 and 455 of the slide unit 400 are displaced to the center, and the elevating member 820 of the elevating unit 800 moves to the base. It is in a state of being displaced downward with respect to the member 810. In the third state, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 1170 is housed inside the rotating member 11730.

Further, in this case, the tip of the swing member 732 of the rotating member 11730 is set to a descending position close to the rotating member 11730. Therefore, the rotating member 11730 is maintained in a state in which the swinging member 732 is close to the rotating member 11730 until it is arranged in the coalescing (overhanging position), and thus rotates in the middle of the displacement to the coalescing position. It is possible to prevent the members 435 and 455 from interfering with the swing member 732. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the pattern (character) formed by each movable unit (elevating member 820, rotating member 435, 455, and rotating member 11730) is formed, and enhance the effect.

Further, since the tip of the swing member 732 is set to a descending position close to the rotating member 11730, the gap between the rotating member 435 and 455 and the swing member 732 can be increased, so that the rotating member 435 and 455 can be formed large. Therefore, it is a pattern (character) that each member (rotating member 435, 455, elevating base 11720 (rotating member 11730) and elevating member 820) of each movable unit (slide unit 400, projecting unit 11700 and elevating unit 800) is united and formed. ) Can be increased.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the third operation is performed by displacing the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 (rotating the driving body 11761). That is, only the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700 is performed at the end of the operation of each operating unit (slide unit 400 and elevating unit 800). As described above, the projecting member 735 of the projecting unit 11700 can displace the swinging member 732 according to its displacement.

Therefore, with the displacement of the protruding member 735 of the protruding unit 11700, the tip of the swinging member 732 can be raised in a direction away from the rotating member 11730. Therefore, when the operation unit 200 is in the united (overhanging) position, the tip of the swing member 732 is separated from the rotating member 11730, so that the elevating member 820, the rotating member 435, 455, and the rotating member 11730 (elevating and lowering) The pattern (character) formed by the base 720) can be made larger.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a game machine may be configured by replacing or combining a part or all of one embodiment with a part or all of another one or a plurality of other embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with (collision) with the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) in the slide unit 400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The left slide member 430 (first member 431) may be formed so as to be in contact with the base member 410.

In this case, the base member 410 is provided with the contacted portion, and the contacted portion is arranged at one end (end point) of the slide displacement range of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), and each component is provided. When the stop position of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) extends beyond the target position due to variations in the dimensions of the left drive motor 475 and the control of the left drive motor 475, the first member 431 is brought into contact with the first member 431. It is brought into contact with the member (that is, the contacted member functions as a stopper that regulates the displacement of the left slide member 430). By bringing the first member 431, whose slide displacement speed is relatively slower than that of the second member 433, into contact with the contacted member, the impact at the time of the contact is weakened and damage to both is suppressed. be able to.

In the first embodiment, in the slide unit 400, the right slide member 450 (rack member 451) which is the contact target (member with which the first member 431 is abutted) of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). The case where the displacement is a slide displacement (linear motion) and the direction of the displacement is parallel to the direction of the slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The contact target of the left slide member 430 (first member 431) should have at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the slide displacement direction of the left slide member 430 (first member 431). For example, the form of the displacement is arbitrary. Therefore, the displacement of the contact object may be a rotational motion or a motion along a curve.

As described above, if the contact target has at least a displacement component in a direction parallel to the direction of slide displacement of the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the left slide member 430 (first member 431) When they are brought into contact with each other, the above-mentioned parallel displacement component can cause the contacted object to be retracted (released), and a buffering action can be exerted accordingly. Further, by displace the contact object in the direction opposite to the case of contact, the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is pushed back by the parallel displacement component described above, and the initial operation of the left slide member 430 ( It is possible to assist the operation of starting the slide displacement from the stopped state).

The contact target does not have to be driven by the driving means. Instead of being driven by a driving means, or in addition to being driven by a driving means, it is formed so as to be urged by an urging means (an elastic material such as rubber or urethane, a spring such as a coil spring or a torsion spring, etc.). Is also good. In this case, when the left slide member 430 (first member 431) is brought into contact with the left slide member 430, the urging means is elastically deformed so that the above-mentioned cushioning action can be exerted and the elastic recovery force thereof is increased. By pushing back the left slide member 430 (first member 431), the initial operation of the left slide member 430 can be assisted.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, the case where the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 are arranged to the overhanging positions substantially at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the upper displacement member 530 is first placed in the overhang position, and then the lower displacement member 640 is placed in the overhang position (that is, the lower contact portion 643 hits the upper contact portion 533 in the stopped state. It may be touched). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, the upper displacement member which is the contact target of the lower displacement member 640 (the object with which the lower displacement member 640 is abutted (combined) at the overhanging position). Although the case where the 530 is formed so as to be displaceable has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the contact target may be a stationary object (non-displaceable object). Even in this case, as in the case of the above embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 rebounds. Can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position in the lower uniting unit 600 is set to the overhanging rotation position has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited.

For example, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged at the overhanging position may be a vertical rotation position. That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the vertical rotation position is set as the overhanging position of the lower displacement member 640, and the lower displacement member 640 is formed to be in contact with the upper displacement member 530 at the overhanging position. You may.

Alternatively, the rotation position of the drive arm 630 when the lower displacement member 640 is arranged in the overhang position is set to the rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position (for example, the drive arm 630 is 80 degrees from the horizontal rotation position). It may be a rotated rotation position). That is, the state in which the drive arm 630 is rotated to the rotation position between the horizontal rotation position and the vertical rotation position is defined as the extension position of the lower displacement member 640, and at the extension position, the lower displacement member 640 is the upper displacement member. It may be formed so as to be in contact with 530.

In any of these configurations, the impact at the time of contact (collision) can be weakened and the bounce can be suppressed by changing (decreasing) the velocity component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target.

In the first embodiment, the case where the lower displacement member 640 is displaced by the rotation of the drive arm 630 in the lower united unit 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other structures may be adopted. good. As another structure, for example, a columnar guide pin is projected from the back surface of the lower displacement member 640 (the back surface at a position corresponding to the drive arm connecting shaft 641), and a guide groove into which the guide pin can slide is provided. An example is a structure in which the lower displacement member 640 is displaced between the retracted position and the overhanging position by extending to the base member 610 and sliding the guide pin along the guide groove.

In the case of such a structure, at least a component in the displacement (velocity) component of the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the contact target (the target with which the lower displacement member 640 is abutted (merged) at the overhang position) is. The shape of the guide groove is set so that it decreases at least in the vicinity of the overhang position. As a result, as in the case of the first embodiment, the impact at the time of contact (collision) is weakened by the change (decrease) of the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target of the lower displacement member 640, and the bounce is suppressed. can do.

In the first embodiment, in the upper uniting unit 500 and the lower uniting unit 600, only the lower uniting unit 600 (lower displacement member 640) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to this, the upper uniting unit 500 (upper displacement member 530) is formed so that the velocity component in the direction toward the contact target can be reduced. May be done. In this case, the lower united unit 600 that is turned upside down may be arranged as the upper united unit 500.

In the first embodiment, in the upper united unit 500 and the lower united unit 600, the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is constant (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are constant. ) Has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the drive state (supply power) of the drive motors 543 and 672 is increased or decreased (that is, the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation of the drive arm 630). You may increase or decrease the speed). For example, the power supplied to the drive motors 543 and 672 is reduced so that at least one of the velocity components of the upper displacement member 530 or the lower displacement member 640 in the direction toward the other party is reduced in the vicinity of the overhang position. An example is a mode in which the displacement speed of the rack member 520 and the rotation speed of the drive arm 630 are reduced. It should be noted that the target for reducing the supplied power may be only one of the drive motors 543 and 672, or both.

In the first embodiment, in the protruding unit 700, the position where the bottom surface of the sliding wall 733c of the intermediate member 733 and the cam surface of the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 come into contact with each other is the rotation of the drive body 761 in the front view. Although the case where the vehicle is located on the vertical line passing through the center has been described (see FIG. 40), the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the above-mentioned position where the bottom surface and the cam surface abut is passed through the rotation center of the drive body 761. It may be set at a position separated from the vertical line to one side in the horizontal direction. In this case, when the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 733 are lowered by their own weight, the swinging member 732 and the interposing member 732 are provided so that the drive body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the projecting member 735. When the weight of the member 733 acts on the drive body 761 and the projecting member 735 is lowered by its own weight, the drive body 761 is rotated in the rotation direction for raising the swing member 732 and the intermediate member 733. It is preferable that the weights of the swing member 732 and the interposition member 733 are formed so as to act on the drive body 761. This is because the load of the drive motor 763 can be suppressed by utilizing the weights of the swing member 732, the intermediate member 733, and the projecting member 735.

In the first embodiment, the case where the cam diameter of the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 is continuously reduced from the maximum diameter of the radius R1 to the minimum diameter of the radius R2 in the protruding unit 700 has been described, but it is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the cam diameter in a predetermined range from the position P1 in the state where the drive body 761 is arranged at the first rotation position may be set to the same radius as the radius R1. The central angle of this predetermined range is preferably set according to the angle required for the sliding pin 761c of the driving body 761 to pass through the curved portion 735b1 in the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735. The timing at which the displacement of the swing member 732 is started can be matched with the timing at which the displacement of the protruding member 735 is started, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the first embodiment, in the projecting unit 700, while one of the swing member 732 or the projecting member 735 has a displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other is vertical (gravity). While one of the swinging member 732 or the protruding member 735 has a downward displacement (velocity) component in the vertical (gravity) direction, the other has a vertical (velocity) component. ) The case where the load of the drive motor 763 is made uniform by forming it so as to have a displacement (velocity) component in the upward direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cam portion 761b of the drive body 761 The cam shape (cam diameter) in the above and the shape of the sliding hole 735b of the protruding member 735 (distance from the rotation center of the drive body 761) may be combined to make the load of the drive motor 763 uniform.

That is, in a region where the load required to exert an action on the sliding wall 733c from the cam portion 761b is relatively large, the load required to exert an action on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is applied. The shape of the sliding hole 735b is set so as to be relatively small, and conversely, in a region where the load required to exert an action on the sliding hole 735b from the sliding pin 761c is relatively large, the sliding hole 735b is slid. The shape of the cam portion 761b is set so that the load required to exert an action from the cam portion 761b on the moving wall 733c is relatively small.

In the first embodiment, the case where the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 acts as an urging force in the direction of lowering (sliding displacement downward) the projecting member 735 in the projecting unit 700 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The elastic recovery force of the urging spring 792 may be acted as an urging force in the direction of raising (sliding displacement upward) the projecting member 735. In this case, due to the synergistic effect of the sliding hole 735b described above with the curved portion 735b1, the initial velocity when the protruding member 735 is slid upward from the stopped state can be increased.

In the second embodiment, the case where the transmission gear 2437a includes the tooth portion 2437a1 and the bulging portion 2437a2 in the slide unit 2400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the left side of the rotation transmission member 2485. The rotation transmission rack gear 413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414 may be formed with a bulging portion in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced. In this case as well, as in the second embodiment, it is possible to smoothly perform the tooth engagement when switching from the second drive state in which the tooth engagement is released to the toothed first drive state.

Further, bulging portions may be formed on both sides of the gears arranged in the vertical direction of the transmission gear 2437a, the left rotation transmission rack gear 413, and the right rotation transmission rack gear 414. In this case, since bulging portions are formed in the gears that mesh with each other when switching from the second drive state to the first drive state, the first drive meshed from the second drive state in which the teeth are released. Switching to the state can be performed more smoothly.

Further, in this case, by forming the bulging portions on both sides of the gears to be meshed with each other, the thickness dimension of the bulging portion (dimension in the tooth width direction of the gear) can be made small.

In the second and third embodiments, when the left slide members 430 and 2430 are displaced from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) to the overhanging position (the position at the center of the game machine) in the slide unit 2400 and the slide unit 3400. Although the case of displacement from the first drive state to the second drive state has been described above, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 430 and 430 are extended from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) (the position on the left side of the game machine). When it is displaced to the position of the center of the game machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

In the fourth embodiment, in the slide unit 4400, the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 are made into small teeth formed to be compact, thereby increasing the rigidity thereof. Although the case of increasing the height has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the tooth width of the teeth adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a may be formed to be large to increase the rigidity thereof.

Also in this case, as in the fourth embodiment, when switching from the third drive state to the first drive state, the teeth of the left rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 adjacent to the notches 4413a and 4414a are damaged. This can be prevented, and the durability of the counterclockwise rotation transmission rack gear 4413 and the right rotation transmission rack gear 4414 can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the protrusion 6411a that displaces the operator 6438 is formed on the base member 6411 has been described in the slide unit 6400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion 6411a is provided on the back case 300. It may be formed in the above and arranged so as to be in contact with the operator 6438. That is, the position where the protrusion 6411a is formed is not limited to the base member 6411, and may be formed on the member on the displacement locus of the operator 6438.

In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are displaced from the retracted position (the position on the left side of the game machine) to the overhanging position (the position at the center of the game machine) in the slide unit 6400 and the slide unit 7400. The case of displacement from the first drive state to the second drive state or the third drive state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the left slide members 6430 and 7430 are in the retracted position (position on the left side of the game machine). When it is displaced from the overhanging position (position at the center of the game machine), it may be displaced from the second drive state to the first drive state.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the roller 7465 that displaces the operator 6438 is arranged on the second slide member 7640 in the slide unit 7400 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operator 6438 is not necessarily limited to this. The roller 7645 is arranged on the base member 7410, and the roller 7645 is displaced in the displacement direction of the left slide member 6430 with the slide displacement of the second slide member 7640 arranged on the base member 7410. There may be.

In the eighth embodiment, in the slide unit 8400, the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8533d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432, so that the second member 8433 is formed with respect to the first member 8431. The relative displacement distance and the relative displacement distance of the third member 8445 with respect to the second member 8433 are formed to be substantially the same, but the outer shape of the second side pinion gear 8583d is not necessarily limited to this. The outer shape of the first side pinion gear 432 is formed to be smaller or larger than the outer shape, so that the distance at which the second member 8433 is displaced relative to the first member 8431 and the third member 8445 are displaced relative to the second member 8433. It may be formed differently from the distance.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, when the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432 and the third member 8445, 9445 are slidably displaced to the effect region K in the slide units 8400, 9400, the effect region The case where K is made invisible has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a part or all of the first member 8431, 9431, the second member 8432, 9432 and the third member 8445, 9445 may be used. , It may be formed from a light-transmitting material so that a part or all of the effect region K can be seen through.

In the eighth and ninth embodiments, in the slide unit 8400 and the slide unit 9400, the side surface on the left side of the base members 8431b and 9431b in the front view and the side surface on the right side of the base members 8434 and 9434 in the front view are substantially the same in the front-rear direction. The case where the side surface on the left side of the base members 8434 and 9434 and the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base members 8446 and 9446 are arranged at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction has been described. The side surface on the left side of the front view of the members 8431b and 9431b and the side surface on the right side of the front view of the base members 8434 and 9434 may be arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction. The side surfaces of the members 8446 and 9446 on the right side in the front view may be arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position, the mode in which the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other is controlled and dimensioned. The case where the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 when both are closer than the reference position due to the variation has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 are displaced to the combined position, they may be in a position where they constantly collide with each other.

In this case, the displacement of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped by colliding with the swinging member, so that the displacement operation of the rotating members 435 and 455 can be stopped quickly. That is, since the rotating members 435 and 455 are displaced with the displacement of the base members 434 and 454, the transmission path of the drive from the drive motors 475 and 476 is lengthened. Therefore, when it takes time to transmit the stop operation of the drive motors 475 and 476, the rotating members 435 and 455 are brought into contact with the swing member 732 to stop the displacement operation, so that the drive motors are quickly stopped at the united (overhanging) position. can do.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position, the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 is used. Although the case where the rotating members 435 and 455 are further displaced has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732, the second members 436 and 456 arranged in the rotating members 435 and 455 are rotated to the opposite side of the first embodiment. You may overhang.

In this case, the second members 436 and 456 are arranged in the space formed between the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732, and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 730 (elevating base 720) are moved up and down. The size of the pattern (character) formed by displacing the member 820 at the united position can be easily increased.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the elevating unit 800, the slide unit 400, and the projecting unit 11700 are displaced to the united (extending) position, the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720) are separated from each other. Although the case where the rotating members are arranged in the state has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720) may be arranged in the abutted state. .. In this case, since the rotating members 435 and 455 and the rotating members 11730 are arranged in contact with each other, the rotating members 435 and 455, the rotating members 11730 (elevating base 720), and the elevating members 820 are displaced and formed at the combined position. The size of the pattern (character) can be easily increased.

In the first embodiment, when the slide unit 400 and the projecting unit 700 are displaced to the united (overhanging) position and the rotating members 435 and 455 and the swinging member 732 come into contact with each other, the rotating member 730 rotates. , The case where the rotating members 435 and 455 absorb the impact when colliding with the swinging member 732 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elevating base 720 may be rotationally displaced with respect to the base member 710.

In this case, since the rotating member 730 is connected to the transmission path for transmitting the drive for rotating the elevating base 720, the elevating base 720 is attached to the base member 710 where it is difficult to rotate with respect to the elevating base 720. By rotating the members 435 and 455, the rotating members 435 and 455 can be easily rotated when they come into contact with the swinging member 732. Therefore, the impact when the rotating members 435 and 455 collide with the swinging member 732 can be easily absorbed.

In the first embodiment, when the second effect mode is formed, at least a part of the contact portion of the rotating member 435 with the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. Although it is arranged on the front side, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotating member 435 is the entire contacted portion of the contact portion 533 of the upper displacement member 530 and the contact portion 643 of the lower displacement member 640. It may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the. Further, it may be arranged on the front side of the region beyond this.

In this case, since the contact portion between the upper displacement member 530 and the lower displacement member 640 can be made invisible to the player by the rotating member 435, the upper displacement member 530, the lower displacement member 640, and the rotating member 435 are combined into one pattern. It can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to recognize the pattern (character) of the second production mode and impairing the interest.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member dislocated linearly on the base member, and a contact member formed so as to be in contact with the displacement member, the displacement member is the base. It has a first member that is linearly displaceable on the member, a pinion gear that is rotatably arranged on the first member, and a rack gear to which the pinion gear is meshed, and can be linearly displaced on the first member. The base member includes a second member to be arranged, the base member includes a rack gear to which the pinion gear is meshed, and the first member of the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. Game machine A1.

Here, a game machine including a base member and a displacement member disposed of the base member so as to be linearly displaceable is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-57166). In this case, for example, a displacement member that is being displaced is brought into contact with the contact member to displace the contact member together with the displacement member, or a contact member is arranged at the end of the displacement range of the displacement member. , When the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member (the contact member functions as a stopper). Are known.

However, the above-mentioned conventional configuration has a problem that the displacement member and the contact member may be damaged when the displacement member is brought into contact with the contact member. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the displacement member is slowed down in order to suppress damage, the effect of the displacement of the displacement member is impaired.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, it is possible to suppress damage to the displacement member and the contact member while ensuring the effect of the displacement of the displacement member.

That is, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member is a second member. Since the rack gear of the base member is meshed with the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the one member, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is increased as compared with the first member. The speed can be linearly displaced with respect to the base member. As a result, the displacement speed of the second member can be increased, and the effect of the displacement can be ensured. On the other hand, since the displacement member brings the first member, which has a slower displacement speed than the second member, into contact with the contact member, the impact at the time of the contact is weakened and the displacement member and the contact member are suppressed from being damaged. can do.

As a form of driving the first member with respect to the base member, for example, a pinion gear arranged on the base member is meshed with a rack gear formed on the first member, and the pinion gear is rotationally driven to base the first member. The base member is displaced linearly with respect to the member, or the tip of the arm body whose base end is rotatably supported by the base member is connected to the first member and the arm body is rotationally driven to rotate the first member. An example is one that is linearly displaced with respect to.

Further, the contact between the displacement member and the contact member may be performed when the second member is linearly displaced in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the projecting direction. , The second member may be the one performed at the time of linear displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the second member is displaced relative to the first member in the storage direction. In either case, the first member, which has a slower displacement rate than the second member, is brought into contact with the contact member, thereby weakening the impact at the time of the contact, and the displacement member and the contact member Damage can be suppressed.

In the game machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displaceable direction of the contact member is a straight line of the displacement member when the displacement member is contacted. A game machine A2 characterized in a direction that allows displacement.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the contact member is displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is in contact with the displaceable direction of the contact member. Since the direction is such that the displacement of the displacement member is allowed, the contact member can escape while receiving the displacement of the displacement member, so that a cushioning action can be exerted, and as a result, the displacement member and the contact member are damaged. Can be easily suppressed.

The direction in which the linear displacement of the displacement member is allowed means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, but may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

The game machine A3 is characterized in that the displaceable direction of the contact member is set in a direction parallel to the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member in the game machine A2.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the displaceable direction of the contact member is set to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is in contact with the game machine A3. At that time, the escape operation of the contact member can be smoothly performed. Therefore, the cushioning action can be reliably exerted, and damage to the displacement member and the contact member can be easily suppressed.

The game machine A4 is characterized in that the game machine A3 includes a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, a guide member for guiding the linear displacement of the displacement member is provided, and the guide member guides the linear displacement of the contact member, so that the device as a whole is compact. It can be changed. That is, when the first guide member for guiding the displacement member and the second guide member for guiding the contact member are arranged side by side in different positions in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement. As a result, the space in the direction orthogonal to the direction of linear displacement increases, which leads to an increase in size. On the other hand, according to the game machine A4, by also using one of the guide members, the space efficiency can be improved and the size can be reduced.

A5 of the game machines A2 to A4, wherein the contact member can be arranged at a position where the contact member is not in contact with the displacement member.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, the contact member can be arranged at a position where the contact member is not in contact with the displacement member, so that the displacement member hits the contact member. It is possible to form a state in which they are not in contact with each other. That is, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively high speed, it is easy to assume that the stop position of the displacement member extends beyond the target position due to variations in dimensions and control, so that the displacement member is brought into contact with the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is linearly displaced at a relatively low speed, it is easy to match the stop position of the displacement member with the target position, so that the contact member is brought into contact with the member (the contact member functions as a stopper). By arranging the displacement member in a non-contact position and not contacting the two, the number of contacts is reduced, the fatigue of the displacement member and the contact member due to the contact is reduced, and the life of the members is improved. Can be planned.

In any of the game machines A2 to A5, a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member is provided, and the contact member pushes back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. A game machine A6 characterized in that it is formed so as to be displaceable in a direction.

Here, the displacement member includes a first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member and a second member that is linearly displaceable on the first member, and the rack gear of the second member is By engaging the rack gear of the base member via a pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, the second member is moved from the first member by utilizing the linear displacement of the first member with respect to the base member. Since the structure is such that the vehicle is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is increased, the force required for driving becomes relatively large. In particular, during the initial operation of the displacement member (at the start of linear displacement from the stopped state), the force required for driving is maximized due to the influence of the inertial force. Therefore, the initial operation (the speed of linear displacement from the stopped state) becomes slow, and the effect of the displacement may be hindered.

In this case, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of the game machines A2 to A5, the contact member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means. Therefore, the initial operation of the displacement member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. As a result, it is possible to speed up the initial operation and improve the effect of the effect due to the displacement.

The direction of pushing back the displacement member means that the direction of displacement of the contact member includes at least a component in the direction of linear displacement of the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the contact member does not have to be a linear displacement, but may be a rotational or curved (curved) displacement. Further, when the displacement of the contact member is a linear displacement, the direction of the linear displacement does not have to be parallel to the direction of the linear displacement of the displacement member, and may be inclined.

In the game machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member comes into contact with the first member of the displacement members. A game machine A7 characterized by being displaced.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, when the contact member is displaced in the direction of pushing back the displacement member by the driving force of the contact member driving means, the contact member is among the displacement members. Since it is in contact with the first member of the displacement member, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be improved. That is, since the contact member is in contact with the first member whose displacement speed is slower than that of the second member and pushes back the first member, an auxiliary force acts from the contact member to the displacement member (first member). (That is, the time from when the displacement member in the stopped state starts to be pushed back until the speed of the displacement member exceeds the speed of the contact member and the displacement of the displacement member precedes the displacement of the contact member) is longer. As a result, the efficiency of assisting the initial operation of the displacement member can be increased.

In the game machine A6 or A7, the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, and the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is the rack in the contact member. The gaming machine A8 characterized in that the gear ratio is set to be larger than the gear ratio of the pinion mechanism.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6 or A7, when the first member and the contact member are linearly displaced with respect to the base member by the rack and pinion mechanism, the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member Since the gear ratio is set to a gear ratio larger than the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member, it is possible to quickly and linearly displace the displacement member from the stopped state, and after the start of the linear displacement, the displacement member ( The speed of linear displacement of the second member) can be increased, and as a result, the effect of effect associated with the displacement can be improved.

That is, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the contact member is set to a small gear ratio, a larger driving force can be exerted. Therefore, the force to push back the displacement member by the contact member is strengthened to cause displacement. The initial operation of the member (start of linear displacement from the stopped state) can be reliably assisted. Therefore, the displacement member can be quickly linearly displaced from the stopped state. On the other hand, since the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is set to a large gear ratio, the speed of linear displacement of the first member can be increased, so that the linear displacement of the second member can be increased accordingly. You can increase the speed.

The large (small) gear ratio means that the linear displacement distance of the rack gear when the pinion gear makes one rotation is large (small).

Here, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is reduced in order to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member, the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation is reduced. On the other hand, if the gear ratio of the rack and pinion mechanism in the first member is increased in order to increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation, the initial operation of the displacement member becomes slow. That is, it has been impossible in the past to accelerate the initial operation of the displacement member and increase the speed of linear displacement of the displacement member (second member) after the initial operation. By adopting a structure that pushes back the displacement member, this compatibility is possible for the first time.

<Concept of the invention using the lower united unit 600 as an example>
It includes a driving means, a displacement member driven by the driving means and formed so as to be displaceable toward a first position, and a contacted member with which the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that at least a component of the velocity components of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

Here, a pair of displacement members are provided, and the pair of displacement members can be displaced between a retracted position arranged at a predetermined interval and an abutting position (first position) where they are in contact with each other. The game machine to be formed is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-51160). In this type of gaming machine, for example, a pair of displacement members retracted to a retracted position are displaced in a direction close to each other, and the pair of displacement members are integrated at the contact position. The production is performed to form a single character.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when a pair of displacement members are brought into contact with each other at the first position, an impact is generated, and the posture becomes unstable, for example, they are bounced off each other. was there. On the other hand, if the displacement speed of the pair of displacement members is slowed down in order to weaken the impact at the time of contact, the time required to integrate the pair of displacement members to form one character increases and the time is extended. The effect of the production is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member among the velocity components of the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, so that the displacement member is located at the first position. It is possible to suppress the generation of an impact when the displaced displacement member is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

Further, since the decrease of at least the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the displacement is performed until the vicinity of the first position is reached. Since the speed of displacement of the member can be increased, the time required to integrate the displacement member with the contacted member to form one character can be reduced, and the extension can be suppressed. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, the contacted member may be a member stopped at the first position, or may be a member formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position. In the latter case, the contacted member is arranged in the first position before the displacement member (that is, the displacement member is placed in the first position with respect to the contacted member that has reached the first position first and is in a stopped state. It may be abutted), and is arranged at the first position substantially at the same time as the displaced member (that is, the displaced member and the abutted member in a displaced state are abutted at the first position). It may be.

Further, as a form in which the component in the direction toward the contacted member decreases in the vicinity of the first position, a form in which the component decreases continuously toward the first position and a form in which the component gradually decreases toward the first position. , A form combining these is exemplified.

Further, the decrease of the component in the direction toward the contacted member means that not only the speed toward the contacted member is reduced but also the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes 0, and This is intended to include a case where the speed in the direction away from the contacted member increases (that is, the speed in the direction toward the contacted member becomes negative).

The game machine B1 includes a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmitting means has a speed component of the displacement member in a state where the driving state of the driving means is constant. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that at least the component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the transmission means reduces the velocity component of the displacement member at least in the direction toward the contacted member in the vicinity of the first position. Since it can be performed in a state where the driving state of the driving means is constant, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the driving means according to the displacement position of the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control of the drive means, reduce the control cost, and improve the reliability.

As the state in which the drive state is constant, for example, if the drive means is an electric actuator (for example, an electric motor, an electric linear actuator, etc.), a state in which the supply current or the supply voltage is constant is exemplified. To. However, changes in state during transient response during start and stop shall be ignored.

In the game machine B2, the displacement member is provided with a base member that is displaceably arranged, and the transmission means is located at a position that is rotatably connected to the base member and is separated from the rotation base by a predetermined distance. A connecting member having a connecting tip portion that is formed and rotatably connected to the displacement member is provided, and the connecting member is rotated about the rotation base portion in a direction that brings the connecting tip portion closer to the first position. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced toward the first position.

According to the game machine B3, a connecting member is interposed between the displacement member and the base member, and the movement locus of the connecting tip portion of the connecting member is an arc centered on the rotation base portion. That is, the tangential displacement of the arc is applied to the displacement member. In this case, since the connecting member is rotated with the rotation base as the center of rotation in the direction in which the connecting tip is brought closer to the first position, the first position (that is, the contacted member) of the velocity components of the displacement member. The component in the direction toward the direction can be reduced at least in the vicinity of the first position. As described above, since the transmission means inserts a connecting member between the base member and the displacement member and displaces the displacement member via the connecting member, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the transmission means is transmitted. The structure of the means can be simplified.

In the game machine B2, the displacement member is provided with a base member in which the displacement member is displaceably arranged, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove extending from the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member is provided with a guide groove. A guided portion guided along the guide groove is provided, and the guide groove is a component of at least a velocity component of the guided portion guided along the guide groove in a direction toward the contacted member. However, the gaming machine B4 is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B4, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove extending from the base member to guide the displacement member, and the displacement member is provided with a guided portion to be guided along the guide groove. Of the velocity components of the guided portion guided along the guide groove, at least a component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position. In this way, the transmission means is provided with a guide groove for guiding the displacement member (guided portion), and the displacement member is displaced along the guide groove. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the transmission means The structure of can be simplified.

A game machine B5, wherein any one of the game machines B2 to B3 is provided with an interposition member which is displaceably connected to the base member on one side and displaceably connected to the displacement member on the other side.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B3, one side is displaceably connected to the base member and the other side is displaceably connected to the displacement member. , The driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means, and when the displacement member is displaced, the displacement of the intermediate member can be caused to act on the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member can be in a form in which the displacement due to the action of the transmission means and the displacement due to the action of the interposition member are combined. As a result, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect of the displacement can be enhanced.

In the game machine B5, the interposition member is rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support on one side and the other side.

According to the game machine B6, one side and the other side of the interposition member are rotatably connected to the base member and the displacement member by a shaft support, so that when the displacement member is displaced, the interposition member is on one side. The other side is displaced by an arc-shaped locus with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Therefore, such an arcuate displacement (that is, a displacement that constantly changes the displacement direction along the tangential direction of the arc) can be applied to the displacement member from the intermediate member member. As a result, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the form of displacement of the displacement member can be complicated, and the effect of the effect of the displacement can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the velocity component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member is at least substantially 0 at the first position. A game machine B7 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine B7, in any of the game machines B2 to B6, the transmission means has such that the component of the speed components of the displacement members in the direction toward the contacted member is at least substantially 0 at the first position. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the generation of an impact when the displacement member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

In the game machine B7, the transmission means is characterized in that, among the velocity components of the displacement member, a component in the direction toward the contacted member is formed so as to have a negative value at the first position. Game machine B8.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of the game machine B7, the transmission means is formed so that the component of the speed component of the displacement member in the direction toward the contacted member has a negative value at the first position. That is, since the displacement member has a component in the direction away from the contacted member at the first position, the displacement member is contacted when the displacement member displaced at the first position is brought into contact with the contacted member. Can be released from the contacted member, whereby the generation of impact can be suppressed more reliably. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being repelled from the contacted member, and it is possible to stabilize the posture of the displacement member.

Further, if the value is negative in the first position, even if the displacement member comes into contact with the contacted member before the displacement member reaches the first position due to variations in dimensions and control, etc. Since the probability that the speed of the displacement member is slow (or a negative value) can be increased, it is possible to easily suppress the generation of impact.

In any of the game machines B2 to B8, a second driving means for driving the contacted member and a second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the contacting member are provided, and the above-mentioned The contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, and the second transmitting means is a speed component of the contacted member in a state where the driving state of the second driving means is constant. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that at least a component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable toward the first position, so that the effect of bringing the pair of members into contact with each other is produced. The effect of can be enhanced. For example, by displacing the contacted member and the displacement member in a direction close to each other and abutting (coalescing) them at the first position, the pair of members can be integrated to form one character.

In this case, according to the game machine B9, a second transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the second driving means to the contacted member is provided, and the second transmitting means is at least one of the velocity components of the contacted member. Since the component in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, the generation of an impact when the contacted member displaced to the first position is brought into contact with the displacement member is suppressed. it can. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the contacted member and the displacement member from repelling each other, and it is possible to stabilize the postures of the contacted member and the displacement member.

Further, since the decrease of at least the velocity component of the contacted member in the direction toward the displacement member is formed so as to decrease in the vicinity of the first position, it is covered until it reaches the vicinity of the first position. Since the speed of displacement of the contact member can be increased, the time required to integrate the contact member with the displacement member to form one character is reduced for both the contact member and the displacement member, respectively. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the extension. As a result, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, the second transmission means reduces the velocity component of the contacted member at least in the direction toward the displacement member in the vicinity of the first position in a state where the drive state of the second drive means is constant. Since this can be performed, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as increasing or decreasing the driving state of the second driving means according to the displacement position of the contacted member. Therefore, the control of the second driving means can be simplified, the control cost can be reduced, and the reliability can be improved.

The contacted member, the second driving means, and the second transmitting means in the game machine B9 can be read as the displacement members, the driving means, and the transmitting means in the game machines B2 to B8, and these can be applied. Therefore, the interposition member in the game machine B5 or B6 may be intervened between the base member and the contacted member.

<Concept of the invention using the protruding unit 700 as an example>
A first transmission means and a second transmission that transmit the driving force of the driving means to the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the first member and the second member, respectively. In a gaming machine provided with means, the first transmission means has a first predetermined section in which a first driving force is loaded on the driving means, and the first driving loaded in the first predetermined section. A first suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the force is applied to the driving means can be formed, and the second transmitting means has a second predetermined section in which the driving means is loaded with a second driving force. And a second suppression section in which a driving force smaller than the second driving force loaded in the second predetermined section is loaded on the driving means, and the first transmitting means is the first. 1 In the state of forming a predetermined section, the second transmission means forms the second suppression section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section at least a part of the first predetermined section. Then, the gaming machine C1 characterized in that the first transmission means forms the first suppression section in at least a part of the second predetermined section.

Here, the driving means, the first member and the second member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the first transmitting means and the first transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first member and the second member, respectively. A gaming machine provided with a second transmission means is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-53858). According to such a game machine, since the two members (first member and second member) can be displaced by the driving means of 1, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. However, in the configuration in which the member 2 is displaced by the driving means 1, the driving force for driving both is overlapped, so that the load on the driving means becomes large and the durability thereof is lowered. It was. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the two members (first member and second member) are alternately displaced (one by one), the load of the driving means is reduced, but the state in which both the two members are displaced cannot be formed. The production effect is hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the first transmission means can form a first predetermined section and a first suppression section in which the load of the drive means can be made smaller than that of the first predetermined section, and the first suppression section can be formed. In a state in which the two transmission means can form a second predetermined section and a second suppression section in which the load of the drive means can be made smaller than the second predetermined section, and the first transmission means forms the first predetermined section. In a state where the second transmission means forms the second suppression section in at least a part of the first predetermined section and the second transmission means forms the second predetermined section, at least a part of the second predetermined section is the first. 1 The transmission means forms the first suppression section, that is, when one is relatively high load, the other is relatively low load, and when the other is relatively high load, the other is The load can be relatively low. Therefore, since the load of the drive means can be distributed, the load of the drive means can be reduced and the durability thereof can be improved.

Further, it is not necessary to displace the first member and the second member alternately (one by one), and it is possible to form a state in which the first member and the second member are both displaced. Therefore, while reducing the load on the driving means, It is possible to improve the effect of production.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is rubbed against the cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the peripheral surface of the cam member, and the first member or the first member or A cam rubbing member that imparts a displacement to the second member is provided, and in the first restraining section or the second restraining section, the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member is determined by the first predetermined. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the cam rubbing member per unit rotation of the cam member in a section or a second predetermined section.

In the game machine C1, at least one of the first transmission means and the second transmission means is a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the drive means and a pin portion located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. And a crank rubbing member which has a guide groove in which the pin portion of the crank member slides and which imparts a displacement to the first member or the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. In the first suppression section or the second suppression section, the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member is measured by the unit rotation of the crank member in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the load of the driving means is reduced by reducing the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member.

According to the game machine C2 or C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the first member or the second member is displaced by the interlocking of the cam member and the cam rubbing member or the interlocking of the crank member and the crank rubbing member. Unit rotation of the cam member and crank member according to the outer shape of the cam member (distance from the center of rotation to the outer peripheral surface (rubbing surface)) and the outer shape of the guide groove of the crank rubbing member (distance to the center of rotation of the crank member). The amount of displacement of the first member or the second member can be changed. In other words, the load of the driving means can be changed. Therefore, for example, even when the driving state of the driving means (for example, the power supplied to the electric motor) is kept constant, the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member can be changed. As a result, in the first or first predetermined section and the first or second suppression section, a change is formed in the displacement speeds of the first member and the second member, and the first or second suppression is performed while enhancing the effect. In the section, the load of the driving means can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity, and the first suppression section or the first suppression section or the first. 2. In the restraint section, the gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section, the displacement of the first member or the second member causes a displacement component upward in the direction of gravity. In the first restraint section or the second restraint section, the displacement of the first member or the second member includes a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the weight of the first member or the second member is used to obtain the first. The load of the driving means in the suppression section or the second suppression section can be made smaller than the load of the driving means in the first predetermined section or the second predetermined section.

Further, in this way, by changing the load of the driving means by utilizing the own weight of the first member or the second member, for example, the cam member and the cam rubbing member are interlocked, or the crank member and the crank rubbing member When the load of the driving means is changed as in the case of using interlocking, it is not necessary to change the displacement speed of the first member or the second member, and the displacement speed of the first member or the second member is constant. The load of the drive means can be changed while maintaining the speed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the first transmission means gives a displacement to the first member by being rubbed against a cam member rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the peripheral surface of the cam member. The second transmission means includes a crank member having a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin portion located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion, and a crank thereof. The cam member and the cam member are provided with a guide groove in which a pin portion of the member slides and a crank rubbing member that imparts a displacement to the second member by sliding the pin portion along the guide groove. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that the crank member is integrally formed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C4, the cam member and the crank member are integrally formed, so that a space for arranging the cam member and the crank member separately is provided. Can be eliminated, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, as compared with the case where they are formed separately, it is possible to suppress the displacement deviation of the first member and the second member and improve the accuracy of synchronization of both members.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not transmit the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member, and the first member or the second member. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that a non-transmission section for maintaining the two members in a stopped state can be formed, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C5, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means does not transfer the driving force of the driving means to the first member or the second member. As a transmission, a non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be formed, and the displacement of the first member or the second member is started after passing through the non-transmission section, so that the first member or the second member is in the stopped state. The first member or the second member can be smoothly displaced.

That is, when the displacement of the first member or the second member in the stopped state is started, the load of the driving means becomes large due to the influence of the inertial force, so that the initial speed of the first member or the second member becomes slow. In places where it is difficult to displace smoothly, the driving force of the driving means is not transmitted to the first member or the second member, and a non-transmission section for maintaining the first member or the second member in a stopped state is provided. In the transmission means, the drive means can be idled to give momentum, and after the momentum is given (that is, through the non-transmission section), the displacement of the first member or the second member can be started. Therefore, the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form the non-transmission section at the same time, and the displacement of the first member and the second member is started after passing through each of the non-transmission sections. A game machine C7 characterized in that.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, both the first transmission means and the second transmission means can form a non-transmission section at the same time, and after passing through each of these non-transmission sections, the first member and Since the displacement of the second member is started, it is not necessary to displace either the first member or the second member, and during that time, the driving means can idle with a small load. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be strengthened, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced.

In the game machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member is a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity. A game machine C8 characterized by being provided with.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state by the non-transmission section, the displacement of the other of the first member or the second member Is provided with a displacement component downward in the direction of gravity, so that when one of the first member or the second member is maintained in a stopped state and the other is displaced, the driving force required for the displacement can be suppressed. As a result, the momentum of the driving means can be strengthened, and the first member or the second member in the stopped state can be smoothly displaced. Further, since the other of the first member or the second member can be displaced while one of the first member or the second member is maintained in the stopped state, both the first member and the second member are stopped. It is possible to improve the effect of the effect by avoiding being in a state.

In any of the game machines C6 to C8, at least one of the first transmission means or the second transmission means is a main body portion rotated by the driving force of the driving means and a pin located eccentrically from the rotation center of the main body portion. A crank member having a portion and a guide groove on which a pin portion of the crank member slides are provided, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove to impart displacement to the first member or the second member. A section provided with the crank rubbing member and the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as the non-transmission section, and the pin portion of the crank member is the non-transmission section. After passing through the transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin portion that has reached a predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction and slides toward the non-transmission section. If so, the gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C6 to C8, a section in which the guide groove of the crank rubbing member is formed in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member is defined as a non-transmission section. , The pin part of the crank member passes through the non-transmission section, the displacement of the first member or the second member is started, and the pin part reaching a predetermined position of the guide groove changes the sliding direction to the non-transmission section. When sliding toward the crank member, the rotation of the crank member is stopped before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive means.

That is, by forming the guide groove of the crank rubbing member in an arc shape concentric with the rotation center of the crank member, the driving force of the driving means can be non-transmitted (a non-transmission section can be formed), but the pin of the crank member. In the structure in which the portion reciprocates in the guide groove, the shape of the non-transmission section is a convex arc toward the center of rotation of the crank member from the state where the pin portion passes through the non-transmission section and changes direction at a predetermined position. It becomes. Therefore, when the pin portion after changing the direction passes through the non-transmission section, not only the sliding resistance increases, but also the displacement amount of the crank rubbing member per unit rotation of the crank member increases, and the driving means The load of is excessive. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the driving means by stopping the rotation of the crank member before the pin portion reaches the non-transmission section.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 2400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a slide member displaced so as to be slidable on the base member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide member, the slide member can be rotated. The conversion means includes a rotating member arranged in the base member and a conversion means for converting a slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into a rotational motion of the rotating member. The converting means is such that the slide displacement is the rotation of the rotating member. The gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is possible to form a state that is not converted into motion.

Here, a game machine including a base member, a slide member displaced on the base member so as to be slidable, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the slide member to displace the slide member is known. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236802). Further, there is also known a game machine in which a rotating member and a driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member are provided on the slide member. According to this gaming machine, it is possible to rotate a rotating member arranged on the slide member while sliding displacement (linear motion) of the slide member, and it is possible to produce an effect that combines linear motion and rotary motion. Can be done.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the rotating member and the driving means for rotationally driving the rotating member are arranged on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole increases and the slide member is driven. There is a problem that the load of the driving means for (sliding displacement) becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, a rotating member rotatably arranged on the slide member and a conversion means for converting the slide displacement of the slide member with respect to the base member into the rotational motion of the rotating member are provided. The rotating member can be rotated according to the slide displacement of the slide member. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the driving means for driving (rotating) the rotating member on the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole is reduced by that amount to drive the slide member (slide displacement). It is possible to suppress the load of the driving means for causing).

In this case, according to the game machine D1, the conversion means can form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. Therefore, only the form in which the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member. Instead, for example, it is possible to form a form in which the slide member is slidably displaced while the rotating member remains non-rotating. As a result, the number of combinations of movements (linear movement and rotary movement) of the slide member and the rotating member can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. D2 is a gaming machine D2 comprising a pinion gear, and a releasing means formed on the base member so as to be able to release the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear.

According to the game machine D2, the conversion means are a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member and a pinion gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. Since the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, the slide displacement can be converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. Further, since the conversion means includes the releasing means for releasing the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. That is, it is possible to form not only a form in which the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also a form in which the slide member is slid and displaced while the rotating member is not rotating. The number of combinations of member motions (linear motion and rotary motion) can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, the releasing means is arranged on the base member, and it is not necessary to dispose the means for releasing the meshing of the rack gear and the pinion gear on the slide member, so that the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. .. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D2, the releasing means rotates at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear to obtain a mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A game machine D3 characterized by being released.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the releasing means is to rotate at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear to obtain the rack gear. Since the meshing with the pinion gear is released, the space required for such rotation (that is, the meshing between the rack gear and the pinion gear) can be suppressed, and the size can be reduced.

The game machine D4 is characterized in that at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, at least one tooth of the rack gear or the pinion gear is formed in a shape in which the tooth thickness is gradually reduced toward one side in the tooth width direction. At least the portion where the rack gear is formed is rotated along a rotation axis parallel to the tooth surface of the rack gear, and after the mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is rotated in the opposite direction. , When the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed with each other, such meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine D2, the releasing means displaces at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear to release the mesh between the rack gear and the pinion gear. A game machine D5 characterized by.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the releasing means is to displace at least a portion of the base member on which the rack gear is formed in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack gear so that the rack gear and the pinion gear can be separated from each other. Since the meshing is released, the above-mentioned portion of the base member is displaced in the opposite direction after the release, and when the rack gear and the pinion gear are meshed with each other, the meshing can be smoothly performed.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. A gaming machine D6 comprising a pinion gear and a part of the rack gear in which teeth are missing.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and a slide member formed meshably on the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably arranged in the rack gear, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, so that the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, since the rack gear has teeth missing in a part thereof, it is possible to form a state in which the slide displacement is not converted into the rotational movement of the rotating member when the pinion gear passes through the tooth-missing portion of the rack gear. .. That is, according to this configuration, the rotating member can be rotated along with the slide displacement of the slide member until the pinion gear reaches the portion of the rack gear where the teeth are missing, while the teeth of the rack gear. By stopping the slide displacement of the slide member when the pinion gear reaches the missing portion, the rotation of the rotating member can be continued by the inertial force.

As described above, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped. The form in which the rotating member is rotated can be formed, and the number of combinations of the sliding member and the motion of the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion) can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, according to the game machine D6, the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear are released by missing a part of the teeth of the rack gear, and the means for releasing the teeth of the rack gear and the pinion gear is a slide member. Since it is not necessary to dispose of the slide member, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D6, the tooth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear is characterized in that the rigidity is higher than that of the other teeth.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion of the teeth of the rack gear have higher rigidity than the other teeth, so that the durability is improved. Can be planned. That is, the teeth adjacent to the missing portion collide with the teeth of the pinion gear that have passed through the missing portion of the rack gear, so that where they are easily damaged, the rigidity is increased to improve durability. be able to.

As a means for increasing the rigidity, for example, a form for increasing the tooth width of the tooth is exemplified. According to this example, the rigidity can be increased without causing deterioration of the meshing property with the pinion gear.

In the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of slide displacement of the slide member, and a rack gear rotatably formed on the rack gear and rotatably arranged on the slide member. The one-way clutch includes a pinion gear and a one-way clutch disposed in a rotation transmission path from the pinion gear or the pinion gear to the rotating member, and the one-way clutch changes a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation is cut off. A game machine D8 characterized in that it can be formed as possible.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the conversion means includes a rack gear formed on the base member along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member and a slide member formed meshably on the rack gear. Since the pinion gear is rotatably arranged in the rack gear, the slide member is slidably displaced with respect to the base member while the pinion gear is meshed with the rack gear, so that the slide displacement is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating member. can do.

In this case, the one-way clutch is formed so that the state of allowing the transmission of rotation and the state of blocking the transmission of rotation can be changed. Therefore, by changing the one-way clutch to the state of blocking the transmission of rotation, the slide displacement rotates. It is possible to form a state that is not converted into the rotational movement of the member. That is, not only the one-way clutch is in a state of allowing the transmission of rotation and the rotating member is rotated with the slide displacement of the slide member, but also, for example, the one-way clutch is in a state of blocking the transmission of rotation of the rotating member. The slide member is slid and displaced while it is not rotating, or the one-way clutch is changed from a state that allows transmission of rotation to a state that shuts off when the displacement of the slide member is stopped. It is possible to form a form in which the rotation of the rotating member is continued by its inertial force while the is stopped.

As described above, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, not only the rotating member is rotated according to the sliding displacement of the sliding member, but also the sliding member is slid while the rotating member is non-rotating. It is possible to form a form in which the rotating member is rotated while the slide displacement of the slide member is stopped, and the number of combinations of the slide member and the motion of the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion) can be determined. Can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine D8, the one-way clutch includes a displacement member displaceable on the slide member and a driving means for driving the displacement member and displaced on the slide member, and the one-way clutch transmits rotation. D9 is a gaming machine D9 comprising an operator operated to change between a state in which the clutch is allowed and a state in which the clutch is blocked, and the operator is operated by the displaced displacement member.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of the game machine D8, a displacement member displaceable on the slide member and a driving means for driving the displacement member and being arranged on the slide member are provided. , The displacement of the displacement member can be combined in addition to the motion of the slide member and the rotating member (linear motion and rotary motion), and the number of combinations thereof can be increased. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In this case, since the operator of the one-way clutch is operated by the displaced displacement member, the displacement member can have both the role of performing the effect by the displacement and the role of operating the operator. That is, since it is not necessary to separately provide the slide member with a means for operating the operator of the one-way clutch, the weight of the slide member as a whole can be reduced accordingly. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

In the game machine D8, the one-way clutch includes an operator operated to change a state in which rotation transmission is allowed and a state in which rotation transmission is blocked, and the base member is used when the slide member is slidably displaced. The gaming machine D10 includes an engaging portion located on the displacement locus of the operator, and the operator is operated by the engaging portion when the slide member is slidably displaced.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of the game machine D8, the base member is provided with an engaging portion located on the displacement locus when the slide member is slidably displaced, and is engaged when the slide member is slidably displaced. Since the operator is operated by the joint, it is not necessary to dispose of a means for switching the state of the one-way clutch (that is, operating the operator) on the slide member, so that the weight of the slide member as a whole is increased accordingly. Can be lightened. As a result, the load of the driving means for driving (sliding displacement) the slide member can be suppressed.

The position of the engaging portion may be any position as long as it is on the displacement locus of the operator described above. For example, it may be one end or the other end on the displacement locus, or may be in the middle of the displacement locus.

The game machine D10 includes a second slide member displaced on the base member so as to be slidable, and a second driving means for applying a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member. The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is mutably formed along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member with the slide displacement of the member.

According to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion is formed so as to be changeable along the direction of the slide displacement of the slide member with the slide displacement of the second slide member. It is possible to change the position where the state of the clutch is switched, that is, the position where the rotation of the rotating member is changed from the allowable state to the regulated state or from the regulated state to the allowable state. As a result, the position where the rotating state of the rotating member is changed when the sliding member is slidably displaced and the position where the rotating member is rotated while the sliding displacement of the sliding member is stopped are set according to, for example, a gaming state. It can be changed, and as a result, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the second slide member plays a role of performing the effect by the displacement. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion are also used, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The game machine D10 includes a second slide member displaced on the base member so as to be slidable, and a second driving means for applying a driving force to the second slide member to displace the second slide member. The gaming machine D12 is characterized in that the position of the engaging portion is mutably formed between a position where the operator can be operated and a position where the operator cannot be operated according to the slide displacement of the member.

According to the game machine D12, in addition to the effect of the game machine D10, the position of the engaging portion can be changed between the position where the operator can be operated and the position where the operator cannot be operated due to the slide displacement of the second slide member. Since it is formed, it is possible to form a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is switched when the slide member is slidably displaced, and a form in which the state of the one-way clutch is not switched. That is, a form in which the rotational state of the rotating member is changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end, and a state in which the rotational state of the rotating member is not changed while the slide member is displaced from the start end to the end. It can be formed and its effect can be enhanced.

Further, in addition to the slide displacement of the slide member, the second slide member can also be slid and displaced, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced by that amount, and the second slide member plays a role of performing the effect by the displacement. And the role of changing the position of the engaging portion are also used, so that it is not necessary to separately provide a means for changing the position of the engaging portion. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine D11 or D12, the engaging portion may be arranged on the second slide member or may be arranged on the base member. In the latter case, the engaging portion may be displaceably arranged on the base member, and the second sliding member may directly or indirectly displace the engaging portion.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 8400 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a base member, a shielding state for shielding a predetermined area of the base member, and a shielding / opening means capable of forming an open state for opening the predetermined area, the shielding / opening means is provided. A first member that is linearly displaceable on the base member, a first side pinion gear that is rotatably arranged on the first member, and a second rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed. The first member and the first member are provided with a second member having and displaced linearly in the first member, and a base-side rack gear formed on the base member and meshed with the first-side pinion gear. The shielding state is formed by linearly displacing the two members to one side, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to the one side. A game machine E1 characterized in that an open state is formed.

Here, a gaming machine including a base member and a shielding / opening means capable of forming a shielding state for shielding a predetermined region of the base member and an open state for opening a predetermined region is known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058, a plurality of plate-shaped rotating plates are rotatably arranged in a predetermined region, and the predetermined region is shielded by directing the plate surfaces of the plurality of rotating plates to the front. (Forming a shielded state) On the other hand, by rotating each rotating plate 90 degrees and turning the thick portion (side surface) to the front, a gap is provided between each rotating plate and a predetermined area is opened (opening state is formed). ) What is disclosed.

However, according to the above-mentioned conventional game machine, even if the open state is formed, each rotating plate in a state of being rotated by 90 degrees and having the plate thickness portion (side surface) facing the front remains in the predetermined region. However, there is a problem that the area to be opened is reduced accordingly. Even if the thickness of each rotating plate is reduced, there is a limit to the thinning in order to secure the strength during rotation.

On the other hand, one plate-shaped body having the same area as a predetermined region is displaceably arranged, and the plate-shaped body is displaced (arranged) to a predetermined region to shield (shield) the predetermined region. On the other hand, a gaming machine having a configuration in which a predetermined area is opened (a state is formed) by retracting a plate-shaped body from a predetermined area (displacement outside the predetermined area) is also known. There is. According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, if the plate-shaped body is retracted from the predetermined area, the predetermined area can be completely opened.

However, in the gaming machine having such a configuration, since the plate-shaped body has the same area as the predetermined area, a space having the same area as the predetermined area is provided as a space for arranging the plate-shaped body retracted from the predetermined area. There was a problem that it became necessary and caused an increase in size. Further, since it is a plate-like body having the same area as a predetermined area, it takes a relatively long time to retract the plate-like body from the predetermined area or to arrange the plate-like body from the retracted position to the predetermined area. There is a problem that it is difficult to quickly switch between the shielded state and the open state.

In this case, according to the game machine E1, the shielding opening means includes a first member rotatably arranged on the base member, a first side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the first member, and a pinion gear thereof. A second member having a second rack gear to which the first pinion gear is meshed and linearly displaceable to the first member, and a base rack gear formed on the base member to which the first pinion gear is meshed. The first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side to form a shielding state, and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to the other side opposite to one side. By doing so, an open state is formed.

That is, since the first member and the second member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member and the second member are retracted, the first member and the second member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member and the second member retracted from these predetermined regions are arranged accordingly. It is possible to reduce the size by reducing the space for evacuation.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. The time required for retracting the second member from the predetermined region or arranging the second member from the retracted position to the predetermined region can be shortened, and the shielded state and the open state can be quickly switched.

The shielded state in which the predetermined region is shielded does not have to be a state in which the entire surface of the predetermined region is completely shielded by the first member and the second member, and the region is open to a part of the predetermined region. May exist. Similarly, the open state in which the predetermined area is opened does not have to be the state in which the entire surface of the predetermined area is completely opened, and a part of the predetermined area is covered by a part of the first member or the second member. There may be a shielded area. That is, in the shielded state, the shielded area may be relatively large with respect to the open state, in other words, in the open state, the opened area may be relatively large with respect to the shielded state.

In the game machine E1, the first member includes a first main body portion that is supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a first displacement portion that is connected to the main body portion, and the second member is the said. A second main body portion having the second side rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed and being supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a second displacement portion connected to the second main body portion. The gaming machine E2 is provided, wherein the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside the predetermined region.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the first main body portion in which the first member is supported by the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the first displacement portion connected to the main body portion are provided. In addition, the second member is connected to a second main body portion which has a second side rack gear to which the first side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the first member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the second main body portion thereof. When the first member and the second member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side because the first main body portion of the first member is supported by the base member outside a predetermined region with the second displacement portion. Only the trajectories of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion can be superimposed on a predetermined region. That is, it is possible to prevent the first main body portion and the second main body portion from passing outside the predetermined region and their trajectories overlapping the predetermined region. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and a part of the first member and the second member does not remain in the predetermined region. The entire surface of a predetermined area can be completely opened.

In the game machine E2, the shield opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first main body portion of the first member includes a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first rack gear by the drive gear.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the shielding opening means includes a drive gear disposed on the base member, and the first member is a first side rack gear meshed with the drive gear. Since the first main body is provided with a structure in which the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member by driving the first rack gear by the drive gear, the structure for linearly displaces the first member is small. Can be changed. That is, among the spaces required outside the predetermined region of the base member, the space other than the space required for retracting the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means includes a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and the second side pinion gear thereof. The gaming machine E4 is characterized by having a third side rack gear to be meshed with the third member and a third member which is disposed linearly displaceable on the second member.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means is rotatably arranged on the second member and the second side pinion gear meshed with the base side rack gear. And a third member having a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and a third member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, so that the second member is provided with the linear displacement of the first member. When the member is linearly displaced to one side, the third member can be linearly displaced to one side with the displacement of the second member, and the second member is linearly displaced to the other side with the linear displacement of the first member. When the second member is linearly displaced to, the third member can be linearly displaced to the other side with the displacement of the second member.

Therefore, due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state. Due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced outside the predetermined area). ), An open state can be formed.

In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined regions is correspondingly the first. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed to reduce the size.

In particular, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (first member, second member and third member) in this way, it is compared with the case where the predetermined area of the same area is shielded by the second member. As a result, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area can be made smaller by superimposing the three-divided ones than by superimposing the two-divided predetermined areas.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is faster than that of the first member, and the second member is displaced from the second member. Since the third member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is further increased, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from a predetermined region or from the retracted position. The time required for arranging in a predetermined area can be shortened, and the switching between the shielded state and the open state can be performed more quickly.

In the game machine E4, the third member has the third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed, and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a third main body portion thereof. The gaming machine E5 characterized by having a third displacement portion connected to the main body portion.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, the third member has a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable. Since the main body portion and the third displacement portion connected to the third main body portion are provided, when the first member, the second member and the third member are linearly displaced to one side or the other side, the first member is first. Only the loci of the displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion can be superimposed on the predetermined region. That is, it is possible to prevent the first main body, the second main body, and the third main body from passing outside the predetermined region and their trajectories overlapping the predetermined region. As a result, when the open state is formed, the first displacement portion, the second displacement portion, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region, and the first member, the second member, and the third displacement portion are completely retracted from the predetermined region. Since a part of the member does not remain, the entire surface of the predetermined area can be completely opened.

The technical idea (relationship of the third member with respect to the second member) in the game machine E4 or E5 may be extended to provide a game machine further including a fourth member, a fifth member, ..., And an nth member.

That is, the shielding opening means has a second side pinion gear rotatably arranged on the second member and meshed with the base side rack gear, and a third side rack gear meshed with the second side pinion gear. By expanding the configuration in which the second member is provided with a third member that is linearly displaceable, the shielding opening means is rotatably arranged on the nth member and meshes with the base side rack gear. An nth side pinion gear to be formed and an n + 1 member having an n + 1 side rack gear to which the nth side pinion gear is meshed and arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the nth member may be further provided ( However, n is an integer of 3 or more).

Similarly, the third member is connected to a third main body portion which has a third side rack gear to which the second side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the second member so as to be linearly displaceable, and the third main body portion thereof. Expanding the configuration including the third displacement portion, the n + 1 member has the n + 1 side rack gear to which the nth side pinion gear is meshed and is supported by the nth member so as to be linearly displaceable. And an n + 1 displacement portion connected to the n + 1 main body portion thereof (however, n is an integer of 3 or more).

In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the shield opening means has a third member arranged so as to be linearly displaceable on the second member, and the first member and the second member are directed to one side or the other side. It is characterized by including a third relative displacement utilizing means for linearly displacing the third member to one side or the other side according to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member when the first member and the second member are linearly displaced. The game machine E6.

According to the game machine E6, the shield opening means is a case where the third member displaced linearly on the second member and the first member and the second member are linearly displaced toward one side or the other side. A third relative displacement utilization means for linearly displaces the third member to one side or the other side according to the relative displacement between the first member and the second member. Therefore, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E1 to E3, the following effect is produced.

That is, by linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to one side, the first member, the second member, and the third member can be arranged in a predetermined region to form a shielding state, and at the same time, a shielding state can be formed. Due to the linear displacement of the first member, the second member, and the third member to the other side, the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined area (displaced outside the predetermined area). ), An open state can be formed.

In this case, since the first member, the second member, and the third member are retracted from the predetermined region due to the linear displacement to the other side, the predetermined region can be opened more widely. Further, in the state where the first member, the second member and the third member are retracted, the first member, the second member and the third member are overlapped with each other, so that the first member retracted from these predetermined regions is correspondingly the first. The space for arranging the member, the second member, and the third member can be suppressed to reduce the size.

In this way, according to the structure in which the predetermined area is shielded by the three members (first member, second member and third member), it is compared with the case where the predetermined area having the same area is shielded by the second member. As a result, the space for arranging the three members retracted from the predetermined area can be made smaller. This is because the area is smaller when the predetermined area is divided into three parts than when the predetermined area is divided into two parts.

Further, when the first member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member, the second member is linearly displaced with respect to the base member in a state where the speed is higher than that of the first member. Therefore, when the third relative displacement utilization means linearly displaces the third member with the relative displacement between the first member and the second member, the speed of the second member is increased and the third member The linear displacement of is at least faster than that of the first member. The time required to retract the first member, the second member, and the third member from the predetermined area or to arrange the first member, the second member, and the third member from the retracted position to the predetermined area is shortened, and the shielding state and the open state can be switched. It can be done quickly.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the protrusion unit 700, and the elevating unit 800 as examples>
In a gaming machine including a first member and a second member that are displaceably formed between a retracted position and an overhanging position, the first member is linearly displaced from the retracted position to reach the overhanging position. The gaming machine F1 is arranged, and the second member is arranged at the overhanging position by being displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement.

Here, a gaming machine including a first member and a second member that are formed so as to be linearly displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position, respectively (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-252533) is known. In this type of gaming machine, for example, the first member and the second member retracted to the retracted position are displaced to the overhanging position and brought close to each other or brought into contact with each other, thereby associating (integrating) them with each other. , The effect of making the player visually recognize as one character is performed.

In this case, in order to enhance the effect, it is effective that a larger character can be formed when the first member and the second member are displaced to the overhanging position. For that purpose, it is necessary to form the first member and the second member in a large size.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, since the first member and the second member are respectively displaced to the overhang position by linear displacement, when the first member and the second member are enlarged, they move to the overhang position. There is a risk of mutual interference during displacement. Therefore, the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member cannot be performed at the same time, and it is necessary to shift the displacements of the respective members. Therefore, it takes a long time to form the character, and the displacement is extended. There was a problem that the production effect was hindered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the first member is arranged in the overhang position by being linearly displaced from the retracted position, and the second member is displaced from the retracted position in a manner including at least rotational displacement. Since it is arranged at the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from interfering with each other during the displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, since the displacement of the first member and the displacement of the second member can be performed at the same time, the time until the character is formed can be shortened and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The game machine F1 is characterized in that the second member is arranged at the overhanging position by being displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the second member is displaced in a mode in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined, so that the second member is arranged at the overhanging position, so that it has a curved shape. Can form a trajectory of. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position.

The game machine F2 includes a linear base member that is linearly displaced, and the second member is rotatably arranged on the linear base member so that the second member is displaced in a manner in which rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. A game machine F3 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the second member is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, thereby causing rotational displacement and linear displacement. Since the second member is displaced in a combined manner, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position, and the position of the second member at the retracted position is free. The degree can be increased. That is, since the second member can rotate in relation to the first member while moving to the overhang position due to the linear displacement of the linear base member, the rotation is not the movement to the overhang position, but the second member. It can be used as a displacement for avoiding interference with one member, and as a result, mutual interference can be easily suppressed. Further, as a result, the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be defined independently of the posture at the overhanging position, so that the degree of freedom of the posture of the second member at the retracted position can be increased.

The game machine F2 or F3 includes a liquid crystal display device arranged in the game area, and a retracted position of the second member is set on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhanging position and vertically long at the retracted position.

Here, in the configuration in which the second member is formed in a horizontally long shape, arranged in a horizontally long posture at the overhanging position, and the character is formed together with the first member, a large character cannot be formed, and the effect is sufficiently produced. I can't show it. That is, since the game area is formed vertically, while the liquid crystal display device is formed horizontally, one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area are relatively narrowed, and the space for arranging the members is relatively narrow. It is difficult to secure. Therefore, in order for the second member not to protrude into the display area of the liquid crystal display device at the retracted position, it is necessary to form the second member in a small size.

In this case, according to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, the second member is arranged in a horizontally long posture in the overhanging position, while being arranged in a vertically long posture in the retracted position. Therefore, the space for arranging the members on one side or the other side of the liquid crystal display device can be effectively utilized, and the size of the second member can be increased accordingly. As a result, the character formed together with the first member at the overhanging position. Can be made larger.

The game machine F3 is characterized by including a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Game machine F5.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause a linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the second member. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the second member can be synchronized with each other, the relative positional accuracy of the second member with respect to the first member can be improved. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the second member from interfering with the first member during the displacement to the overhanging position.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the second member, the second member can be formed to be larger by that amount, and the character formed together with the first member at the overhanging position can be made larger. .. For example, even in an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the second member is retracted to such an area. The second member can be formed in a large size while setting the position.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, a third member is provided so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the third member is the first member and the second member at the overhanging position. A game machine F6 characterized in that it is arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, the first member and the second member are provided because the third member is displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhanging position. At the same time, a larger character can be formed, and the effect of the production can be enhanced accordingly. In this case, since the third member is arranged at a different position in the front-rear direction from the first member and the second member at the overhang position, it does not come into contact with the first member and the second member at the overhang position. That is, when the members are brought into contact with each other at the overhanging position, or when there is a possibility of contact with each other, it is necessary to set the displacement speed in consideration of the damage due to the impact at the time of contact. , Since it is not in contact with the first member and the second member, its displacement speed can be made relatively high. As a result, for example, it is possible to form a mode in which the later third member is displaced so as to catch up with the first and second members of the starting lineup at the overhanging position, and the effect of forming the character can be enhanced. ..

The game machine F6 is characterized in that the third member includes an overhanging portion formed so as to project to a side having the same position in the front-rear direction as the first member and the second member.

Here, if the positions of the first member, the second member, and the third member in the front-rear direction are different, the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction becomes larger and larger by that amount. If the front-rear direction dimensions of the first member, the second member, and the third member are made smaller (thinner) in order to suppress the front-rear direction dimension, it becomes difficult to secure the rigidity.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F7, the third member includes an overhanging portion formed so as to project to the side having the same front-rear direction as the first member and the second member, and thus the whole (first member). And the front-rear direction dimension as the total of the second member and the third member) is suppressed to reduce the size of the game machine in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear direction dimension of the third member is increased to ensure its rigidity. can do.

The game machine F8 is characterized in that any one of the game machines F1 to F7 includes a contacted member which is arranged on the first member and a part of the second member is in contact with the first member at an overhanging position.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F7, the first member includes a contacted member with which a part of the second member is abutted at the overhanging position. The displacement of the second member can be stopped by the contact with the contact member.

The contacted member may be formed at a position where the second member is constantly in contact with the first member and the second member when they are arranged at the overhanging position, or the first member and the contacted member may be formed. When the second member is arranged at the overhanging position, it may be formed at a position where the second member comes into contact when both are closer than the reference position due to control variation or dimensional variation.

In the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is in a state where the contacted member is separated from the first member. A game machine F9 characterized in that it is placed in an overhanging position.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the contacted member is the first member of the first member. Since it is arranged at the overhanging position in a state of being separated from the member, it is possible to ensure reliable contact with the second member at the overhanging position. Further, at the overhanging position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by the amount that the contacted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member.

In the game machine F9, the game machine F10 is characterized in that after the first member is arranged at an overhanging position, the contacted member is displaced in a direction close to the first member.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of the game machine F9, after the first member is arranged at the overhanging position, the contacted member is displaced in a direction close to the first member, so that the second member A space can be formed for the member to be displaced. That is, when the first member is arranged at the overhanging position, the contacted member is kept away from the first member to exert the role of receiving the displacement of the second member, and then to the first member. The contacted member can be displaced in the approaching direction, and the space formed by the displacement can be utilized as the displacement space of the second member, and the effect can be enhanced by the displacement of the second member.

In the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is at least in the retracted position, and the contacted member is the first member. A game machine F11 characterized in that it is in a state of being in close proximity to.

According to the game machine F11, in addition to the effect of the game machine F8, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaceable in the direction of approaching and separating from the first member, and the first member is hit at least in the retracted position. Since the contact member is in a state of being close to the first member, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space of the first member at the retracted position. Further, when the contacted member is displaced in the direction away from the first member at the overhanging position, the character formed by the first member and the second member can be made larger by that amount.

In the game machine F11, the game machine F12 is characterized in that the contacted member is maintained in a state of being close to the first member until the first member is arranged at an overhanging position. ..

According to the game machine F12, in addition to the effect of the game machine F11, the first member is maintained in a state in which the contacted member is close to the first member until it is arranged at the overhanging position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the contacted member from interfering with the second member during the displacement to the overhanging position. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the character is formed and enhance the effect of the effect.

In any of the game machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and when the second member is brought into contact with the contacted member in one set, the contact is made. Along with this, the gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set.

According to the game machine F13, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F9 to F12, two sets of the second member and the contacted member are provided, and in one set, the second member hits the contacted member. When they are brought into contact with each other, the contacted member is formed so as to be displaced toward the second member in the other set. Therefore, for example, in one set, the second member is in the reference position. When the contacted member is displaced beyond the above and is brought into contact with the contacted member, the contacted member can be displaced toward the second member in the other set in accordance with the contact. Therefore, when the contacted member is brought into contact with the second member in the other set, the impact of the contact of the second member with the contacted member in the other set may be received only by the first member. It can also be received by the second member in the other set. As a result, the kinetic energy can be dispersed, the displacement of the second member in one set can be easily stopped, and the damage of each member can be suppressed.

In addition, as a structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member due to the contact in one set, for example, the displacement of the contacted member in one set is the displacement in the other set. A structure in which the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member by being transmitted to the contact member, and the displacement of the contacted member in one set is transmitted to the first member, and the displacement thereof is transmitted to the first member. A structure in which the first member is displaced along with the transmission so that the contacted member in the other set is displaced toward the second member together with the first member, or a structure in which these are combined. Is exemplified.

A game characterized in that any of the game machines F1 to F13 is provided with a periodic displacement member that is in contact with the first member and the second member at an overhanging position and is formed so as to be periodically displaced. Machine F14.

According to the game machine F14, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F13, the periodic displacement member includes a periodic displacement member formed so as to be in contact with the first member and the second member at the overhanging position. Since periodic displacement is possible, the first member and the second member can be periodically displaced by utilizing the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member. That is, the character formed by the first member, the second member, and the periodic displacement member can be vibrated, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. Further, in this case, the structure is such that the periodic displacement members are shared by bringing them into contact with each other, and it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for periodically displaces the first member and the second member, respectively. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The first member and the second member may be in contact with each other at the overhanging position, or may be separated from each other (non-contact).

In the game machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position where the position in the front-rear direction at the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member.

According to the game machine F15, in addition to the effect of the game machine F14, the periodic displacement member is arranged at a position where the position in the front-rear direction at the overhanging position is in front of the first member and the second member. A member (periodic displacement member) arranged on the side closer to the person can be periodically displaced (vibrated). That is, since the character is vibrated by the member on the front side that is easily visible to the player as a vibration source, it is possible to produce an effect that makes it easy to convey the force of the vibration to the player.

In the game machine F14 or F15, the game machine F16 is characterized in that the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position.

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effect of the game machine F14 or F15, the first member and the second member are not in contact with each other at the overhanging position, so that the periodic displacement of the periodic displacement member is determined. It can be easily transmitted to the first member and the second member. Further, the first member and the second member are not related to each other, and they can be periodically displaced (vibrated) in different modes. That is, since the first member and the second member have different configurations (number of parts and shape of each part), even if the same vibration is transmitted from the periodic displacement member, they are vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the portion formed by the first member and the portion formed by the second member of one character can be vibrated in different modes. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of different vibration sources, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

<Concept of the invention using the slide unit 400, the upper united unit 700, and the lower united unit 800 as examples>
A first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position, and a second group consisting of a plurality of displaceable means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position. When each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhanging position, the first effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the first group, and the first effect mode is formed. When each displacement means is arranged at an overhang position, in a gaming machine in which a second effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the second group, the displacement means of one of the first group and the displacement means are described. The gaming machine G1 is provided with a means for both displacement and one of the second groups.

Here, from the first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position, and from the plurality of displaceable means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position. A gaming machine including the second group of the above is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176578).

According to this game machine, when each displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhang position, each displacement means of the first group is associated (integrated) with one character (first). While making the player recognize it as an effect mode), when each displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhang position, each displacement means of the second group is associated (integrated) with another character. As a (second effect mode), an effect of making the player recognize is performed. That is, in the first gaming state, each of the displacement means of the second group is retracted to the retracted position, while each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at the overhanging position, so that each of the first groups The first character is formed in the game area by the displacement means, and in the second gaming state, each displacement means of the first group is retracted to the retracted position, while each displacement means of the second group is moved to the overhang position. By arranging them, the effect of forming a second character in the game area by each displacement means of the second group is performed.

In this case, it is effective that a larger character can be formed in order to enhance the effect. For that purpose, it is necessary to form each displacement means of the first group and each displacement means of the second group in a large size.

However, as in the conventional technique described above, when a plurality of characters (directing modes) are formed, the total number of displacement means required for forming the plurality of characters increases accordingly, and each displacement means is evacuated. Since the area (space) for keeping the displacement is limited, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means. Therefore, it is difficult to increase each character (directing mode).

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, since it is provided with a means for both the displacement means of one of the first group and the displacement means of one of the second group, a plurality of means (third). The total number of displacement means required to form the effect modes 1 and 2) can be reduced, and each displacement means can be increased in size. As a result, each effect mode (character) can be enlarged.

In the game machine G1, the combined means has a different position between the overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and the overhang position arranged when forming the second effect mode. A game machine G2 characterized by being said to be.

Here, if the combined means are arranged at the same overhang position in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, the first effect mode and the second effect mode It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) common to the production mode is used, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the combined means arranged at the same position (overhanging position), the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the combined means forms the overhang position arranged when forming the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Since the overhanging position is different from the overhanging position, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the combined means is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode. Can be suppressed from being inhibited. Further, the degree of freedom can be increased by the amount that the combined means can be arranged at different positions (overhanging positions) in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode can be used. Differences (shape and arrangement position) can be easily formed.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the combined means is characterized in that the posture when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode are different. Game machine G3.

Here, if the combined means have the same posture in the case where the first effect mode is formed and the case where the second effect mode is formed, it is common to the first effect mode and the second effect mode. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the displacement means (combined means) of the above is used, which hinders the interest. Further, if it is necessary to form the first effect mode and the second effect mode by using the combined means of the same posture, the degree of freedom is reduced by that amount, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are reduced. It becomes difficult to form a difference (shape and arrangement position) from the production mode of.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the combined means has a posture when forming the first effect mode and a posture when forming the second effect mode. Since the posture is different from that of the above, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the combined means is used in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest. .. In addition, the degree of freedom can be increased by allowing the combined means to have different postures between the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and the difference between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (shape and arrangement). It is possible to easily form the installation position).

In the game machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged at an overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means are moved back and forth with respect to at least one displacement means in the first group. The gaming machine G4 characterized in that the directional positions are different and at least a part of them overlap in a front view.

Here, the combined means has different overhang positions or (and) different postures depending on whether the first effect mode is formed or the second effect is formed, and forms a plurality of stopped states. Since it is necessary, the control or structure becomes complicated, and the stopped state (arrangement position or (and) posture) tends to vary accordingly. In this case, in the structure in which the combined means abuts on one displacement means at the overhanging position (at least a part of the combined means coincides in the front-rear direction), the arrangement position and posture of the combined means must reach the target position. While a gap is formed between the displacement means and the displacement means, when the arrangement position or posture of the dual-purpose means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a misalignment. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the relationship with one displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2 or G3, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the first group Since the position in the front-rear direction is different from that of at least one of the displacement means and at least a part of the displacement means overlaps in the front view, even if the stopped state (extending position or (and) posture) varies. It is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the displacement means and the dual-purpose means. That is, even if the displacement of the dual-purpose means is insufficient due to the partial overlap in the front view, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the dual-purpose means and the single displacement means, and the positions in the front-rear direction are different. Even if the displacement of the means becomes excessive, it is possible to prevent one of the displacement means from being pushed out and causing a misalignment. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between the one displacement means and the combined means.

In the game machine G4, the one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are brought into contact with each other when they are arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode. A game machine G5 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine G5, in the game machine G4, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, Since they are in contact with each other, one of the displacement means and the other displacement means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In this case, as described above, the combined means tends to vary in the stopped state (overhanging position or (and) posture), and the combined means is used at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode. , In a structure that is in contact with one displacement means (at least a part of the positions match in the front-rear direction), if the arrangement position and posture of the dual-purpose means do not reach the target position, there is a gap between the two displacement means. Is formed and the association (unification) is hindered. Similarly, even if the arrangement position or posture of the combined means exceeds the target position, one displacement means is pushed out to cause a misalignment, so that the association (integration) is hindered. That is, when one displacement means and the other displacement means in the first group are in contact with each other at the overhanging position, the configuration of the game machine G4 (the position in the front-rear direction is different and the front view is different). (Partially overlaps) is particularly effective.

In the game machine G5, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means is located on the front side in the front-rear direction with respect to the one displacement means and the other displacement means. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that one of the displacement means and the other displacement means overlap each other in a front view with respect to a portion in contact with each other.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of the game machine G5, when the combined means is arranged at the overhanging position when forming the first effect mode, the combined means is more than the one displacement means and the other displacement means. Since it is located on the front side in the front-rear direction and the one displacement means and the other displacement means overlap each other in a front view, for example, one displacement means or (and) another displacement means. When a deviation occurs in the target position of the above and a gap is formed between the two displacement means, the gap can be shielded by the combined means to make it difficult for the player to see. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the relationship between one displacement means and the other displacement means is hindered, and it is possible to easily maintain the relationship between both displacement means and the combined means.

In any of the game machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the combined means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member, whereby rotational displacement and linear displacement are combined. An overhanging position of the combined means that is displaced in the embodiment and arranged when forming the first effect aspect, and an overhanging position of the combined means that is arranged when forming the second effect aspect. Are in different positions, and the posture of the combined means when forming the first effect mode and the posture of the combined means when forming the second effect mode are different. A game machine G7 characterized by.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of the game machines G2 to G6, a linear base member that is linearly displaced is provided, and the combined means is rotatably arranged on the linear base member so that the linear displacement and the linearity are linear. Since the displacement is combined with the displacement, the degree of freedom of the overhanging position and the posture when forming the first effect mode or the second effect mode can be increased.

In the game machine G7, the game machine G8 is characterized in that the position in the front-rear direction of the displacement means of one of the first groups is set between the linear base member and the combined means.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, the position in the front-rear direction of the displacement means of one of the first groups is set between the linear base member and the dual-purpose means. The means can be positioned closer to the front side so that the player can easily see them, and the position in the front-rear direction of one displacement means and the combined means can be made closer to each other. Therefore, it is possible to easily associate (integrate) one displacement means and the combined means so that the player can recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

In the game machine G8, in a state where the displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged in the retracted position, the one displacement means is arranged in a position where the linear base member and the linear base member overlap in front view. A game machine G9 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect of the game machine G8, in a state where one of the displacement means and the dual-purpose means in the first group is arranged at the retracted position, one displacement means and the linear base member Since they are arranged at overlapping positions in the front view, when one displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position in order to form the first effect mode, one displacement means is linear. It is possible to suppress contact with the side surface of the base member.

In the game machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged at the retracted position, the other displacement means are arranged at a position where they do not overlap the linear base member in front view. Then, while the other displacement means and the combined means are being displaced toward the overhanging position, the other displacement means is arranged at a position where the other displacement means overlaps the linear base member in a front view, and the linear base member is The gaming machine G10 is characterized in that at least the region where the other displacement means overlaps in the front view is smaller in the front-rear direction than the region where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effect of the game machine G9, in a state where the other displacement means and the combined means in the first group are arranged in the retracted position, the other displacement means are in front of the linear base member. The other displacement means are arranged at positions that do not overlap in view, and while the other displacement means and the combined means are being displaced toward the overhanging position, the other displacement means are arranged at a position where they overlap the linear base member in front view, and the linear base member. In order to form the first effect mode, at least the region where the other displacement means overlap in the front view is smaller in the front-rear direction than the region where the one displacement means overlaps in the front view. And when the straight base member (combined means) is displaced to the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the straight base member.

The game machine G10 includes a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to linearly displace it, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into rotation of the combined means. The gaming machine G11 is characterized in that the one displacement means of the linear base member is arranged in a region where the displacement means overlaps in a front view at a retracted position.

According to the game machine G11, in addition to the effect of the game machine G10, a driving means for applying a driving force to the linear base member to cause a linear displacement, and a conversion mechanism for converting the linear displacement of the linear base member into the rotation of the combined means. Since the linear displacement of the linear base member and the rotation of the dual-purpose means can be synchronized with each other, the relative position accuracy (posture) of the dual-purpose means with respect to the linear base member can be improved. Therefore, the displacement means and the dual-purpose means can be associated (integrated) so that the player can easily recognize the whole as a predetermined character.

Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide a driving means for rotating the combined means, the combined means can be formed in a large size, and the character formed at the overhanging position can be made larger. For example, even in an area that is relatively narrow and it is difficult to secure a space for arranging members, such as one side and the other side of the liquid crystal display device in the width direction of the game area, the combined means material is retracted to such an area. While setting the position, the combined means can be formed in a large size.

In this case, since the displacement means of one of the linear base members is arranged in the area where the displacement means of the linear base member overlaps in the front view in the retracted position, the other area of the linear base member (the conversion mechanism is not arranged). The anteroposterior dimension of the area) can be reduced. Therefore, when the other displacement means and the linear base member (combined means) are displaced to the overhanging position, it is possible to prevent the other displacement means from coming into contact with the side surface of the linear base member.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, and G1 to G11, the game machine K1 is a slot machine. .. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, and G1 to G11, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. K2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C9, D1 to D12, E1 to E6, F1 to F16, and G1 to G11, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine K3, which is characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is formed displaceably between a first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed displaceably between a retracted position and an overhanging position, and a retractable position and an overhanging position. A gaming machine including a second group including a plurality of displacement means is known (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-176578).
However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is difficult to increase the size of each displacement means.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the size of each displacement means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceable between the retracted position and the overhanging position, and the retracted position and the overhanging position. A second group consisting of a plurality of displacement means formed so as to be displaceable between them is provided, and when each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhang position, each of the displacement means of the first group is provided. When each of the displacement means of the second group is arranged at the overhanging position, the first effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the second group. The present invention includes a means for both displacement means of one of the first group and one of the displacement means of the second group.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the combined means has a protruding position arranged when forming the first effect mode and the second effect mode. The position is different from the overhanging position arranged at the time of formation.
The game machine of the technical idea 3 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, and the combined means forms the posture when forming the first effect mode and the second effect mode. The posture is different from the posture at the time.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, each displacement means can be increased in size.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the interest.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 Third symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
400 slide units (part of the first county, part of the second county)
410, 2410, 3410, 6410, 7410, 8410 base members
6411 protrusion (engagement part)
412 Base side rack gear (rack gear)
413, 4413 Left rotation transmission rack gear
4413a, 4414a Notch (missing part)
4413b, 4414b Small teeth (teeth adjacent to the missing part)
414, 4414 Right rotation transmission rack gear
420 Sliding rod member (guide member)
430, 2430, 5430, 6430, 7430, 8430, 9430 Left slide member (displacement member, slide member)
431, 8431 1st member (1st main body)
431a 1st side rack gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
8431b base member (first displacement part)
432 1st side pinion gear (pinion gear)
432a 2nd side rack gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
433, 8433, 9433 Second member (second main body)
433a 2nd side rack gear (rack gear)
8433d 2nd side pinion gear
434 base member (straight base member)
8434, 9434 base member (second displacement part)
435 rotating member (combined means)
435, 454, 5435, 5455 rotating members (second member)
437a, 457a, 2437a, 2457a transmission gear (pinion gear)
5439 one-way clutch
5439a switching plate (operator)
9444 wire (relative displacement utilization means)
8445 3rd member (3rd main body)
8445a 3rd side rack gear
8446, 9446 base member (third displacement part)
450, 2450, 5450, 6450, 7430 Right slide member (contact member, slide member)
454 base member (straight base member)
455 rotating member (second member)
471 Left drive gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
472 Right drive gear (part of rack and pinion mechanism)
476 Right drive motor (contact member drive means)
475 Left drive motor (drive means)
476 Right drive motor (drive means)
500 upper coalescing unit (part of the second county)
530 Upper displacement member (contact member)
600 lower coalescing unit (part of the second group)
610 base member
630 drive arm (connecting member)
631 shaft support hole (rotation base)
633 connection hole (connection tip)
640 lower displacement member (displacement member)
700 protruding units (part of the first county)
7460 second slide member
7465 roller (engagement part)
7466 motor (second drive means)
650 connecting arm (intermediate member)
672 drive motor (drive means)
720 elevating base (part of the first member)
730 rotating member (part of the first member)
732 rocking member (first member or second member, non-contact member)
733 Intermediary member (cam rubbing member)
733c sliding wall (part of the first transmission means or part of the second transmission means)
735 protruding member (second member or first member, crank rubbing member)
735b sliding hole (part of the second transmission means or part of the first transmission means, guide groove)
735b1 curved part (non-transmission section)
761 Drive body (cam member, crank member)
761b cam unit (part of the first transmission means or part of the second transmission means)
761c sliding pin (part of the second transmission means or part of the first transmission means, pin part)
763 drive motor (drive means)
800 elevating unit (part of the second county)
820 lifting member (third member, periodic displacement member)
871 Second slide member (overhanging part)
Vv upward velocity component (component in the direction toward the contacted member)

10 Pachinko machine (game machine )
4 10,2410,3410,6410,741 zero-based member
4 12 Base side rack gear (rack gear )
4 30,2430,5430,6430,743 0 left slide member (displacement member)
43 1 first member <br/> 432 first side pinion gear (pinion gear)
4 3 3 second member <br/> 433a second side rack gear (rack gear)
4 50,2450,5450,6450,7430 right slide member (contact member)

Claims (3)

A first group consisting of a plurality of displacement means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position, and a second group consisting of a plurality of displaceable means displaceably formed between the retracted position and the overhang position. When each of the displacement means of the first group is arranged at an overhanging position, the first effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the first group, and the first effect mode is formed. In a gaming machine in which, when each displacement means is arranged at an overhang position, a second effect mode is formed by each of the displacement means of the second group.
A gaming machine comprising a means for both the displacement means of one of the first group and the displacement means of one of the second group. The combined means is set so that the overhanging position arranged when forming the first effect aspect and the overhanging position arranged when forming the second effect aspect are different positions. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The combined means according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the posture when forming the first effect mode and the posture when forming the second effect mode are different from each other. Game machine.

Images